SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Cisco 200-120 
CCNA Cisco Certified Network Associate CCNA 
Version: 18.1
Topic 1, Operation of IP Data Networks 
QUESTION NO: 1 
Refer to the exhibit: 
What will Router1 do when it receives the data frame shown? (Choose three.) 
A. Router1 will strip off the source MAC address and replace it with the MAC address 
0000.0c36.6965. 
B. Router1 will strip off the source IP address and replace it with the IP address 192.168.40.1. 
C. Router1 will strip off the destination MAC address and replace it with the MAC address 
0000.0c07.4320. 
D. Router1 will strip off the destination IP address and replace it with the IP address of 
192.168.40.1. 
E. Router1 will forward the data packet out interface FastEthernet0/1. 
F. Router1 will forward the data packet out interface FastEthernet0/2. 
Answer: A,C,F 
Explanation: 
Remember, the source and destination MAC changes as each router hop along with the TTL 
being decremented but the source and destination IP address remain the same from source to 
destination. 
QUESTION NO: 2 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 2
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which three statements correctly describe Network Device A? (Choose three.) 
A. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.128, each interface does not require an IP address. 
B. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.128, each interface does require an IP address on a 
unique IP subnet. 
C. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.0, must be a Layer 2 device for the PCs to 
communicate with each other. 
D. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.0, must be a Layer 3 device for the PCs to 
communicate with each other. 
E. With a network wide mask of 255.255.254.0, each interface does not require an IP address. 
Answer: B,D,E 
Explanation: 
If Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.128 the hosts vary from x.x.x.0 - x.x.x.127 & x.x.x.128- x.x.x.255,so 
the IP Addresses of 2 hosts fall in different subnets so each interface needs an IP an address so 
that they can communicate each other. 
If Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 the 2 specified hosts fall in different subnets so they need a 
Layer 3 device to communicate. 
If Subnet Mask is 255.255.254.0 the 2 specified hosts are in same subnet so are in network 
address and can be accommodated in same Layer 2 domain and can communicate with each 
other directly using the Layer 2 address. 
QUESTION NO: 3 
Which layer in the OSI reference model is responsible for determining the availability of the 
receiving program and checking to see if enough resources exist for that communication? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 3
A. transport 
B. network 
C. presentation 
D. session 
E. application 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
This question is to examine the OSI reference model. 
The Application layer is responsible for identifying and establishing the availability of the intended 
communication partner and determining whether sufficient resources for the intended 
communication exist. 
QUESTION NO: 4 
Which of the following describes the roles of devices in a WAN? (Choose three.) 
A. A CSU/DSU terminates a digital local loop. 
B. A modem terminates a digital local loop. 
C. A CSU/DSU terminates an analog local loop. 
D. A modem terminates an analog local loop. 
E. A router is commonly considered a DTE device. 
F. A router is commonly considered a DCE device. 
Answer: A,D,E 
Explanation: 
The idea behind a WAN is to be able to connect two DTE networks together through a DCE 
network. The network’s DCE device (includes CSU/DSU) provides clocking to the DTE-connected 
interface (the router’s serial interface). 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 4
A modem modulates outgoing digital signals from a computer or other digital device to analog 
signals for a conventional copper twisted pair telephone line and demodulates the incoming 
analog signal and converts it to a digital signal for the digital device. A CSU/DSU is used between 
two digital lines - 
For more explanation of answer D, in telephony the local loop (also referred to as a subscriber 
line) is the physical link or circuit that connects from the demarcation point of the customer 
premises to the edge of the carrier or telecommunications service provider’s network. Therefore a 
modem terminates an analog local loop is correct. 
QUESTION NO: 5 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 5
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Host A pings interface S0/0 on router 3. What is the TTL value for that ping? 
A. 252 
B. 253 
C. 254 
D. 255 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
From the CCNA ICND2 Exam book: “Routers decrement the TTL by 1 every time they forward a 
packet; if a router decrements the TTL to 0, it throws away the packet. This prevents packets from 
rotating forever.” I want to make it clear that before the router forwards a packet, the TTL is still 
remain the same. For example in the topology above, pings to S0/1 and S0/0 of Router 2 have the 
same TTL. 
The picture below shows TTL values for each interface of each router and for Host B. Notice that 
Host A initializes ICMP packet with a TTL of 255: 
QUESTION NO: 6 
A network administrator is verifying the configuration of a newly installed host by establishing an 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 6
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
FTP connection to a remote server. What is the highest layer of the protocol stack that the network 
administrator is using for this operation? 
A. application 
B. presentation 
C. session 
D. transport 
E. internet 
F. data link 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
FTP belongs to Application layer and it is also the highest layer of the OSI model. 
QUESTION NO: 7 
Refer to the exhibit. 
After HostA pings HostB, which entry will be in the ARP cache of HostA to support this 
transmission? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 7
A. Exhibit A 
B. Exhibit B 
C. Exhibit C 
D. Exhibit D 
E. Exhibit E 
F. Exhibit F 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
When a host needs to reach a device on another subnet, the ARP cache entry will be that of the 
Ethernet address of the local router (default gateway) for the physical MAC address. The 
destination IP address will not change, and will be that of the remote host (HostB). 
QUESTION NO: 8 
A network interface port has collision detection and carrier sensing enabled on a shared twisted 
pair network. From this statement, what is known about the network interface port? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 8
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. This is a 10 Mb/s switch port. 
B. This is a 100 Mb/s switch port. 
C. This is an Ethernet port operating at half duplex. 
D. This is an Ethernet port operating at full duplex. 
E. This is a port on a network interface card in a PC. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Modern Ethernet networks built with switches and full-duplex connections no longer utilize 
CSMA/CD. CSMA/CD is only used in obsolete shared media Ethernet (which uses repeater or 
hub). 
QUESTION NO: 9 
A receiving host computes the checksum on a frame and determines that the frame is damaged. 
The frame is then discarded. At which OSI layer did this happen? 
A. session 
B. transport 
C. network 
D. data link 
E. physical 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The Data Link layer provides the physical transmission of the data and handles error notification, 
network topology, and flow control. The Data Link layer formats the message into pieces, each 
called a data frame, and adds a customized header containing the hardware destination and 
source address. Protocols Data Unit (PDU) on Datalink layer is called frame. According to this 
question the frame is damaged and discarded which will happen at the Data Link layer. 
QUESTION NO: 10 
Which of the following correctly describe steps in the OSI data encapsulation process? (Choose 
two.) 
A. The transport layer divides a data stream into segments and may add reliability and flow control 
information. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 9
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. The data link layer adds physical source and destination addresses and an FCS to the 
segment. 
C. Packets are created when the network layer encapsulates a frame with source and destination 
host addresses and protocol-related control information. 
D. Packets are created when the network layer adds Layer 3 addresses and control information to 
a segment. 
E. The presentation layer translates bits into voltages for transmission across the physical link. 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
The Application Layer (Layer 7) refers to communications services to applications and is the 
interface between the network and the application. Examples include. Telnet, HTTP, FTP, Internet 
browsers, NFS, SMTP gateways, SNMP, X.400 mail, and FTAM. 
The Presentation Layer (Layer 6) defining data formats, such as ASCII text, EBCDIC text, binary, 
BCD, and JPEG. Encryption also is defined as a presentation layer service. Examples include. 
JPEG, ASCII, EBCDIC, TIFF, GIF, PICT, encryption, MPEG, and MIDI. 
The Session Layer (Layer 5) defines how to start, control, and end communication sessions. This 
includes the control and management of multiple bidirectional messages so that the application 
can be notified if only some of a series of messages are completed. This allows the presentation 
layer to have a seamless view of an incoming stream of data. The presentation layer can be 
presented with data if all flows occur in some cases. Examples include. RPC, SQL, NFS, NetBios 
names, AppleTalk ASP, and DECnet SCP 
The Transport Layer (Layer 4) defines several functions, including the choice of protocols. The 
most important Layer 4 functions are error recovery and flow control. The transport layer may 
provide for retransmission, i.e., error recovery, and may use flow control to prevent unnecessary 
congestion by attempting to send data at a rate that the network can accommodate, or it might not, 
depending on the choice of protocols. Multiplexing of incoming data for different flows to 
applications on the same host is also performed. Reordering of the incoming data stream when 
packets arrive out of order is included. Examples include. TCP, UDP, and SPX. 
The Network Layer (Layer 3) defines end-to-end delivery of packets and defines logical 
addressing to accomplish this. It also defines how routing works and how routes are learned; and 
how to fragment a packet into smaller packets to accommodate media with smaller maximum 
transmission unit sizes. Examples include. IP, IPX, AppleTalk DDP, and ICMP. Both IP and IPX 
define logical addressing, routing, the learning of routing information, and end-to-end delivery 
rules. The IP and IPX protocols most closely match the OSI network layer (Layer 3) and are called 
Layer 3 protocols because their functions most closely match OSI's Layer 3. 
The Data Link Layer (Layer 2) is concerned with getting data across one particular link or medium. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 10
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The data link protocols define delivery across an individual link. These protocols are necessarily 
concerned with the type of media in use. Examples includE. IEEE 802.3/802.2, HDLC, Frame 
Relay, PPP, FDDI, ATM, and IEEE 802.5/802.2. 
QUESTION NO: 11 
Refer to the graphic. 
Host A is communicating with the server. What will be the source MAC address of the frames 
received by Host A from the server? 
A. the MAC address of router interface e0 
B. the MAC address of router interface e1 
C. the MAC address of the server network interface 
D. the MAC address of host A 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
Whereas switches can only examine and forward packets based on the contents of the MAC 
header, routers can look further into the packet to discover the network for which a packet is 
destined. Routers make forwarding decisions based on the packet's network-layer header (such 
as an IPX header or IP header). These network-layer headers contain source and destination 
network addresses. Local devices address packets to the router's MAC address in the MAC 
header. After receiving the packets, the router must perform the following steps: 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 11
1. Check the incoming packet for corruption, and remove the MAC header . The router checks the 
packet for MAC-layer errors. The router then strips off the MAC header and examines the network-layer 
header to determine what to do with the packet. 
2. Examine the age of the packet. The router must ensure that the packet has not come too far to 
be forwarded. For example, IPX headers contain a hop count. By default, 15 hops is the maximum 
number of hops (or routers) that a packet can cross. If a packet has a hop count of 15, the router 
discards the packet. IP headers contain a Time to Live (TTL) value. Unlike the IPX hop count, 
which increments as the packet is forwarded through each router, the IP TTL value decrements as 
the IP packet is forwarded through each router. If an IP packet has a TTL value of 1, the router 
discards the packet. A router cannot decrement the TTL value to 1 and then forward the packet. 
3. Determine the route to the destination. Routers maintain a routing table that lists available 
networks, the direction to the desired network (the outgoing interface number), and the distance to 
those networks. After determining which direction to forward the packet, the router must build a 
new header. (If you want to read the IP routing tables on a Windows 95/98 workstation, type 
ROUTE PRINT in the DOS box.) 
4. Build the new MAC header and forward the packet. Finally, the router builds a new MAC header 
for the packet. The MAC header includes the router's MAC address and the final destination's 
MAC address or the MAC address of the next router in the path. 
QUESTION NO: 12 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 12
What two results would occur if the hub were to be replaced with a switch that is configured with 
one Ethernet VLAN? (Choose two.) 
A. The number of collision domains would remain the same. 
B. The number of collision domains would decrease. 
C. The number of collision domains would increase. 
D. The number of broadcast domains would remain the same. 
E. The number of broadcast domains would decrease. 
F. The number of broadcast domains would increase. 
Answer: C,D 
Explanation: 
Basically, a collision domain is a network segment that allows normal network traffic to flow back 
and forth. In the old days of hubs, this meant you had a lot of collisions, and the old CSMA/CD 
would be working overtime to try to get those packets re-sent every time there was a collision on 
the wire (since ethernet allows only one host to be transmitting at once without there being a traffic 
jam). With switches, you break up collision domains by switching packets bound for other collision 
domains. These days, since we mostly use switches to connect computers to the network, you 
generally have one collision domain to a PC. 
Broadcast domains are exactly what they imply: they are network segments that allow broadcasts 
to be sent across them. Since switches and bridges allow for broadcast traffic to go unswitched, 
broadcasts can traverse collision domains freely. Routers, however, don't allow broadcasts 
through by default, so when a broadcast hits a router (or the perimeter of a VLAN), it doesn't get 
forwarded. The simple way to look at it is this way: switches break up collision domains, while 
routers (and VLANs) break up collision domains and broadcast domains. Also, a broadcast 
domain can contain multiple collision domains, but a collision domain can never have more than 
one broadcast domain associated with it. 
Collision Domain: A group of Ethernet or Fast Ethernet devices in a CSMA/CD LAN that are 
connected by repeaters and compete for access on the network. Only one device in the collision 
domain may transmit at any one time, and the other devices in the domain listen to the network in 
order to avoid data collisions. A collision domain is sometimes referred to as an Ethernet segment. 
Broadcast Domain: Broadcasting sends a message to everyone on the local network (subnet). An 
example for Broadcasting would be DHCP Request from a Client PC. The Client is asking for a IP 
Address, but the client does not know how to reach the DHCP Server. So the client sends a DHCP 
Discover packet to EVERY PC in the local subnet (Broadcast). But only the DHCP Server will 
answer to the Request. 
How to count them? 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 13
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Broadcast Domain: 
No matter how many hosts or devices are connected together, if they are connected with a 
repeater, hub, switch or bridge, all these devices are in ONE Broadcast domain (assuming a 
single VLAN). A Router is used to separate Broadcast-Domains (we could also call them Subnets 
- or call them VLANs). 
So, if a router stands between all these devices, we have TWO broadcast domains. 
Collision Domain: 
Each connection from a single PC to a Layer 2 switch is ONE Collision domain. For example, if 5 
PCs are connected with separate cables to a switch, we have 5 Collision domains. If this switch is 
connected to another switch or a router, we have one collision domain more. 
If 5 Devices are connected to a Hub, this is ONE Collision Domain. Each device that is connected 
to a Layer 1 device (repeater, hub) will reside in ONE single collision domain. 
QUESTION NO: 13 
Which three statements accurately describe Layer 2 Ethernet switches? (Choose three.) 
A. Spanning Tree Protocol allows switches to automatically share VLAN information. 
B. Establishing VLANs increases the number of broadcast domains. 
C. Switches that are configured with VLANs make forwarding decisions based on both Layer 2 
and Layer 3 address information. 
D. Microsegmentation decreases the number of collisions on the network. 
E. In a properly functioning network with redundant switched paths, each switched segment will 
contain one root bridge with all its ports in the forwarding state. All other switches in that broadcast 
domain will have only one root port. 
F. If a switch receives a frame for an unknown destination, it uses ARP to resolve the address. 
Answer: B,D,E 
Explanation: Explanation 
Microsegmentation is a network design (functionality) where each workstation or device on a 
network gets its own dedicated segment (collision domain) to the switch. Each network device 
gets the full bandwidth of the segment and does not have to share the segment with other devices. 
Microsegmentation reduces and can even eliminate collisions because each segment is its own 
collision domain -> . 
Note: Microsegmentation decreases the number of collisions but it increases the number of 
collision domains. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 14
QUESTION NO: 14 
Where does routing occur within the DoD TCP/IP reference model? 
A. application 
B. internet 
C. network 
D. transport 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
The picture below shows the comparison between TCP/IP model & OSI model. Notice that the 
Internet Layer of TCP/IP is equivalent to the Network Layer which is responsible for routing 
decision. 
QUESTION NO: 15 
Refer to exhibit: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 15
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which destination addresses will be used by Host A to send data to Host C? (Choose two.) 
A. the IP address of Switch 1 
B. the MAC address of Switch 1 
C. the IP address of Host C 
D. the MAC address of Host C 
E. the IP address of the router's E0 interface 
F. the MAC address of the router's E0 interface 
Answer: C,F 
Explanation: Explanation 
While transferring data through many different networks, the source and destination IP addresses 
are not changed. Only the source and destination MAC addresses are changed. So in this case 
Host A will use the IP address of Host C and the MAC address of E0 interface to send data. When 
the router receives this data, it replaces the source MAC address with it own E1 interface’s MAC 
address and replaces the destination MAC address with Host C’s MAC address before sending to 
Host C . 
QUESTION NO: 16 
For what two purposes does the Ethernet protocol use physical addresses? (Choose two.) 
A. to uniquely identify devices at Layer 2 
B. to allow communication with devices on a different network 
C. to differentiate a Layer 2 frame from a Layer 3 packet 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 16
D. to establish a priority system to determine which device gets to transmit first 
E. to allow communication between different devices on the same network 
F. to allow detection of a remote device when its physical address is unknown 
Answer: A,E 
Explanation: 
Physical addresses or MAC addresses are used to identify devices at layer 2. 
MAC addresses are only used to communicate on the same network. To communicate on different 
network we have to use Layer 3 addresses (IP addresses) -> B is not correct. 
Layer 2 frame and Layer 3 packet can be recognized via headers. Layer 3 packet also contains 
physical address -> 
On Ethernet, each frame has the same priority to transmit by default -> 
All devices need a physical address to identify itself. If not, they can not communicate -> 
QUESTION NO: 17 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Based on the information given, which switch will be elected root bridge and why? 
A. Switch A, because it has the lowest MAC address 
B. Switch A, because it is the most centrally located switch 
C. Switch B, because it has the highest MAC address 
D. Switch C, because it is the most centrally located switch 
E. Switch C, because it has the lowest priority 
F. Switch D, because it has the highest priority 
Answer: E 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 17
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Explanation: 
To elect the root bridge in the LAN, first check the priority value. The switch having the lowest 
priority will win the election process. If Priority Value is the same then it checks the MAC Address; 
the switch having the lowest MAC Address will become the root bridge. In this case, switch C has 
the lowest MAC Address so it becomes the root bridge. 
QUESTION NO: 18 
Which of the following statements describe the network shown in the graphic? (Choose two.) 
A. There are two broadcast domains in the network. 
B. There are four broadcast domains in the network. 
C. There are six broadcast domains in the network. 
D. There are four collision domains in the network. 
E. There are five collision domains in the network. 
F. There are seven collision domains in the network. 
Answer: A,F 
Explanation: 
Only router can break up broadcast domains so in the exhibit there are 2 broadcast domains: from 
e0 interface to the left is a broadcast domain and from e1 interface to the right is another 
broadcast domain ->. 
Both router and switch can break up collision domains so there is only 1 collision domain on the 
left of the router (because hub doesn’t break up collision domain) and there are 6 collision 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 18
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
domains on the right of the router (1 collision domain from e1 interface to the switch + 5 collision 
domains for 5 PCs in Production) -> 
QUESTION NO: 19 
In an Ethernet network, under what two scenarios can devices transmit? (Choose two.) 
A. when they receive a special token 
B. when there is a carrier 
C. when they detect no other devices are sending 
D. when the medium is idle 
E. when the server grants access 
Answer: C,D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Ethernet network is a shared environment so all devices have the right to access to the medium. If 
more than one device transmits simultaneously, the signals collide and can not reach the 
destination. 
If a device detects another device is sending, it will wait for a specified amount of time before 
attempting to transmit. 
When there is no traffic detected, a device will transmit its message. While this transmission is 
occurring, the device continues to listen for traffic or collisions on the LAN. After the message is 
sent, the device returns to its default listening mode. 
QUESTION NO: 20 
A router has two Fast Ethernet interfaces and needs to connect to four VLANs in the local 
network. How can you accomplish this task, using the fewest physical interfaces and without 
decreasing network performance? 
A. Use a hub to connect the four VLANS with a Fast Ethernet interface on the router. 
B. Add a second router to handle the VLAN traffic. 
C. Add two more Fast Ethernet interfaces. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 19
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
D. Implement a router-on-a-stick configuration. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
A router on a stick allows you to use sub-interfaces to create multiple logical networks on a single 
physical interface. 
QUESTION NO: 21 
Host 1 is trying to communicate with Host 2. The e0 interface on Router C is down. 
Which of the following are true? (Choose two.) 
A. Router C will use ICMP to inform Host 1 that Host 2 cannot be reached. 
B. Router C will use ICMP to inform Router B that Host 2 cannot be reached. 
C. Router C will use ICMP to inform Host 1, Router A, and Router B that Host 2 cannot be 
reached. 
D. Router C will send a Destination Unreachable message type. 
E. Router C will send a Router Selection message type. 
F. Router C will send a Source Quench message type. 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
Host 1 is trying to communicate with Host 2. The e0 interface on Router C is down. Router C will 
send ICMP packets to inform Host 1 that Host 2 cannot be reached. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 20
QUESTION NO: 22 
What is the difference between a CSU/DSU and a modem? 
A. A CSU/DSU converts analog signals from a router to a leased line; a modem converts analog 
signals from a router to a leased line. 
B. A CSU/DSU converts analog signals from a router to a phone line; a modem converts digital 
signals from a router to a leased line. 
C. A CSU/DSU converts digital signals from a router to a phone line; a modem converts analog 
signals from a router to a phone line. 
D. A CSU/DSU converts digital signals from a router to a leased line; a modem converts digital 
signals from a router to a phone line. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
CSU/DSU is used to convert digital signals from a router to a network circuit such as a T1, while a 
modem is used to convert digital signals over a regular POTS line. 
QUESTION NO: 23 DRAG DROP 
Answer: 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 21
To remember which type of cable you should use, follow these tips: 
- To connect two serial interfaces of 2 routers we use serial cable– To specify when we use 
crossover cable or straight-through cable, we should remember:Group 1: Router, Host, Server 
Group 2: Hub, SwitchOne device in group 1 + One device in group 2: use straight-through cable 
Two devices in the same group: use crossover cable 
For example: we use straight-through cable to connect switch to router, switch to host, hub to host, 
hub to server… and we use crossover cable to connect switch to switch, switch to hub, router to 
router, host to host… ) 
QUESTION NO: 24 DRAG DROP 
Answer: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 22
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 25 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 23
Answer: 
Explanation: 
Source Mac Address Destination Mac Address Source IP address Destination MAC address 
MAC 0000.0c89.3333 MAC 0000.0c89.9999 IP 172.16.34.250 IP 172.16.21.7 
QUESTION NO: 26 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 24
Answer: 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 27 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 25
Answer: 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 26
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Topic 2, LAN Switching Technologies 
QUESTION NO: 28 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Switch port FastEthernet 0/24 on ALSwitch1 will be used to create an IEEE 802.1Q-compliant 
trunk to another switch. Based on the output shown, what is the reason the trunk does not form, 
even though the proper cabling has been attached? 
A. VLANs have not been created yet. 
B. An IP address must be configured for the port. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 27
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
C. The port is currently configured for access mode. 
D. The correct encapsulation type has not been configured. 
E. The “no shutdown” command has not been entered for the port. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
According to the output shown the switchport (layer 2 Switching) is enabled and the port is in 
access mode. To make a trunk link the port should configured as a trunk port, not an access port, 
by using the following command: (Config-if)#switchport mode trunk 
QUESTION NO: 29 
Which port state is introduced by Rapid-PVST? 
A. learning 
B. listening 
C. discarding 
D. forwarding 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
PVST+ is based on IEEE802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). But PVST+ has only 3 port states 
(discarding, learning and forwarding) while STP has 5 port states (blocking, listening, learning, 
forwarding and disabled). So discarding is a new port state in PVST+. 
QUESTION NO: 30 
VLAN 3 is not yet configured on your switch. What happens if you set the switchport access vlan 3 
command in interface configuration mode? 
A. The command is rejected. 
B. The port turns amber. 
C. The command is accepted and the respective VLAN is added to vlan.dat. 
D. The command is accepted and you must configure the VLAN manually. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
The “switchport access vlan 3” will put that interface as belonging to VLAN 3 while also updated 
the VLAN database automatically to include VLAN 3. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 28
QUESTION NO: 31 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What value is primarily used to determine which port becomes the root port on each nonroot 
switch in a spanning-tree topology? 
A. path cost 
B. lowest port MAC address 
C. VTP revision number 
D. highest port priority number 
E. port priority number and MAC address 
Answer: A 
Explanation: The path cost to the root bridge is the most important value to determine which port 
will become the root port on each non-root switch. In particular, the port with lowest cost to the root 
bridge will become root port (on non-root switch). 
QUESTION NO: 32 
In a switched environment, what does the IEEE 802.1Q standard describe? 
A. the operation of VTP 
B. a method of VLAN trunking 
C. an approach to wireless LAN communication 
D. the process for root bridge selection 
E. VLAN pruning 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
A broadcast domain must sometimes exist on more than one switch in the network. To accomplish 
this, one switch must send frames to another switch and indicate which VLAN a particular frame 
belongs to. On Cisco switches, a trunk link is created to accomplish this VLAN identification. ISL 
and IEEE 802.1Q are different methods of putting a VLAN identifier in a Layer 2 frame. 
The IEEE 802.1Q protocol interconnects VLANs between multiple switches, routers, and servers. 
With 802.1Q, a network administrator can define a VLAN topology to span multiple physical 
devices. 
Cisco switches support IEEE 802.1Q for FastEthernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. An 802.1Q 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 29
trunk link provides VLAN identification by adding a 4-byte tag to an Ethernet Frame as it leaves a 
trunk port. 
QUESTION NO: 33 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Switch-1 needs to send data to a host with a MAC address of 00b0.d056.efa4. What will Switch-1 
do with this data? 
A. Switch-1 will drop the data because it does not have an entry for that MAC address. 
B. Switch-1 will flood the data out all of its ports except the port from which the data originated. 
C. Switch-1 will send an ARP request out all its ports except the port from which the data 
originated. 
D. Switch-1 will forward the data to its default gateway. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
This question tests the operating principles of the Layer 2 switch. Check the MAC address table of 
Switch1 and find that the MAC address of the host does not exist in the table. Switch1 will flood 
the data out all of its ports except the port from which the data originated to determine which port 
the host is located in. 
Switches work as follows: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 30
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
In output there is no MAC address of give host so switch floods to all ports except the source port. 
QUESTION NO: 34 
What is the function of the command switchport trunk native vlan 999 on a Cisco Catalyst switch? 
A. It creates a VLAN 999 interface. 
B. It designates VLAN 999 for untagged traffic. 
C. It blocks VLAN 999 traffic from passing on the trunk. 
D. It designates VLAN 999 as the default for all unknown tagged traffic. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Configuring the Native VLAN for Untagged Traffic 
A trunk port configured with 802.1Q tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic. By 
default, the switch forwards untagged traffic in the native VLAN configured for the port. The native 
VLAN is VLAN 1 by default. 
QUESTION NO: 35 
Which two protocols are used by bridges and/or switches to prevent loops in a layer 2 network? 
(Choose two.) 
A. 802.1d 
B. VTP 
C. 802.1q 
D. STP 
E. SAP 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
This question is to examine the STP protocol. 
STP (802.1d) is used to prevent Layer 2 loops. 
802.1q is a Frame Relay protocol which belongs to VLAN. 
SAP is a concept of the OSI model. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 31
QUESTION NO: 36 
Which switch would STP choose to become the root bridge in the selection process? 
A. 32768: 11-22-33-44-55-66 
B. 32768: 22-33-44-55-66-77 
C. 32769: 11-22-33-44-55-65 
D. 32769: 22-33-44-55-66-78 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
The root bridge of the spanning tree is the bridge with the smallest (lowest) bridge ID. Each bridge 
has a configurable priority number and a MAC Address; the bridge ID contains both numbers 
combined together - Bridge priority + MAC (32768.0200.0000.1111). The Bridge priority default is 
32768 and can only be configured in multiples of 4096(Spanning tree uses the 12 bits extended 
system ID). To compare two bridge IDs, the priority is compared first, as if looking at a real number 
anything less than 32768...will become the target of being the root. If two bridges have equal 
priority then the MAC addresses are compared; for example, if switches A 
(MAC=0200.0000.1111) and B (MAC=0200.0000.2222) both have a priority of 32768 then switch 
A will be selected as the root bridge. 
In this case, 32768: 11-22-33-44-55-66 would be the bridge because it has a lower priority and 
MAC address. 
QUESTION NO: 37 
A switch is configured with all ports assigned to VLAN 2 with full duplex FastEthernet to segment 
existing departmental traffic. What is the effect of adding switch ports to a new VLAN on the 
switch? 
A. More collision domains will be created. 
B. IP address utilization will be more efficient. 
C. More bandwidth will be required than was needed previously. 
D. An additional broadcast domain will be created. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 32
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Each VLAN creates its own broadcast domain. Since this is a full duplex switch, each port is a 
separate collision domain. 
QUESTION NO: 38 
What are three benefits of implementing VLANs? (Choose three.) 
A. A higher level of network security can be reached by separating sensitive data traffic from other 
network traffic. 
B. A more efficient use of bandwidth can be achieved allowing many physical groups to use the 
same network infrastructure. 
C. A more efficient use of bandwidth can be achieved allowing many logical networks to use the 
same network infrastructure. 
D. Broadcast storms can be mitigated by increasing the number of broadcast domains, thus 
reducing their size. 
E. Broadcast storms can be mitigated by decreasing the number of broadcast domains, thus 
increasing their size. 
F. VLANs make it easier for IT staff to configure new logical groups, because the VLANs all belong 
to the same broadcast domain. 
G. Port-based VLANs increase switch-port use efficiency, thanks to 802.1Q trunks. 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: 
Benefits of VLANs 
VLAN is a network structure which allows users to communicate while in different locations by 
sharing one multicast domain and a single broadcast. They provide numerous networking benefits 
and have become popular in the market. For instance, it helps reduce administrative costs when 
users are geographically dispersed. 
1. Inexpensive 
The popularity of VLANs is due to the fact that changes, adds, and moves can be attained simply 
by making necessary configurations on the VLAN port. Time-consuming, re-addressing, and host 
reconfigurations is now a thing of the past, because network configuration can be made at ease 
when need arises. 
2. Better management 
A VLAN typically solve the scalability issues that exist in a large network by breaking the main 
domain into several VLAN groups or smaller broadcast configurations, thereby encourage better 
control of multicast traffic as well as broadcast domains. 
3. Improves network security 
High-security can be positioned in different VLAN groups to ensure that non-members cannot 
receive their broadcasts. On the other hand, a router is added and workgroups relocated into 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 33
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
centralized locations. 
4. Enhances performance 
A more efficient use of bandwidth can be achieved allowing many logical networks to use the 
same network infrastructure. 
5. Segment multiple networks 
VLANs are typically used to achieve multiple purposes. They are popularly used to reduce 
broadcast traffic. Each VLAN creates a separate, smaller broadcast domain. 
6. Better administration 
VLANs facilitate grouping of multiple geographical stations. When VLAN users move to another 
physical location, the network does not have to be configured. 
QUESTION NO: 39 
Which IEEE standard protocol is initiated as a result of successful DTP completion in a switch over 
Fast Ethernet? 
A. 802.3ad 
B. 802.1w 
C. 802.1D 
D. 802.1Q 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) is a Cisco proprietary protocol for negotiating trunking on a link 
between two devices and for negotiating the type of trunking encapsulation (802.1Q) to be used. 
QUESTION NO: 40 
Which of the following are benefits of VLANs? (Choose three.) 
A. They increase the size of collision domains. 
B. They allow logical grouping of users by function. 
C. They can enhance network security. 
D. They increase the size of broadcast domains while decreasing the number of collision domains. 
E. They increase the number of broadcast domains while decreasing the size of the broadcast 
domains. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 34
F. They simplify switch administration. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B,C,E 
Explanation: Explanation 
When using VLAN the number and size of collision domains remain the same -> 
VLANs allow to group users by function, not by location or geography -> . 
VLANs help minimize the incorrect configuration of VLANs so it enhances the security of the 
network -> . 
VLAN increases the size of broadcast domains but does not decrease the number of collision 
domains -> 
VLANs increase the number of broadcast domains while decreasing the size of the broadcast 
domains which increase the utilization of the links. It is also a big advantage of VLAN -> . 
VLANs are useful but they are more complex and need more administration -> 
QUESTION NO: 41 
Refer to the exhibit. 
A technician has installed SwitchB and needs to configure it for remote access from the 
management workstation connected to SwitchA. Which set of commands is required to 
accomplish this task? 
A. SwitchB(config)# interface FastEthernet 0/1 
SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 35
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. SwitchB(config)# interface vlan 1 
SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config-if)# ip default-gateway 192.168.8.254 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown 
C. SwitchB(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.8.254 
SwitchB(config)# interface vlan 1 
SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown 
D. SwitchB(config)# ip default-network 192.168.8.254 
SwitchB(config)# interface vlan 1 
SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown 
E. SwitchB(config)# ip route 192.168.8.254 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config)# interface FastEthernet 0/1 
SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 
SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
To remote access to SwitchB, it must have a management IP address on a VLAN on that switch. 
Traditionally, we often use VLAN 1 as the management VLAN (but in fact it is not secure). 
In the exhibit, we can recognize that the Management Workstation is in a different subnet from the 
SwitchB. For intersubnetwork communication to occur, you must configure at least one default 
gateway. This default gateway is used to forward traffic originating from the switch only, not to 
forward traffic sent by devices connected to the switch. 
QUESTION NO: 42 
Which two states are the port states when RSTP has converged? (Choose two.) 
A. discarding 
B. listening 
C. learning 
D. forwarding 
E. disabled 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk389/tk621/technologies_white_paper09186a0080094cfa.shtml 
#states 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 36
QUESTION NO: 43 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which two commands can be used to verify a trunk link configuration status on a given Cisco 
switch interface? (Choose two.) 
A. show interface trunk 
B. show interface interface 
C. show ip interface brief 
D. show interface vlan 
E. show interface switchport 
Answer: A,E 
Explanation: 
Example output from these two commands: 
SW3#show interface trunk 
Port Mode Encapsulation Status Native vlanFa0/19 auto n-802.1q trunking 1Fa0/20 auto n-802.1q 
trunking 1Fa0/21 auto n-802.1q trunking 1Fa0/22 auto n-802.1q trunking 1 
Port Vlans allowed on trunkFa0/19 1-4094Fa0/20 1-4094Fa0/21 1-4094Fa0/22 1-4094 
SW1#show interface fast 0/2 switchportName: Fa0/2Switchport: EnabledAdministrative Mode: 
dynamic desirableOperational Mode: downAdministrative Trunking Encapsulation: 
dot1qNegotiation of TrunkinG. OnAccess Mode VLAN: 1 (default)Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 
(default)Voice VLAN: none 
QUESTION NO: 44 
Which command enables RSTP on a switch? 
A. spanning-tree uplinkfast 
B. spanning-tree mode rapid-pvst 
C. spanning-tree backbonefast 
D. spanning-tree mode mst 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is an enhancement of the original STP 802.1D protocol. 
The RSTP 802.1w protocol is an IEEE open implementation. Cisco has its own proprietary 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 37
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
implementation of RSTP, that includes the benefits of its Per-VLAN spanning tree protocols, called 
Rapid-PVST+. 
To activate the Rapid-PVST+ protocol: switch(config)#spanning-tree mode rapid-pvst 
QUESTION NO: 45 
Refer to the exhibit. 
All switch ports are assigned to the correct VLANs, but none of the hosts connected to SwitchA 
can communicate with hosts in the same VLAN connected to SwitchB. Based on the output 
shown, what is the most likely problem? 
A. The access link needs to be configured in multiple VLANs. 
B. The link between the switches is configured in the wrong VLAN. 
C. The link between the switches needs to be configured as a trunk. 
D. VTP is not configured to carry VLAN information between the switches. 
E. Switch IP addresses must be configured in order for traffic to be forwarded between the 
switches. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 38
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
In order to pass traffic from VLANs on different switches, the connections between the switches 
must be configured as trunk ports. 
QUESTION NO: 46 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which WAN protocol is being used? 
A. ATM 
B. HDLC 
C. Frame Relay 
D. PPP 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
This question is to examine the show int command. 
According to the information provided in the exhibit, we can know that the data link protocol used 
in this network is the Frame Relay protocol. 
“LMI enq sent…” 
QUESTION NO: 47 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 39
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Given the output shown from this Cisco Catalyst 2950, what is the reason that interface 
FastEthernet 0/10 is not the root port for VLAN 2? 
A. This switch has more than one interface connected to the root network segment in VLAN 2. 
B. This switch is running RSTP while the elected designated switch is running 802.1d Spanning 
Tree. 
C. This switch interface has a higher path cost to the root bridge than another in the topology. 
D. This switch has a lower bridge ID for VLAN 2 than the elected designated switch. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Since the port is in the blocked status, we must assume that there is a shorter path to the root 
bridge elsewhere. 
QUESTION NO: 48 
Why will a switch never learn a broadcast address? 
A. Broadcasts only use network layer addressing. 
B. A broadcast frame is never forwarded by a switch. 
C. A broadcast address will never be the source address of a frame. 
D. Broadcast addresses use an incorrect format for the switching table. 
E. Broadcast frames are never sent to switches. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Switches dynamically learn MAC addresses based on the source MAC addresses that it sees, and 
since a broadcast is never the source, it will never learn the broadcast address. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 40
QUESTION NO: 49 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Why has this switch not been elected the root bridge for VLAN1? 
A. It has more than one interface that is connected to the root network segment. 
B. It is running RSTP while the elected root bridge is running 802.1d spanning tree. 
C. It has a higher MAC address than the elected root bridge. 
D. It has a higher bridge ID than the elected root bridge. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The root bridge is determined by the lowest bridge ID, and this switch has a bridge ID priority of 
32768, which is higher than the roots priority of 20481. 
QUESTION NO: 50 
Which two link protocols are used to carry multiple VLANs over a single link? (Choose two.) 
A. VTP 
B. 802.1q 
C. IGP 
D. ISL 
E. 802.3u 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 41
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
Cisco switches can use two different encapsulation types for trunks, the industry standard 802.1q 
or the Cisco proprietary ISL. Generally, most network engineers prefer to use 802.1q since it is 
standards based and will interoperate with other vendors. 
QUESTION NO: 51 
Assuming the default switch configuration, which VLAN range can be added, modified, and 
removed on a Cisco switch? 
A. 1 through 1001 
B. 2 through 1001 
C. 1 through 1002 
D. 2 through 1005 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on Cisco switch. It always exists and can not be added, modified or 
removed. 
VLANs 1002-1005 are default VLANs for FDDI & Token Ring and they can’t be deleted or used for 
Ethernet. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 42
QUESTION NO: 52 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which statement about VLAN operation on Cisco Catalyst switches is true? 
A. When a packet is received from an 802.1Q trunk, the VLAN ID can be determined from the 
source MAC address and the MAC address table. 
B. Unknown unicast frames are retransmitted only to the ports that belong to the same VLAN. 
C. Broadcast and multicast frames are retransmitted to ports that are configured on different 
VLAN. 
D. Ports between switches should be configured in access mode so that VLANs can span across 
the ports. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Each VLAN resides in its own broadcast domain, so incoming frames with unknown destinations 
are only transmitted to ports that reside in the same VLAN as the incoming frame. 
QUESTION NO: 53 
Refer to the topology shown in the exhibit. 
Which ports will be STP designated ports if all the links are operating at the same bandwidth? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 43
(Choose three.) 
A. Switch A - Fa0/0 
B. Switch A - Fa0/1 
C. Switch B - Fa0/0 
D. Switch B - Fa0/1 
E. Switch C - Fa0/0 
F. Switch C - Fa0/1 
Answer: B,C,D 
Explanation: 
This question is to check the spanning tree election problem. 
1. First, select the root bridge, which can be accomplished by comparing the bridge ID, the 
smallest will be selected. Bridge-id= bridge priority + MAC address. The three switches in the 
figure all have the default priority, so we should compare the MAC address, it is easy to find that 
SwitchB is the root bridge. 
2. Select the root port on the non-root bridge, which can be completed through comparing root 
path cost. The smallest will be selected as the root port. 
3. Next, select the Designated Port. First, compare the path cost, if the costs happen to be the 
same, then compare the BID, still the smallest will be selected. Each link has a DP. Based on the 
exhibit above, we can find DP on each link. The DP on the link between SwitchA and SwitchC is 
SwitchA'Fa0/1, because it has the smallest MAC address. 
QUESTION NO: 54 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 44
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
How should the FastEthernet0/1 ports on the 2950 model switches that are shown in the exhibit be 
configured to allow connectivity between all devices? 
A. The ports only need to be connected by a crossover cable. 
B. SwitchX(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport mode trunk 
C. SwitchX(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport mode access 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1 
D. SwitchX(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport mode trunk 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport trunk vlan 1 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport trunk vlan 10 
SwitchX(config-if)# switchport trunk vlan 20 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
IN order for multiple VLANs to cross switches, the connection between the switches must be a 
trunk. The “switchport mode trunk” command is all that is needed, the individual VLANs should not 
be listed over that trunk interface. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 45
QUESTION NO: 55 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A frame on VLAN 1 on switch S1 is sent to switch S2 where the frame is received on VLAN 2. 
What causes this behavior? 
A. trunk mode mismatches 
B. allowing only VLAN 2 on the destination 
C. native VLAN mismatches 
D. VLANs that do not correspond to a unique IP subnet 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Untagged frames are encapsulated with the native VLAN. In this case, the native VLANs are 
different so although S1 will tag it as VLAN 1 it will be received by S2. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 46
QUESTION NO: 56 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which three statements about RSTP are true? (Choose three.) 
A. RSTP significantly reduces topology reconverging time after a link failure. 
B. RSTP expands the STP port roles by adding the alternate and backup roles. 
C. RSTP port states are blocking, discarding, learning, or forwarding. 
D. RSTP provides a faster transition to the forwarding state on point-to-point links than STP does. 
E. RSTP also uses the STP proposal-agreement sequence. 
F. RSTP uses the same timer-based process as STP on point-to-point links. 
Answer: A,B,D 
Explanation: 
One big disadvantage of STP is the low convergence which is very important in switched network. 
To overcome this problem, in 2001, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of the 
Spanning Tree Protocol: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which significantly reduces the 
convergence time after a topology change occurs in the network. While STP can take 30 to 50 
seconds to transit from a blocking state to a forwarding state, RSTP is typically able to respond 
less than 10 seconds of a physical link failure. 
RSTP works by adding an alternative port and a backup port compared to STP. These ports are 
allowed to immediately enter the forwarding state rather than passively wait for the network to 
converge. 
RSTP bridge port roles: 
* Root port – A forwarding port that is the closest to the root bridge in terms of path cost* 
Designated port – A forwarding port for every LAN segment* Alternate port – A best alternate 
path to the root bridge. This path is different than using the root port. The alternative port moves to 
the forwarding state if there is a failure on the designated port for the segment.* Backup port – A 
backup/redundant path to a segment where another bridge port already connects. The backup 
port applies only when a single switch has two links to the same segment (collision domain). To 
have two links to the same collision domain, the switch must be attached to a hub.* Disabled port 
– Not strictly part of STP, a network administrator can manually disable a port 
QUESTION NO: 57 
At which layer of the OSI model is RSTP used to prevent loops? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 47
A. physical 
B. data link 
C. network 
D. transport 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
RSTP and STP operate on switches and are based on the exchange of Bridge Protocol Data Units 
(BPDUs) between switches. One of the most important fields in BPDUs is the Bridge Priority in 
which the MAC address is used to elect the Root Bridge -> RSTP operates at Layer 2 – Data Link 
layer -> . 
QUESTION NO: 58 
What does a Layer 2 switch use to decide where to forward a received frame? 
A. source MAC address 
B. source IP address 
C. source switch port 
D. destination IP address 
E. destination port address 
F. destination MAC address 
Answer: F 
Explanation: 
When a frame is received, the switch looks at the destination hardware address and finds the 
interface if it is in its MAC address table. If the address is unknown, the frame is broadcast on all 
interfaces except the one it was received on. 
QUESTION NO: 59 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 48
Which statement is true? 
A. The Fa0/11 role confirms that SwitchA is the root bridge for VLAN 20. 
B. VLAN 20 is running the Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol. 
C. The MAC address of the root bridge is 0017.596d.1580. 
D. SwitchA is not the root bridge, because not all of the interface roles are designated. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Only non-root bridge can have root port. Fa0/11 is the root port so we can confirm this switch is 
not the root bridge -> 
From the output we learn this switch is running Rapid STP, not PVST -> 
0017.596d.1580 is the MAC address of this switch, not of the root bridge. The MAC address of the 
root bridge is 0017.596d.2a00 -> 
All of the interface roles of the root bridge are designated. SwitchA has one Root port and 1 
Alternative port so it is not the root bridge. 
QUESTION NO: 60 
Which two benefits are provided by creating VLANs? (Choose two.) 
A. added security 
B. dedicated bandwidth 
C. provides segmentation 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 49
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
D. allows switches to route traffic between subinterfaces 
E. contains collisions 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented on an organizational basis, by functions, 
project teams, or applications rather than on a physical or geographical basis. 
Security: 
VLANs also improve security by isolating groups. High-security users can be grouped into a 
VLAN, possible on the same physical segment, and no users outside that VLAN can communicate 
with them 
LAN Segmentation 
VLANs allow logical network topologies to overlay the physical switched infrastructure such that 
any arbitrary collection of LAN ports can be combined into an autonomous user group or 
community of interest. The technology logically segments the network into separate Layer 2 
broadcast domains whereby packets are switched between ports designated to be within the same 
VLAN. By containing traffic originating on a particular LAN only to other LANs in the same VLAN, 
switched virtual networks avoid wasting bandwidth. 
QUESTION NO: 61 
Which command can be used from a PC to verify the connectivity between hosts that connect 
through a switch in the same LAN? 
A. ping address 
B. tracert address 
C. traceroute address 
D. arp address 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
ICMP pings are used to verify connectivity between two IP hosts. Traceroute is used to verify the 
router hop path traffic will take but in this case since the hosts are in the same LAN there will be 
no router hops involved. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 50
QUESTION NO: 62 
Based on the network shown in the graphic 
Which option contains both the potential networking problem and the protocol or setting that 
should be used to prevent the problem? 
A. routing loops, hold down timers 
B. switching loops, split horizon 
C. routing loops, split horizon 
D. switching loops, VTP 
E. routing loops, STP 
F. switching loops, STP 
Answer: F 
Explanation: The Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) prevents loops from being formed when 
switches or bridges are interconnected via multiple paths. Spanning-Tree Protocol implements the 
802.1D IEEE algorithm by exchanging BPDU messages with other switches to detect loops, and 
then removes the loop by shutting down selected bridge interfaces. This algorithm guarantees that 
there is one and only one active path between two network devices. 
QUESTION NO: 63 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 51
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which two statements are true about interVLAN routing in the topology that is shown in the 
exhibit? (Choose two.) 
A. Host E and host F use the same IP gateway address. 
B. Router1 and Switch2 should be connected via a crossover cable. 
C. Router1 will not play a role in communications between host A and host D. 
D. The FastEthernet 0/0 interface on Router1 must be configured with subinterfaces. 
E. Router1 needs more LAN interfaces to accommodate the VLANs that are shown in the exhibit. 
F. The FastEthernet 0/0 interface on Router1 and the FastEthernet 0/1 interface on Switch2 trunk 
ports must be configured using the same encapsulation type. 
Answer: D,F 
Explanation: 
In order for multiple VLANs to connect to a single physical interface on a Cisco router, 
subinterfaces must be used, one for each VLAN. This is known as the router on a stick 
configuration. Also, for any trunk to be formed, both ends of the trunk must agree on the 
encapsulation type, so each one must be configured for 802.1q or ISL. 
QUESTION NO: 64 
Which two of these are characteristics of the 802.1Q protocol? (Choose two.) 
A. It is used exclusively for tagging VLAN frames and does not address network reconvergence 
following switched network topology changes. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 52
B. It modifies the 802.3 frame header, and thus requires that the FCS be recomputed. 
C. It is a Layer 2 messaging protocol which maintains VLAN configurations across networks. 
D. It includes an 8-bit field which specifies the priority of a frame. 
E. It is a trunking protocol capable of carrying untagged frames. 
Answer: B,E 
Explanation: 
802.1Q protocol, or Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks protocol, mainly stipulates the realization 
of the VLAN. 802.1Q is a standardized relay method that inserts 4 bytes field into the original 
Ethernet frame and re-calculate the FCS. 802.1Q frame relay supports two types of frame: marked 
and non-marked. Non-marked frame carries no VLAN identification information. 
QUESTION NO: 65 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Each of these four switches has been configured with a hostname, as well as being configured to 
run RSTP. No other configuration changes have been made. Which three of these show the 
correct RSTP port roles for the indicated switches and interfaces? (Choose three.) 
A. SwitchA, Fa0/2, designated 
B. SwitchA, Fa0/1, root 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 53
C. SwitchB, Gi0/2, root 
D. SwitchB, Gi0/1, designated 
E. SwitchC, Fa0/2, root 
F. SwitchD, Gi0/2, root 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: A,B,F 
Explanation: Explanation 
The question says “no other configuration changes have been made” so we can understand these 
switches have the same bridge priority. Switch C has lowest MAC address so it will become root 
bridge and 2 of its ports (Fa0/1 & Fa0/2) will be designated ports. 
Because SwitchC is the root bridge so the 2 ports nearest SwitchC on SwitchA (Fa0/1) and 
SwitchD (Gi0/2) will be root ports.. 
Now we come to the most difficult part of this question: SwitchB must have a root port so which 
port will it choose? To answer this question we need to know about STP cost and port cost. 
In general, “cost” is calculated based on bandwidth of the link. The higher the bandwidth on a link, 
the lower the value of its cost. Below are the cost values you should memorize: 
SwitchB will choose the interface with lower cost to the root bridge as the root port so we must 
calculate the cost on interface Gi0/1 & Gi0/2 of SwitchB to the root bridge. This can be calculated 
from the “cost to the root bridge” of each switch because a switch always advertises its cost to 
the root bridge in its BPDU. The receiving switch will add its local port cost value to the cost in 
the BPDU. 
One more thing to notice is that a root bridge always advertises the cost to the root bridge (itself) 
with an initial value of 0. 
Now let’s have a look at the topology again 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 54
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
SwitchC advertises its cost to the root bridge with a value of 0. Switch D adds 4 (the cost value of 
1Gbps link) and advertises this value (4) to SwitchB. SwitchB adds another 4 and learns that it can 
reach SwitchC via Gi0/1 port with a total cost of 8. The same process happens for SwitchA and 
SwitchB learns that it can reach SwitchC via Gi0/2 with a total cost of 23 -> Switch B chooses 
Gi0/1 as its root port -> 
Now our last task is to identify the port roles of the ports between SwitchA & SwitchB. It is rather 
easy as the MAC address of SwitchA is lower than that of SwitchB so Fa0/2 of SwitchA will be 
designated port while Gi0/2 of SwitchB will be alternative port. 
Below summaries all the port roles of these switches: 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 55
+ DP: Designated Port (forwarding state) 
+ RP: Root Port (forwarding state) 
+ AP: Alternative Port (blocking state) 
QUESTION NO: 66 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 56
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The network administrator normally establishes a Telnet session with the switch from host A. 
However, host A is unavailable. The administrator's attempt to telnet to the switch from host B 
fails, but pings to the other two hosts are successful. What is the issue? 
A. Host B and the switch need to be in the same subnet. 
B. The switch interface connected to the router is down. 
C. Host B needs to be assigned an IP address in VLAN 1. 
D. The switch needs an appropriate default gateway assigned. 
E. The switch interfaces need the appropriate IP addresses assigned. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Ping was successful form host B to other hosts because of intervlan routing configured on router. 
But to manage switch via telnet the VLAN32 on the switch needs to be configured interface vlan32 
along with ip address and its appropriate default-gateway address. 
Since VLAN1 interface is already configure on switch Host A was able to telnet switch. 
QUESTION NO: 67 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which switch provides the spanning-tree designated port role for the network segment that 
services the printers? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 57
A. Switch1 
B. Switch2 
C. Switch3 
D. Switch4 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Printers are connected by hubs. Decide the switch that provides the spanning-tree designated port 
role between Switch3 and Switch4. They have the same priority 32768. Compare their MAC 
addresses. Switch3 with a smaller MAC address will provide a designated port for printers. 
QUESTION NO: 68 
What is one benefit of PVST+? 
A. PVST+ supports Layer 3 load balancing without loops. 
B. PVST+ reduces the CPU cycles for all the switches in the network. 
C. PVST+ allows the root switch location to be optimized per VLAN. 
D. PVST+ automatically selects the root bridge location, to provide optimized bandwidth usage. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
The PVST+ provides Layer 2 load-balancing for the VLAN on which it runs. You can create 
different logical topologies by using the VLANs on your network to ensure that all of your links are 
used but that no one link is oversubscribed. Each instance of PVST+ on a VLAN has a single root 
switch. This root switch propagates the spanning-tree information associated with that VLAN to all 
other switches in the network. Because each switch has the same information about the network, 
this process ensures that the network topology is maintained and optimized per VLAN. 
Reference: 
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst3750x_3560x/software/release/12.2_55_se 
/configuration/guide/swstp.html 
QUESTION NO: 69 
Which are valid modes for a switch port used as a VLAN trunk? (Choose three.) 
A. transparent 
B. auto 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 58
C. on 
D. desirable 
E. blocking 
F. forwarding 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B,C,D 
Explanation: 
These are the different types of trunk modes: 
QUESTION NO: 70 
Refer to Exhibit: 
How many broadcast domains are shown in the graphic assuming only the default VLAN is 
configured on the switches? 
A. one 
B. two 
C. six 
D. twelve 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
Only router can break up broadcast domains but in this exhibit no router is used so there is only 1 
broadcast domain. 
For your information, there are 7 collision domains in this exhibit (6 collision domains between 
hubs & switches + 1 collision between the two switches). 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 59
QUESTION NO: 71 
Which three of these statements regarding 802.1Q trunking are correct? (Choose three.) 
A. 802.1Q native VLAN frames are untagged by default. 
B. 802.1Q trunking ports can also be secure ports. 
C. 802.1Q trunks can use 10 Mb/s Ethernet interfaces. 
D. 802.1Q trunks require full-duplex, point-to-point connectivity. 
E. 802.1Q trunks should have native VLANs that are the same at both ends. 
Answer: A,C,E 
Explanation: 
By default, 802.1Q trunk defined Native VLAN in order to forward unmarked frame. Switches can 
forward Layer 2 frame from Native VLAN on unmarked trunks port. Receiver switches will transmit 
all unmarked packets to Native VLAN. Native VLAN is the default VLAN configuration of port. Note 
for the 802.1Q trunk ports between two devices, the same Native VLAN configuration is required 
on both sides of the link. If the Native VLAN in 802.1Q trunk ports on same trunk link is properly 
configured, it could lead to layer 2 loops. The 802.1Q trunk link transmits VLAN information 
through Ethernet. 
QUESTION NO: 72 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 60
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The output that is shown is generated at a switch. Which three statements are true? (Choose 
three.) 
A. All ports will be in a state of discarding, learning, or forwarding. 
B. Thirty VLANs have been configured on this switch. 
C. The bridge priority is lower than the default value for spanning tree. 
D. All interfaces that are shown are on shared media. 
E. All designated ports are in a forwarding state. 
F. This switch must be the root bridge for all VLANs on this switch. 
Answer: A,C,E 
Explanation: Explanation 
From the output, we see that all ports are in designated role (forwarding state). 
The command “show spanning-tree vlan 30 only shows us information about VLAN 30. We don’t 
know how many VLAN exists in this switch -> 
The bridge priority of this switch is 24606 which is lower than the default value bridge priority 
32768. 
All three interfaces on this switch have the connection type “p2p”, which means Point-to-point 
environment – not a shared media. 
The only thing we can specify is this switch is the root bridge for VLAN 3o but we can not 
guarantee it is also the root bridge for other VLANs. 
QUESTION NO: 73 
Refer to the exhibit. 
At the end of an RSTP election process, which access layer switch port will assume the discarding 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 61
role? 
A. Switch3, port fa0/1 
B. Switch3, port fa0/12 
C. Switch4, port fa0/11 
D. Switch4, port fa0/2 
E. Switch3, port Gi0/1 
F. Switch3, port Gi0/2 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
In this question, we only care about the Access Layer switches (Switch3 & 4). Switch 3 has a 
lower bridge ID than Switch 4 (because the MAC of Switch3 is smaller than that of Switch4) so 
both ports of Switch3 will be in forwarding state. The alternative port will surely belong to Switch4. 
Switch4 will need to block one of its ports to avoid a bridging loop between the two switches. But 
how does Switch4 select its blocked port? Well, the answer is based on the BPDUs it receives 
from Switch3. A BPDU is superior to another if it has: 
1. A lower Root Bridge ID 
2. A lower path cost to the Root 
3. A lower Sending Bridge ID 
4. A lower Sending Port ID 
These four parameters are examined in order. In this specific case, all the BPDUs sent by Switch3 
have the same Root Bridge ID, the same path cost to the Root and the same Sending Bridge ID. 
The only parameter left to select the best one is the Sending Port ID (Port ID = port priority + port 
index). In this case the port priorities are equal because they use the default value, so Switch4 will 
compare port index values, which are unique to each port on the switch, and because Fa0/12 is 
inferior to Fa0/1, Switch4 will select the port connected with Fa0/1 (of Switch3) as its root port and 
block the other port -> Port fa0/11 of Switch4 will be blocked (discarding role). 
QUESTION NO: 74 
Which term describes a spanning-tree network that has all switch ports in either the blocking or 
fowarding state? 
A. converged 
B. redundant 
C. provisioned 
D. spanned 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 62
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
Spanning Tree Protocol convergence (Layer 2 convergence) happens when bridges and switches 
have transitioned to either the forwarding or blocking state. When layer 2 is converged, root bridge 
is elected and all port roles (Root, Designated and Non-Designated) in all switches are selected. 
QUESTION NO: 75 
What are the possible trunking modes for a switch port? (Choose three.) 
A. transparent 
B. auto 
C. on 
D. desirable 
E. client 
F. forwarding 
Answer: B,C,D 
Explanation: 
These are the different types of trunk modes: 
QUESTION NO: 76 
Which two of these statements regarding RSTP are correct? (Choose two.) 
A. RSTP cannot operate with PVST+. 
B. RSTP defines new port roles. 
C. RSTP defines no new port states. 
D. RSTP is a proprietary implementation of IEEE 802.1D STP. 
E. RSTP is compatible with the original IEEE 802.1D STP. 
Answer: B,E 
Explanation: 
When network topology changes, rapid spanning tree protocol (IEEE802.1W, referred to as RSTP) 
will speed up significantly the speed to re-calculate spanning tree. RSTP not only defines the role 
of other ports: alternative port and backup port, but also defines status of 3 ports: discarding 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 63
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
status, learning status, forwarding status. 
RSTP is 802.1D standard evolution, not revolution. It retains most of the parameters, and makes 
no changes. 
QUESTION NO: 77 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which two statements are true of the interfaces on Switch1? (Choose two.) 
A. Multiple devices are connected directly to FastEthernet0/1. 
B. A hub is connected directly to FastEthernet0/5. 
C. FastEthernet0/1 is connected to a host with multiple network interface cards. 
D. FastEthernet0/5 has statically assigned MAC addresses. 
E. FastEthernet0/1 is configured as a trunk link. 
F. Interface FastEthernet0/2 has been disabled. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 64
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B,E 
Explanation: 
Carefully observe the information given after command show. Fa0/1 is connected to Switch2, 
seven MAC addresses correspond to Fa0/1, and these MAC are in different VLAN. From this we 
know that Fa0/1 is the trunk interface. 
From the information given by show cdp neighbors we find that there is no Fa0/5 in CDP neighbor. 
However, F0/5 corresponds to two MAC addresses in the same VLAN. Thus we know that Fa0/5 
is connected to a Hub. 
Based on the output shown, there are multiple MAC addresses from different VLANs attached to 
the FastEthernet 0/1 interface. Only trunks are able to pass information from devices in multiple 
VLANs. 
QUESTION NO: 78 
Three switches are connected to one another via trunk ports. Assuming the default switch 
configuration, which switch is elected as the root bridge for the spanning-tree instance of VLAN 1? 
A. the switch with the highest MAC address 
B. the switch with the lowest MAC address 
C. the switch with the highest IP address 
D. the switch with the lowest IP address 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Each switch in your network will have a Bridge ID Priority value, more commonly referred to as a 
BID. This BID is a combination of a default priority value and the switch's MAC address, with the 
priority value listed first. The lowest BID will win the election process. 
For example, if a Cisco switch has the default priority value of 32,768 and a MAC address of 11- 
22-33-44-55-66, the BID would be 32768:11-22-33-44-55-66. Therefore, if the switch priority is left 
at the default, the MAC address is the deciding factor in the root bridge election. 
QUESTION NO: 79 
What are three advantages of VLANs? (Choose three.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 65
A. VLANs establish broadcast domains in switched networks. 
B. VLANs utilize packet filtering to enhance network security. 
C. VLANs provide a method of conserving IP addresses in large networks. 
D. VLANs provide a low-latency internetworking alternative to routed networks. 
E. VLANs allow access to network services based on department, not physical location. 
F. VLANs can greatly simplify adding, moving, or changing hosts on the network. 
Answer: A,E,F 
Explanation: 
VLAN technology is often used in practice, because it can better control layer2 broadcast to 
improve network security. This makes network more flexible and scalable. 
Packet filtering is a function of firewall instead of VLAN. 
QUESTION NO: 80 
Cisco Catalyst switches CAT1 and CAT2 have a connection between them using ports FA0/13. An 
802.1Q trunk is configured between the two switches. On CAT1, VLAN 10 is chosen as native, but 
on CAT2 the native VLAN is not specified. 
What will happen in this scenario? 
A. 802.1Q giants frames could saturate the link. 
B. VLAN 10 on CAT1 and VLAN 1 on CAT2 will send untagged frames. 
C. A native VLAN mismatch error message will appear. 
D. VLAN 10 on CAT1 and VLAN 1 on CAT2 will send tagged frames. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
A “native VLAN mismatch” error will appear by CDP if there is a native VLAN mismatch on an 
802.1Q link. “VLAN mismatch” can cause traffic from one vlan to leak into another vlan. 
QUESTION NO: 81 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 66
A network technician is asked to design a small network with redundancy. The exhibit represents 
this design, with all hosts configured in the same VLAN. What conclusions can be made about this 
design? 
A. This design will function as intended. 
B. Spanning-tree will need to be used. 
C. The router will not accept the addressing scheme. 
D. The connection between switches should be a trunk. 
E. The router interfaces must be encapsulated with the 802.1Q protocol. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
Each interface on a router must be in a different network. If two interfaces are in the same 
network, the router will not accept it and show error when the administrator assigns it. 
QUESTION NO: 82 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 67
A technician is troubleshooting host connectivity issues on the switches. The hosts in VLANs 10 
and 15 on Sw11 are unable to communicate with hosts in the same VLANs on Sw12. Hosts in the 
Admin VLAN are able to communicate. The port-to-VLAN assignments are identical on the two 
switches. What could be the problem? 
A. The Fa0/1 port is not operational on one of the switches. 
B. The link connecting the switches has not been configured as a trunk. 
C. At least one port needs to be configured in VLAN 1 for VLANs 10 and 15 to be able to 
communicate. 
D. Port FastEthernet 0/1 needs to be configured as an access link on both switches. 
E. A router is required for hosts on SW11 in VLANs 10 and 15 to communicate with hosts in the 
same VLAN on Sw12. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
In order for hosts in the same VLAN to communicate with each other over multiple switches, those 
switches need to be configured as trunks on their connected interfaces so that they can pass 
traffic from multiple VLANs. 
QUESTION NO: 83 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 68
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Given this output for SwitchC, what should the network administrator's next action be? 
A. Check the trunk encapsulation mode for SwitchC's fa0/1 port. 
B. Check the duplex mode for SwitchC's fa0/1 port. 
C. Check the duplex mode for SwitchA's fa0/2 port. 
D. Check the trunk encapsulation mode for SwitchA's fa0/2 port. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Here we can see that this port is configured for full duplex, so the next step would be to check the 
duplex setting of the port on the other switch. A mismatched trunk encapsulation would not result 
in input errors and CRC errors. 
Topic 3, IP addressing (IPv4 / IPv6) 
QUESTION NO: 84 
You have been asked to come up with a subnet mask that will allow all three web servers to be on 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 69
the same network while providing the maximum number of subnets. Which network address and 
subnet mask meet this requirement? 
A. 192.168.252.0 255.255.255.252 
B. 192.168.252.8 255.255.255.248 
C. 192.168.252.8 255.255.255.252 
D. 192.168.252.16 255.255.255.240 
E. 192.168.252.16 255.255.255.252 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
A subnet mask of 255.255.255.248 will allow for up to 6 hosts to reside in this network. A subnet 
mask of 255.255.255.252 will allow for only 2 usable IP addresses, since we can not use the 
network or broadcast address. 
QUESTION NO: 85 
Given an IP address 172.16.28.252 with a subnet mask of 255.255.240.0, what is the correct 
network address? 
A. 172.16.16.0 
B. 172.16.0.0 
C. 172.16.24.0 
D. 172.16.28.0 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
For this example, the network range is 172.16.16.1 - 172.16.31.254, the network address is 
172.16.16.0 and the broadcast IP address is 172.16.31.255. 
QUESTION NO: 86 
Which IPv6 address is the equivalent of the IPv4 interface loopback address 127.0.0.1? 
A. ::1 
B. :: 
C. 2000::/3 
D. 0::/10 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 70
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
In IPv6 the loopback address is written as, 
1 
This is a 128bit number, with the first 127 bits being '0' and the 128th bit being '1'. It's just a single 
address, so could also be written as ::1/128. 
QUESTION NO: 87 
You are working in a data center environment and are assigned the address range 
10.188.31.0/23. You are asked to develop an IP addressing plan to allow the maximum number of 
subnets with as many as 30 hosts each. Which IP address range meets these requirements? 
A. 10.188.31.0/26 
B. 10.188.31.0/25 
C. 10.188.31.0/28 
D. 10.188.31.0/27 
E. 10.188.31.0/29 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Each subnet has 30 hosts < 32 = 25 so we need a subnet mask which has at least 5 bit 0s -> /27. 
Also the question requires the maximum number of subnets (which minimum the number of hosts-per- 
subnet) so /27 is the best choice. 
QUESTION NO: 88 
What are three features of the IPv6 protocol? 
(Choose three.) 
A. optional IPsec 
B. autoconfiguration 
C. no broadcasts 
D. complicated header 
E. plug-and-play 
F. checksums 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 71
Answer: B,C,E 
Explanation: 
An important feature of IPv6 is that it allows plug and play option to the network devices by 
allowing them to configure themselves independently. It is possible to plug a node into an IPv6 
network without requiring any human intervention. This feature was critical to allow network 
connectivity to an increasing number of mobile devices. This is accomplished by 
autoconfiguration. 
IPv6 does not implement traditional IP broadcast, i.e. the transmission of a packet to all hosts on 
the attached link using a special broadcast address, and therefore does not define broadcast 
addresses. In IPv6, the same result can be achieved by sending a packet to the link-local all 
nodes multicast group at address ff02::1, which is analogous to IPv4 multicast to address 
224.0.0.1. 
QUESTION NO: 89 
Which command enables IPv6 forwarding on a Cisco router? 
A. ipv6 local 
B. ipv6 host 
C. ipv6 unicast-routing 
D. ipv6 neighbor 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
to enable IPv6 routing on the Cisco router use the following command: 
ipv6 unicast-routing 
If this command is not recognized, your version of IOS does not support IPv6. 
QUESTION NO: 90 
What is known as "one-to-nearest" addressing in IPv6? 
A. global unicast 
B. anycast 
C. multicast 
D. unspecified address 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 72
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
IPv6 Anycast addresses are used for one-to-nearest communication, meaning an Anycast address 
is used by a device to send data to one specific recipient (interface) that is the closest out of a 
group of recipients (interfaces). 
QUESTION NO: 91 
What is the first 24 bits in a MAC address called? 
A. NIC 
B. BIA 
C. OUI 
D. VAI 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
An Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) is a 24-bit number that uniquely identifies a vendor, 
manufacturer, or other organization globally or worldwide. 
They are used as the first 24 nits of the MAC address to uniquely identify a particular piece of 
equipment. 
QUESTION NO: 92 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which subnet mask will place all hosts on Network B in the same subnet with the least amount of 
wasted addresses? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 73
A. 255.255.255.0 
B. 255.255.254.0 
C. 255.255.252.0 
D. 255.255.248.0 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
310 hosts < 512 = 29 -> We need a subnet mask of 9 bits 0 -> 1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 
1110.0000 0000 -> 255.255.254.0 
QUESTION NO: 93 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What is the most appropriate summarization for these routes? 
A. 10.0.0.0 /21 
B. 10.0.0.0 /22 
C. 10.0.0.0 /23 
D. 10.0.0.0 /24 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
The 10.0.0.0/22 subnet mask will include the 10.0.0.0, 10.0.1.0, 10.0.2.0, and 10.0.3.0 networks, 
and only those four networks. 
QUESTION NO: 94 
Which two are features of IPv6? (Choose two.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 74
A. anycast 
B. broadcast 
C. multicast 
D. podcast 
E. allcast 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
IPv6 addresses are classified by the primary addressing and routing methodologies common in 
networkinG. unicast addressing, anycast addressing, and multicast addressing. 
QUESTION NO: 95 
Which two of these statements are true of IPv6 address representation? (Choose two.) 
A. There are four types of IPv6 addresses: unicast, multicast, anycast, and broadcast. 
B. A single interface may be assigned multiple IPv6 addresses of any type. 
C. Every IPv6 interface contains at least one loopback address. 
D. The first 64 bits represent the dynamically created interface ID. 
E. Leading zeros in an IPv6 16 bit hexadecimal field are mandatory. 
Answer: B,C 
Explanation: 
Leading zeros in IPv6 are optional do that 05C7 equals 5C7 and 0000 equals 0 -> D is not correct. 
QUESTION NO: 96 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 75
A new subnet with 60 hosts has been added to the network. Which subnet address should this 
network use to provide enough usable addresses while wasting the fewest addresses? 
A. 192.168.1.56/26 
B. 192.168.1.56/27 
C. 192.168.1.64/26 
D. 192.168.1.64/27 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
A subnet with 60 host is 2*2*2*2*2*2 = 64 -2 == 62 
6 bits needed for hosts part. Therefore subnet bits are 2 bits (8-6) in fourth octet. 
8bits+ 8bits+ 8bits + 2bits = /26 
/26 bits subnet is 24bits + 11000000 = 24bits + 192 
256 – 192 = 64 
0 -63 
64 – 127 
QUESTION NO: 97 
Refer to the exhibit. 
All of the routers in the network are configured with the ip subnet-zero command. Which network 
addresses should be used for Link A and Network A? (Choose two.) 
A. Network A - 172.16.3.48/26 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 76
B. Network A - 172.16.3.128/25 
C. Network A - 172.16.3.192/26 
D. Link A - 172.16.3.0/30 
E. Link A - 172.16.3.40/30 
F. Link A - 172.16.3.112/30 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
Only a /30 is needed for the point to point link and sine the use of the ip subnet-zero was used, 
172.16.3.0/30 is valid. Also, a /25 is required for 120 hosts and again 172.16.3.128/25 is the best, 
valid option. 
QUESTION NO: 98 
The network administrator needs to address seven LANs. RIP version 1 is the only routing 
protocol in use on the network and subnet 0 is not being used. What is the maximum number of 
usable IP addresses that can be supported on each LAN if the organization is using one class C 
address block? 
A. 8 
B. 6 
C. 30 
D. 32 
E. 14 
F. 16 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Since there is one class C network that means 256 total IP addresses. Since we need 7 LAN 
blocks and we can not use the first one (subnet 0) we take 256/8=32 hosts. However, since we 
need to reserve the network and broadcast addresses for each of these subnets, only 30 total IP 
addresses are usable. 
QUESTION NO: 99 
What will happen if a private IP address is assigned to a public interface connected to an ISP? 
A. Addresses in a private range will be not be routed on the Internet backbone. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 77
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. Only the ISP router will have the capability to access the public network. 
C. The NAT process will be used to translate this address to a valid IP address. 
D. A conflict of IP addresses happens, because other public routers can use the same range. 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
Private RFC 1918 IP addresses are meant to be used by organizations locally within their own 
network only, and can not be used globally for Internet use. 
QUESTION NO: 100 
Which two benefits are provided by using a hierarchical addressing network addressing scheme? 
(Choose two.) 
A. reduces routing table entries 
B. auto-negotiation of media rates 
C. efficient utilization of MAC addresses 
D. dedicated communications between devices 
E. ease of management and troubleshooting 
Answer: A,E 
Explanation: 
Here are some of the benefits of hierarchical addressing: 
Reference: http://www.ciscopress.com/articles/article.asp?p=174107 
QUESTION NO: 101 
What is the alternative notation for the IPv6 address 
B514:82C3:0000:0000:0029:EC7A:0000:EC72? 
A. B514 : 82C3 : 0029 : EC7A : EC72 
B. B514 : 82C3 :: 0029 : EC7A : EC72 
C. B514 : 82C3 : 0029 :: EC7A : 0000 : EC72 
D. B514 : 82C3 :: 0029 : EC7A : 0 : EC72 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
There are two ways that an IPv6 address can be additionally compressed: compressing leading 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 78
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
zeros and substituting a group of consecutive zeros with a single double colon (::). Both of these 
can be used in any number of combinations to notate the same address. It is important to note that 
the double colon (::) can only be used once within a single IPv6 address notation. So, the extra 0’s 
can only be compressed once. 
QUESTION NO: 102 
Refer to the diagram. 
All hosts have connectivity with one another. Which statements describe the addressing scheme 
that is in use in the network? (Choose three.) 
A. The subnet mask in use is 255.255.255.192. 
B. The subnet mask in use is 255.255.255.128. 
C. The IP address 172.16.1.25 can be assigned to hosts in VLAN1 
D. The IP address 172.16.1.205 can be assigned to hosts in VLAN1 
E. The LAN interface of the router is configured with one IP address. 
F. The LAN interface of the router is configured with multiple IP addresses. 
Answer: B,C,F 
Explanation: 
The subnet mask in use is 255.255.255.128: This is subnet mask will support up to 126 hosts, 
which is needed. 
The IP address 172.16.1.25 can be assigned to hosts in VLAN1: The usable host range in this 
subnet is 172.16.1.1-172.16.1.126 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 79
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The LAN interface of the router is configured with multiple IP addresses: The router will need 2 
subinterfaces for the single physical interface, one with an IP address that belongs in each VLAN. 
QUESTION NO: 103 
Which two statements describe characteristics of IPv6 unicast addressing? (Choose two.) 
A. Global addresses start with 2000::/3. 
B. Link-local addresses start with FE00:/12. 
C. Link-local addresses start with FF00::/10. 
D. There is only one loopback address and it is ::1. 
E. If a global address is assigned to an interface, then that is the only allowable address for the 
interface. 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
Below is the list of common kinds of IPv6 addresses: 
QUESTION NO: 104 
The network administrator has been asked to give reasons for moving from IPv4 to IPv6. What are 
two valid reasons for adopting IPv6 over IPv4? (Choose two.) 
A. no broadcast 
B. change of source address in the IPv6 header 
C. change of destination address in the IPv6 header 
D. Telnet access does not require a password 
E. autoconfiguration 
F. NAT 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 80
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: A,E 
Explanation: 
IPv6 does not use broadcasts, and autoconfiguration is a feature of IPV6 that allows for hosts to 
automatically obtain an IPv6 address. 
QUESTION NO: 105 
An administrator must assign static IP addresses to the servers in a network. For network 
192.168.20.24/29, the router is assigned the first usable host address while the sales server is 
given the last usable host address. Which of the following should be entered into the IP properties 
box for the sales server? 
A. IP address: 192.168.20.14 
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.248 
Default Gateway: 192.168.20.9 
B. IP address: 192.168.20.254 
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 
Default Gateway: 192.168.20.1 
C. IP address: 192.168.20.30 
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.248 
Default Gateway: 192.168.20.25 
D. IP address: 192.168.20.30 
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 
Default Gateway: 192.168.20.17 
E. IP address: 192.168.20.30 
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 
Default Gateway: 192.168.20.25 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
For the 192.168.20.24/29 network, the usable hosts are 192.168.24.25 (router) – 192.168.24.30 
(used for the sales server). 
QUESTION NO: 106 
Which subnet mask would be appropriate for a network address range to be subnetted for up to 
eight LANs, with each LAN containing 5 to 26 hosts? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 81
A. 0.0.0.240 
B. 255.255.255.252 
C. 255.255.255.0 
D. 255.255.255.224 
E. 255.255.255.240 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
For a class C network, a mask of 255.255.255.224 will allow for up to 8 networks with 32 IP 
addresses each (30 usable). 
QUESTION NO: 107 
How many bits are contained in each field of an IPv6 address? 
A. 24 
B. 4 
C. 8 
D. 16 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
An IPv6 address is represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, each group 
representing 16 bits (two octets). The groups are separated by colons (:). An example of an IPv6 
address is 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. 
QUESTION NO: 108 
What are three approaches that are used when migrating from an IPv4 addressing scheme to an 
IPv6 scheme. (Choose three.) 
A. enable dual-stack routing 
B. configure IPv6 directly 
C. configure IPv4 tunnels between IPv6 islands 
D. use proxying and translation to translate IPv6 packets into IPv4 packets 
E. statically map IPv4 addresses to IPv6 addresses 
F. use DHCPv6 to map IPv4 addresses to IPv6 addresses 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 82
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: 
Several methods are used terms of migration including tunneling, translators, and dual stack. 
Tunnels are used to carry one protocol inside another, while translators simply translate IPv6 
packets into IPv4 packets. Dual stack uses a combination of both native IPv4 and IPv6. With dual 
stack, devices are able to run IPv4 and IPv6 together and if IPv6 communication is possible that is 
the preferred protocol. Hosts can simultaneously reach IPv4 and IPv6 content. 
QUESTION NO: 109 
Refer to the exhibit. 
In this VLSM addressing scheme, what summary address would be sent from router A? 
A. 172.16.0.0 /16 
B. 172.16.0.0 /20 
C. 172.16.0.0 /24 
D. 172.32.0.0 /16 
E. 172.32.0.0 /17 
F. 172.64.0.0 /16 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
Router A receives 3 subnets: 172.16.64.0/18, 172.16.32.0/24 and 172.16.128.0/18. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 83
All these 3 subnets have the same form of 172.16.x.x so our summarized subnet must be also in 
that form -> Only A, B or . 
The smallest subnet mask of these 3 subnets is /18 so our summarized subnet must also have its 
subnet mask equal or smaller than /18. 
-> Only answer A has these 2 conditions -> . 
QUESTION NO: 110 
How is an EUI-64 format interface ID created from a 48-bit MAC address? 
A. by appending 0xFF to the MAC address 
B. by prefixing the MAC address with 0xFFEE 
C. by prefixing the MAC address with 0xFF and appending 0xFF to it 
D. by inserting 0xFFFE between the upper three bytes and the lower three bytes of the MAC 
address 
E. by prefixing the MAC address with 0xF and inserting 0xF after each of its first three bytes 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The modified EUI-64 format interface identifier is derived from the 48-bit link-layer (MAC) address 
by inserting the hexadecimal number FFFE between the upper three bytes (OUI field) and the 
lower three bytes (serial number) of the link layer address. 
QUESTION NO: 111 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 84
What is the most efficient summarization that R1 can use to advertise its networks to R2? 
A. 172.1.0.0/22 
B. 172.1.0.0/21 
C. 172.1.4.0/22 
D. 172.1.4.0/24 
172.1.5.0/24 
172.1.6.0/24 
172.1.7.0/24 
E. 172.1.4.0/25 
172.1.4.128/25 
172.1.5.0/24 
172.1.6.0/24 
172.1.7.0/24 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
The 172.1.4.0/22 subnet encompasses all routes from the IP range 172.1.4.0 – 172.1.7.255. 
QUESTION NO: 112 
Which option is a valid IPv6 address? 
A. 2001:0000:130F::099a::12a 
B. 2002:7654:A1AD:61:81AF:CCC1 
C. FEC0:ABCD:WXYZ:0067::2A4 
D. 2004:1:25A4:886F::1 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 85
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
An IPv6 address is represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, each group 
representing 16 bits (two octets). The groups are separated by colons (:). An example of an IPv6 
address is 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. The leading 0’s in a group can be 
collapsed using ::, but this can only be done once in an IP address. 
QUESTION NO: 113 
Which three are characteristics of an IPv6 anycast address? (Choose three.) 
A. one-to-many communication model 
B. one-to-nearest communication model 
C. any-to-many communication model 
D. a unique IPv6 address for each device in the group 
E. the same address for multiple devices in the group 
F. delivery of packets to the group interface that is closest to the sending device 
Answer: B,E,F 
Explanation: 
A new address type made specifically for IPv6 is called the Anycast Address. These IPv6 
addresses are global addresses, these addresses can be assigned to more than one interface 
unlike an IPv6 unicast address. Anycast is designed to send a packet to the nearest interface that 
is apart of that anycast group. 
The sender creates a packet and forwards the packet to the anycast address as the destination 
address which goes to the nearest router. The nearest router or interface is found by using the 
metric of a routing protocol currently running on the network. However in a LAN setting the nearest 
interface is found depending on the order the neighbors were learned. The anycast packet in a 
LAN setting forwards the packet to the neighbor it learned about first. 
QUESTION NO: 114 
A national retail chain needs to design an IP addressing scheme to support a nationwide network. 
The company needs a minimum of 300 sub-networks and a maximum of 50 host addresses per 
subnet. Working with only one Class B address, which of the following subnet masks will support 
an appropriate addressing scheme? (Choose two.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 86
A. 255.255.255.0 
B. 255.255.255.128 
C. 255.255.252.0 
D. 255.255.255.224 
E. 255.255.255.192 
F. 255.255.248.0 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: B,E 
Explanation: 
Subnetting is used to break the network into smaller more efficient subnets to prevent excessive 
rates of Ethernet packet collision in a large network. Such subnets can be arranged hierarchically, 
with the organization's network address space (see also Autonomous System) partitioned into a 
tree-like structure. Routers are used to manage traffic and constitute borders between subnets. 
A routing prefix is the sequence of leading bits of an IP address that precede the portion of the 
address used as host identifier. In IPv4 networks, the routing prefix is often expressed as a 
"subnet mask", which is a bit mask covering the number of bits used in the prefix. An IPv4 subnet 
mask is frequently expressed in quad-dotted decimal representation, e.g., 255.255.255.0 is the 
subnet mask for the 192.168.1.0 network with a 24-bit routing prefix (192.168.1.0/24). 
QUESTION NO: 115 
Refer to the exhibit. 
A network administrator is adding two new hosts to SwitchA. Which three values could be used for 
the configuration of these hosts? (Choose three.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 87
A. host A IP address: 192.168.1.79 
B. host A IP address: 192.168.1.64 
C. host A default gateway: 192.168.1.78 
D. host B IP address: 192.168.1.128 
E. host B default gateway: 192.168.1.129 
F. host B IP address: 192.168.1.190 
Answer: A,C,F 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 116 
Which IPv6 address is the all-router multicast group? 
A. FF02::1 
B. FF02::2 
C. FF02::3 
D. FF02::4 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Well-known IPv6 multicast addresses: 
Address 
Description 
ff02::1 
All nodes on the local network segment 
ff02::2 
All routers on the local network segment 
QUESTION NO: 117 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 88
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which address range efficiently summarizes the routing table of the addresses for router Main? 
A. 172.16.0.0./21 
B. 172.16.0.0./20 
C. 172.16.0.0./16 
D. 172.16.0.0/18 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
The 172.16.0.0./20 network is the best option as it includes all networks from 172.16.0.0 – 
172.16.16.0 and does it more efficiently than the /16 and /18 subnets. The /21 subnet will not 
include all the other subnets in this one single summarized address. 
QUESTION NO: 118 
Which IPv6 address is valid? 
A. 2001:0db8:0000:130F:0000:0000:08GC:140B 
B. 2001:0db8:0:130H::87C:140B 
C. 2031::130F::9C0:876A:130B 
D. 2031:0:130F::9C0:876A:130B 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
An IPv6 address is represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, each group 
representing 16 bits (two octets). The groups are separated by colons (:). An example of an IPv6 
address is 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. The leading 0’s in a group can be 
collapsed using ::, but this can only be done once in an IP address. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 89
QUESTION NO: 119 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which command can you use to manually assign a static IPv6 address to a router interface? 
A. ipv6 autoconfig 2001:db8:2222:7272::72/64 
B. ipv6 address 2001:db8:2222:7272::72/64 
C. ipv6 address PREFIX_1 ::1/64 
D. ipv6 autoconfig 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
To assign an IPv6 address to an interface, use the “ipv6 address” command and specify the IP 
address you wish to use. 
QUESTION NO: 120 
Which of these represents an IPv6 link-local address? 
A. FE80::380e:611a:e14f:3d69 
B. FE81::280f:512b:e14f:3d69 
C. FEFE:0345:5f1b::e14d:3d69 
D. FE08::280e:611:a:f14f:3d69 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
In the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6), the address block fe80::/10 has been reserved for link-local 
unicast addressing. The actual link local addresses are assigned with the prefix fe80::/64. 
They may be assigned by automatic (stateless) or stateful (e.g. manual) mechanisms. 
QUESTION NO: 121 
The network administrator is asked to configure 113 point-to-point links. Which IP addressing 
scheme defines the address range and subnet mask that meet the requirement and waste the 
fewest subnet and host addresses? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 90
A. 10.10.0.0/16 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 
B. 10.10.0.0/18 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 
C. 10.10.1.0/24 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 
D. 10.10.0.0/23 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 
E. 10.10.1.0/25 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
We need 113 point-to-point links which equal to 113 sub-networks < 128 so we need to borrow 7 
bits (because 2^7 = 128). 
The network used for point-to-point connection should be /30. 
So our initial network should be 30 – 7 = 23. 
So 10.10.0.0/23 is the correct answer. 
You can understand it more clearly when writing it in binary form: 
/23 = 1111 1111.1111 1110.0000 0000 
/30 = 1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1100 (borrow 7 bits) 
Topic 4, IP Routing Technologies 
QUESTION NO: 122 DRAG DROP 
Answer: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 91
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 123 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 92
Answer: 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 124 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 93
Answer: 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 94
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Explanation 
If we have many entries matching for next hop ip address then the router will choose the one with 
most specific path to send the packet. This is called the “longest match” rule, the route with the 
most bits in the mask set to “1 will be chosen to route packet. 
QUESTION NO: 125 
Which parameter or parameters are used to calculate OSPF cost in Cisco routers? 
A. Bandwidth 
B. Bandwidth and Delay 
C. Bandwidth, Delay, and MTU 
D. Bandwidth, MTU, Reliability, Delay, and Load 
Answer: A 
Explanation: The well-known formula to calculate OSPF cost is 
Cost = 108 / Bandwidth 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 95
QUESTION NO: 126 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Why do large OSPF networks use a hierarchical design? (Choose three.) 
A. to decrease latency by increasing bandwidth 
B. to reduce routing overhead 
C. to speed up convergence 
D. to confine network instability to single areas of the network 
E. to reduce the complexity of router configuration 
F. to lower costs by replacing routers with distribution layer switches 
Answer: B,C,D 
Explanation: 
OSPF implements a two-tier hierarchical routing model that uses a core or backbone tier known as 
area zero (0). Attached to that backbone via area border routers (ABRs) are a number of 
secondary tier areas. The hierarchical approach is used to achieve the following: 
• 
Rapid convergence because of link and/or switch failures 
• 
Deterministic traffic recovery 
• 
Scalable and manageable routing hierarchy, reduced routing overhead. 
QUESTION NO: 127 
Which command encrypts all plaintext passwords? 
A. Router# service password-encryption 
B. Router(config)# password-encryption 
C. Router(config)# service password-encryption 
D. Router# password-encryption 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Command 
The “service password-encryption” command allows you to encrypt all passwords on your router 
so they can not be easily guessed from your running-config. This command uses a very weak 
encryption because the router has to be very quickly decode the passwords for its operation. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 96
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
It is meant to prevent someone from looking over your shoulder and seeing the password, that is 
all. This is configured in global configuration mode. 
QUESTION NO: 128 
Which two are advantages of static routing when compared to dynamic routing? (Choose two.) 
A. Configuration complexity decreases as network size increases. 
B. Security increases because only the network administrator may change the routing table. 
C. Route summarization is computed automatically by the router. 
D. Routing tables adapt automatically to topology changes. 
E. An efficient algorithm is used to build routing tables, using automatic updates. 
F. Routing updates are automatically sent to neighbors. 
G. Routing traffic load is reduced when used in stub network links. 
Answer: B,G 
Explanation: 
Since static routing is a manual process, it can be argued that it is more secure (and more prone 
to human errors) since the network administrator will need to make changes to the routing table 
directly. Also, in stub networks where there is only a single uplink connection, the load is reduced 
as stub routers just need a single static default route, instead of many routes that all have the 
same next hop IP address. 
QUESTION NO: 129 
A network administrator needs to allow only one Telnet connection to a router. For anyone viewing 
the configuration and issuing the show run command, the password for Telnet access should be 
encrypted. Which set of commands will accomplish this task? 
A. service password-encryption 
access-list 1 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 
line vty 0 4 
login 
password cisco 
access-class 1 
B. enable password secret 
line vty 0 
login 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 97
password cisco 
C. service password-encryption 
line vty 1 
login 
password cisco 
D. service password-encryption 
line vty 0 4 
login 
password cisco 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Only one VTY connection is allowed which is exactly what's requested. 
Incorrect answer: command. 
line vty0 4 
would enable all 5 vty connections. 
QUESTION NO: 130 
Refer to the exhibit. 
The speed of all serial links is E1 and the speed of all Ethernet links is 100 Mb/s. A static route will 
be established on the Manchester router to direct traffic toward the Internet over the most direct 
path available. What configuration on the Manchester router will establish a route toward the 
Internet for traffic that originates from workstations on the Manchester LAN? 
A. ip route 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.100.2 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 98
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 128.107.1.1 
C. ip route 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.252 128.107.1.1 
D. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.100.1 
E. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.100.2 
F. ip route 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 172.16.100.2 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
We use default routing to send packets with a remote destination network not in the routing table 
to the next-hop router. You should generally only use default routing on stub networks—those with 
only one exit path out of the network. 
According to exhibit, all traffic towards Internet that originates from workstations should forward to 
Router R1. 
Syntax for default route is: 
ip route <Remote_Network> <Netmask> <Next_Hop_Address>. 
QUESTION NO: 131 
Refer to the exhibit. 
The network administrator must establish a route by which London workstations can forward traffic 
to the Manchester workstations. What is the simplest way to accomplish this? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 99
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. Configure a dynamic routing protocol on London to advertise all routes to Manchester. 
B. Configure a dynamic routing protocol on London to advertise summarized routes to 
Manchester. 
C. Configure a dynamic routing protocol on Manchester to advertise a default route to the London 
router. 
D. Configure a static default route on London with a next hop of 10.1.1.1. 
E. Configure a static route on London to direct all traffic destined for 172.16.0.0/22 to 10.1.1.2. 
F. Configure Manchester to advertise a static default route to London. 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
This static route will allow for communication to the Manchester workstations and it is better to use 
this more specific route than a default route as traffic destined to the Internet will then not go out 
the London Internet connection. 
QUESTION NO: 132 
Refer to the exhibit. 
The network administrator requires easy configuration options and minimal routing protocol traffic. 
What two options provide adequate routing table information for traffic that passes between the 
two routers and satisfy the requests of the network administrator? (Choose two.) 
A. a dynamic routing protocol on InternetRouter to advertise all routes to CentralRouter. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 100
B. a dynamic routing protocol on InternetRouter to advertise summarized routes to CentralRouter. 
C. a static route on InternetRouter to direct traffic that is destined for 172.16.0.0/16 to 
CentralRouter. 
D. a dynamic routing protocol on CentralRouter to advertise all routes to InternetRouter. 
E. a dynamic routing protocol on CentralRouter to advertise summarized routes to InternetRouter. 
F. a static, default route on CentralRouter that directs traffic to InternetRouter. 
Answer: C,F 
Explanation: 
The use of static routes will provide the necessary information for connectivity while producing no 
routing traffic overhead. 
QUESTION NO: 133 
What is the effect of using the service password-encryption command? 
A. Only the enable password will be encrypted. 
B. Only the enable secret password will be encrypted. 
C. Only passwords configured after the command has been entered will be encrypted. 
D. It will encrypt the secret password and remove the enable secret password from the 
configuration. 
E. It will encrypt all current and future passwords. 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
Enable vty, console, AUX passwords are configured on the Cisco device. Use the show run 
command to show most passwords in clear text. If the service password-encryption is used, all the 
passwords are encrypted. As a result, the security of device access is improved. 
QUESTION NO: 134 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 101
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What is the effect of the configuration that is shown? 
A. It configures SSH globally for all logins. 
B. It tells the router or switch to try to establish an SSh connection first and if that fails to use 
Telnet. 
C. It configures the virtual terminal lines with the password 030752180500. 
D. It configures a Cisco network device to use the SSH protocol on incoming communications via 
the virtual terminal ports. 
E. It allows seven failed login attempts before the VTY lines are temporarily shutdown. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol which provides a secure remote access connection to network 
devices. Communication between the client and server is encrypted in both SSH version 1 and 
SSH version 2. If you want to prevent non-SSH connections, add the “transport input ssh” 
command under the lines to limit the router to SSH connections only. Straight (non-SSH) Telnets 
are refused. 
Reference: www.cisco.com/warp/public/707/ssh.shtml 
QUESTION NO: 135 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What is the reason that the interface status is "administratively down, line protocol down"? 
A. There is no encapsulation type configured. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 102
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. There is a mismatch in encapsulation types. 
C. The interface is not receiving any keepalives. 
D. The interface has been configured with the shutdown command. 
E. The interface needs to be configured as a DTE device. 
F. The wrong type of cable is connected to the interface. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Interfaces can be enabled or disabled with shutdown/no shutdown command. If you interface is 
down, it will display administratively down status. You can bring up an interface having 
administratively down interface using no shutdown command. 
QUESTION NO: 136 
Refer to the exhibit. 
When running OSPF, what would cause router A not to form an adjacency with router B? 
A. The loopback addresses are on different subnets. 
B. The values of the dead timers on the routers are different. 
C. Route summarization is enabled on both routers. 
D. The process identifier on router A is different than the process identifier on router B. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
To form an adjacency (become neighbor), router A & B must have the same Hello interval, Dead 
interval and AREA numbers 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 103
QUESTION NO: 137 
A router has learned three possible routes that could be used to reach a destination network. One 
route is from EIGRP and has a composite metric of 20514560. Another route is from OSPF with a 
metric of 782. The last is from RIPv2 and has a metric of 4. Which route or routes will the router 
install in the routing table? 
A. the OSPF route 
B. the EIGRP route 
C. the RIPv2 route 
D. all three routes 
E. the OSPF and RIPv2 routes 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
When one route is advertised by more than one routing protocol, the router will choose to use the 
routing protocol which has lowest Administrative Distance. The Administrative Distances of 
popular routing protocols are listed below: 
QUESTION NO: 138 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 104
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The company uses EIGRP as the routing protocol. What path will packets take from a host on the 
192.168.10.192/26 network to a host on the LAN attached to router R1? 
A. The path of the packets will be R3 to R2 to R1. 
B. The path of the packets will be R3 to R1 to R2. 
C. The path of the packets will be both R3 to R2 to R1 AND R3 to R1. 
D. The path of the packets will be R3 to R1. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Host on the LAN attached to router R1 belongs to 192.168.10.64/26 subnet. From the output of 
the routing table of R3 we learn this network can be reach via 192.168.10.9, which is an IP 
address in 192.168.10.8/30 network (the network between R1 & R3) -> packets destined for 
192.168.10.64 will be routed from R3 -> R1 -> LAN on R1. 
QUESTION NO: 139 
A network administrator is troubleshooting an EIGRP problem on a router and needs to confirm 
the IP addresses of the devices with which the router has established adjacency. The retransmit 
interval and the queue counts for the adjacent routers also need to be checked. What command 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 105
will display the required information? 
A. Router# show ip eigrp adjacency 
B. Router# show ip eigrp topology 
C. Router# show ip eigrp interfaces 
D. Router# show ip eigrp neighbors 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Below is an example of the show ip eigrp neighbors command. The retransmit interval (Smooth 
Round Trip Timer – SRTT) and the queue counts (Q count, which shows the number of queued 
EIGRP packets) for the adjacent routers are listed: 
QUESTION NO: 140 
Refer to the graphic. 
R1 is unable to establish an OSPF neighbor relationship with R3. What are possible reasons for 
this problem? (Choose two.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 106
A. All of the routers need to be configured for backbone Area 1. 
B. R1 and R2 are the DR and BDR, so OSPF will not establish neighbor adjacency with R3. 
C. A static route has been configured from R1 to R3 and prevents the neighbor adjacency from 
being established. 
D. The hello and dead interval timers are not set to the same values on R1 and R3. 
E. EIGRP is also configured on these routers with a lower administrative distance. 
F. R1 and R3 are configured in different areas. 
Answer: D,F 
Explanation: 
This question is to examine the conditions for OSPF to create neighborhood. 
So as to make the two routers become neighbors, each router must be matched with the following 
items: 
1. The area ID and its types; 
2. Hello and failure time interval timer; 
3. OSPF Password (Optional); 
QUESTION NO: 141 
What is a global command? 
A. a command that is set once and affects the entire router 
B. a command that is implemented in all foreign and domestic IOS versions 
C. a command that is universal in application and supports all protocols 
D. a command that is available in every release of IOS, regardless of the version or deployment 
status 
E. a command that can be entered in any configuration mode 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
When you enter global configuration mode and enter a command, it is applied to the running 
configuration file that is currently running in ram. The configuration of a global command affects 
the entire router. An example of a global command is one used for the hostname of the router. 
QUESTION NO: 142 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 107
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
When running EIGRP, what is required for RouterA to exchange routing updates with RouterC? 
A. AS numbers must be changed to match on all the routers 
B. Loopback interfaces must be configured so a DR is elected 
C. The no auto-summary command is needed on Router A and Router C 
D. Router B needs to have two network statements, one for each connected network 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
This question is to examine the understanding of the interaction between EIGRP routers. 
The following information must be matched so as to create neighborhood. 
EIGRP routers to establish, must match the following information: 
1. AS Number; 
2. K value. 
QUESTION NO: 143 
A Cisco router is booting and has just completed the POST process. It is now ready to find and 
load an IOS image. What function does the router perform next? 
A. It checks the configuration register. 
B. It attempts to boot from a TFTP server. 
C. It loads the first image file in flash memory. 
D. It inspects the configuration file in NVRAM for boot instructions. 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
Default (normal) Boot SequencePower on Router - Router does POST - Bootstrap starts IOS 
load - Check configuration registerto see what mode the router should boot up in (usually 0x2102 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 108
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
to read startup-config in NVRAM / or 0x2142 to start in "setup-mode") - check the startup-config 
file in NVRAM for boot-system commands - load IOS from Flash. 
QUESTION NO: 144 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What is the meaning of the output MTU 1500 bytes? 
A. The maximum number of bytes that can traverse this interface per second is 1500. 
B. The minimum segment size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. 
C. The maximum segment size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. 
D. The minimum packet size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. 
E. The maximum packet size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. 
F. The maximum frame size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. 
Answer: E 
Explanation: Explanation 
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the maximum Layer 3 packet (in bytes) that the 
layer can pass onwards. 
QUESTION NO: 145 
On a corporate network, hosts on the same VLAN can communicate with each other, but they are 
unable to communicate with hosts on different VLANs. What is needed to allow communication 
between the VLANs? 
A. a router with subinterfaces configured on the physical interface that is connected to the switch 
B. a router with an IP address on the physical interface connected to the switch 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 109
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
C. a switch with an access link that is configured between the switches 
D. a switch with a trunk link that is configured between the switches 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
Different VLANs can't communicate with each other , they can communicate with the help of 
Layer3 router. Hence , it is needed to connect a router to a switch , then make the sub-interface on 
the router to connect to the switch, establishing Trunking links to achieve communications of 
devices which belong to different VLANs. 
When using VLANs in networks that have multiple interconnected switches, you need to use 
VLAN trunking between the switches. With VLAN trunking, the switches tag each frame sent 
between switches so that the receiving switch knows to what VLAN the frame belongs. End user 
devices connect to switch ports that provide simple connectivity to a single VLAN each. The 
attached devices are unaware of any VLAN structure. 
By default, only hosts that are members of the same VLAN can communicate. To change this and 
allow inter-VLAN communication, you need a router or a layer 3 switch. 
Here is the example of configuring the router for inter-vlan communication 
RouterA(config)#int f0/0.1 
RouterA(config-subif)#encapsulation ? 
dot1Q IEEE 802.1Q Virtual LAN 
RouterA(config-subif)#encapsulation dot1Q or isl VLAN ID 
RouterA(config-subif)# ip address x.x.x.x y.y.y.y 
QUESTION NO: 146 
Which command displays CPU utilization? 
A. show protocols 
B. show process 
C. show system 
D. show version 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
The “show process” (in fact, the full command is “show processes”) command gives us lots of 
information about each process but in fact it is not easy to read. Below shows the output of this 
command (some next pages are omitted) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 110
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A more friendly way to check the CPU utilization is the command “show processes cpu history”, in 
which the total CPU usage on the router over a period of time: one minute, one hour, and 72 hours 
are clearly shown: 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 111
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
+ The Y-axis of the graph is the CPU utilization.+ The X-axis of the graph is the increment within 
the period displayed in the graph 
For example, from the last graph (last 72 hours) we learn that the highest CPU utilization within 72 
hours is 37% about six hours ago. 
QUESTION NO: 147 
What two things will a router do when running a distance vector routing protocol? (Choose two.) 
A. Send periodic updates regardless of topology changes. 
B. Send entire routing table to all routers in the routing domain. 
C. Use the shortest-path algorithm to the determine best path. 
D. Update the routing table based on updates from their neighbors. 
E. Maintain the topology of the entire network in its database. 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
Distance means how far and Vector means in which direction. Distance Vector routing protocols 
pass periodic copies of routing table to neighbor routers and accumulate distance vectors. In 
distance vector routing protocols, routers discover the best path to destination from each neighbor. 
The routing updates proceed step by step from router to router. 
QUESTION NO: 148 
Which command is used to display the collection of OSPF link states? 
A. show ip ospf link-state 
B. show ip ospf lsa database 
C. show ip ospf neighbors 
D. show ip ospf database 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The “show ip ospf database” command displays the link states. Here is an example: 
Here is the lsa database on R2. 
R2#show ip ospf database 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 112
OSPF Router with ID (2.2.2.2) (Process ID 1) 
Router Link States (Area 0) 
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Link count2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 793 0x80000003 0x004F85 
210.4.4.4 10.4.4.4 776 0x80000004 0x005643 1111.111.111.111 111.111.111.111 755 
0x80000005 0x0059CA 2133.133.133.133 133.133.133.133 775 0x80000005 0x00B5B1 2 
Net Link States (Area 0) 
Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum10.1.1.1 111.111.111.111 794 0x80000001 
0x001E8B10.2.2.3 133.133.133.133 812 0x80000001 0x004BA910.4.4.1 111.111.111.111 755 
0x80000001 0x007F1610.4.4.3 133.133.133.133 775 0x80000001 0x00C31F 
QUESTION NO: 149 
Refer to the exhibit. 
The technician wants to upload a new IOS in the router while keeping the existing IOS. What is the 
maximum size of an IOS file that could be loaded if the original IOS is also kept in flash? 
A. 3 MB 
B. 4 MB 
C. 5 MB 
D. 7 MB 
E. 8 MB 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
In this example, there are a total of 8 MB, but 3.8 are being used already, so another file as large 
as 4MB can be loaded in addition to the original file. 
QUESTION NO: 150 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 113
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The two exhibited devices are the only Cisco devices on the network. The serial network between 
the two devices has a mask of 255.255.255.252. Given the output that is shown, what three 
statements are true of these devices? (Choose three.) 
A. The Manchester serial address is 10.1.1.1. 
B. The Manchester serial address is 10.1.1.2. 
C. The London router is a Cisco 2610. 
D. The Manchester router is a Cisco 2610. 
E. The CDP information was received on port Serial0/0 of the Manchester router. 
F. The CDP information was sent by port Serial0/0 of the London router. 
Answer: A,C,E 
Explanation: 
From the output, we learn that the IP address of the neighbor router is 10.1.1.2 and the question 
stated that the subnet mask of the network between two router is 255.255.255.252. Therefore 
there are only 2 available hosts in this network (22 – 2 = 2). So we can deduce the ip address (of 
the serial interface) of Manchester router is 10.1.1.1 -> 
The platform of the neighbor router is cisco 2610, as shown in the output -> 
Maybe the most difficult choice of this question is the answer E or F. Please notice that “Interface” 
refers to the local port on the local router, in this case it is the port of Manchester router, and “Port 
ID (outgoing port)” refers to the port on the neighbor router. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 114
QUESTION NO: 151 
If IP routing is enabled, which two commands set the gateway of last resort to the default 
gateway? (Choose two.) 
A. ip default-gateway 0.0.0.0 
B. ip route 172.16.2.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 
C. ip default-network 0.0.0.0 
D. ip default-route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1 
E. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1 
Answer: C,E 
Explanation: 
Both the “ip default-network” and “ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 (next hop)” commands can be used to 
set the default gateway in a Cisco router. 
QUESTION NO: 152 
Which parameter would you tune to affect the selection of a static route as a backup, when a 
dynamic protocol is also being used? 
A. hop count 
B. administrative distance 
C. link bandwidth 
D. link delay 
E. link cost 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
By default the administrative distance of a static route is 1, meaning it will be preferred over all 
dynamic routing protocols. If you want to have the dynamic routing protocol used and have the 
static route be used only as a backup, you need to increase the AD of the static route so that it is 
higher than the dynamic routing protocol. 
QUESTION NO: 153 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 115
A network associate has configured OSPF with the command: 
City(config-router)# network 192.168.12.64 0.0.0.63 area 0 
After completing the configuration, the associate discovers that not all the interfaces are 
participating in OSPF. Which three of the interfaces shown in the exhibit will participate in OSPF 
according to this configuration statement? (Choose three.) 
A. FastEthernet0 /0 
B. FastEthernet0 /1 
C. Serial0/0 
D. Serial0/1.102 
E. Serial0/1.103 
F. Serial0/1.104 
Answer: B,C,D 
Explanation: Explanation 
The “network 192.168.12.64 0.0.0.63 equals to network 192.168.12.64/26. This network has: 
+ Increment: 64 (/26= 1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1111.1100 0000) 
+ Network address: 192.168.12.64 
+ Broadcast address: 192.168.12.127 
Therefore all interface in the range of this network will join OSPF. 
QUESTION NO: 154 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 116
The Lakeside Company has the internetwork in the exhibit. The administrator would like to reduce 
the size of the routing table on the Central router. Which partial routing table entry in the Central 
router represents a route summary that represents the LANs in Phoenix but no additional 
subnets? 
A. 10.0.0.0/22 is subnetted, 1 subnets 
D 10.0.0.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 
B. 10.0.0.0/28 is subnetted, 1 subnets 
D 10.2.0.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 
C. 10.0.0.0/30 is subnetted, 1 subnets 
D 10.2.2.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 
D. 10.0.0.0/22 is subnetted, 1 subnets 
D 10.4.0.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 
E. 10.0.0.0/28 is subnetted, 1 subnets 
D 10.4.4.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 
F. 10.0.0.0/30 is subnetted, 1 subnets 
D 10.4.4.4 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The 10.4.0.0/22 route includes 10.4.0.0/24, 10.4.1.0/24, 10.4.2.0/24 and 10.4.3.0/24 only. 
QUESTION NO: 155 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 117
Refer to the graphic. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A static route to the 10.5.6.0/24 network is to be configured on the HFD router. Which commands 
will accomplish this? (Choose two.) 
A. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 0.0.0.255 fa0/0 
B. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 0.0.0.255 10.5.4.6 
C. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0 fa0/0 
D. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0 10.5.4.6 
E. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.4.6 0.0.0.255 10.5.6.0 
F. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.4.6 255.255.255.0 10.5.6.0 
Answer: C,D 
Explanation: 
The simple syntax of static route: 
ip route destination-network-address subnet-mask {next-hop-IP-address | exit-interface} 
+ destination-network-address: destination network address of the remote network 
+ subnet mask: subnet mask of the destination network 
+ next-hop-IP-address: the IP address of the receiving interface on the next-hop router 
+ exit-interface: the local interface of this router where the packets will go out 
In the statement “ip route 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0 fa0/0: 
+ 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0: the destination network 
+fa0/0: the exit-interface 
QUESTION NO: 156 
Before installing a new, upgraded version of the IOS, what should be checked on the router, and 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 118
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
which command should be used to gather this information? (Choose two.) 
A. the amount of available ROM 
B. the amount of available flash and RAM memory 
C. the version of the bootstrap software present on the router 
D. show version 
E. show processes 
F. show running-config 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: Explanation 
When upgrading new version of the IOS we need to copy the IOS to the Flash so first we have to 
check if the Flash has enough memory or not. Also running the new IOS may require more RAM 
than the older one so we should check the available RAM too. We can check both with the “show 
version” command. 
QUESTION NO: 157 
Which command reveals the last method used to powercycle a router? 
A. show reload 
B. show boot 
C. show running-config 
D. show version 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
The “show version” command can be used to show the last method to powercycle (reset) a router 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 119
QUESTION NO: 158 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which command would you use on a Cisco router to verify the Layer 3 path to a host? 
A. tracert address 
B. traceroute address 
C. telnet address 
D. ssh address 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
In computing, traceroute is a computer network diagnostic tool for displaying the route (path) and 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 120
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
measuring transit delays of packets across an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The history of the 
route is recorded as the round-trip times of the packets received from each successive host 
(remote node) in the route (path); the sum of the mean times in each hop indicates the total time 
spent to establish the connection. Traceroute proceeds unless all (three) sent packets are lost 
more than twice, then the connection is lost and the route cannot be evaluated. Ping, on the other 
hand, only computes the final round-trip times from the destination point. 
QUESTION NO: 159 
What information does a router running a link-state protocol use to build and maintain its 
topological database? (Choose two.) 
A. hello packets 
B. SAP messages sent by other routers 
C. LSAs from other routers 
D. beacons received on point-to-point links 
E. routing tables received from other link-state routers 
F. TTL packets from designated routers 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
Neighbor discovery is the first step in getting a link state environment up and running. In keeping 
with the friendly neighbor terminology, a Hello protocol is used for this step. The protocol will 
define a Hello packet format and a procedure for exchanging the packets and processing the 
information the packets contain. 
After the adjacencies are established, the routers may begin sending out LSAs. As the term 
flooding implies, the advertisements are sent to every neighbor. In turn, each received LSA is 
copied and forwarded to every neighbor except the one that sent the LSA. 
QUESTION NO: 160 
Which statements describe the routing protocol OSPF? (Choose three.) 
A. It supports VLSM. 
B. It is used to route between autonomous systems. 
C. It confines network instability to one area of the network. 
D. It increases routing overhead on the network. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 121
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
E. It allows extensive control of routing updates. 
F. It is simpler to configure than RIP v2. 
Answer: A,C,E 
Explanation: 
The OSPF protocol is based on link-state technology, which is a departure from the Bellman-Ford 
vector based algorithms used in traditional Internet routing protocols such as RIP. OSPF has 
introduced new concepts such as authentication of routing updates, Variable Length Subnet 
Masks (VLSM), route summarization, and so forth. 
OSPF uses flooding to exchange link-state updates between routers. Any change in routing 
information is flooded to all routers in the network. Areas are introduced to put a boundary on the 
explosion of link-state updates. Flooding and calculation of the Dijkstra algorithm on a router is 
limited to changes within an area. 
QUESTION NO: 161 
Refer to the exhibit. 
A network administrator configures a new router and enters the copy startup-config running-config 
command on the router. The network administrator powers down the router and sets it up at a 
remote location. When the router starts, it enters the system configuration dialog as shown. What 
is the cause of the problem? 
A. The network administrator failed to save the configuration. 
B. The configuration register is set to 0x2100. 
C. The boot system flash command is missing from the configuration. 
D. The configuration register is set to 0x2102. 
E. The router is configured with the boot system startup command. 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
The “System Configuration Dialog” appears only when no startup configuration file is found. The 
network administrator has made a mistake because the command “copy startup-config running-config” 
will copy the startup config (which is empty) over the running config (which is configured by 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 122
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
the administrator). So everything configured was deleted. 
Note: We can tell the router to ignore the start-up configuration on the next reload by setting the 
register to 0×2142. This will make the “System Configuration Dialog” appear at the next reload. 
QUESTION NO: 162 
What is the default administrative distance of OSPF? 
A. 90 
B. 100 
C. 110 
D. 120 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Administrative distance is the feature that routers use in order to select the best path when there 
are two or more different routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols. 
Administrative distance defines the reliability of a routing protocol. Each routing protocol is 
prioritized in order of most to least reliable (believable) with the help of an administrative distance 
value. 
Default Distance Value Table 
This table lists the administrative distance default values of the protocols that Cisco supports: 
Route Source 
Default Distance Values 
Connected interface 
0 
Static route 
1 
Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) summary route 
5 
External Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 
20 
Internal EIGRP 
90 
IGRP 
100 
OSPF 
110 
Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 123
115 
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 
120 
Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) 
140 
On Demand Routing (ODR) 
160 
External EIGRP 
170 
Internal BGP 
200 
Unknown* 
255 
QUESTION NO: 163 
Which characteristics are representative of a link-state routing protocol? (Choose three.) 
A. provides common view of entire topology 
B. exchanges routing tables with neighbors 
C. calculates shortest path 
D. utilizes event-triggered updates 
E. utilizes frequent periodic updates 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Each of routers running link-state routing protocol learns paths to all the destinations in its “area” 
so we can say although it is a bit unclear. 
Link-state routing protocols generate routing updates only (not the whole routing table) when a 
change occurs in the network topology so 
Link-state routing protocol like OSPF uses Dijkstra algorithm to calculate the shortest path -> . 
Unlike Distance vector routing protocol (which utilizes frequent periodic updates), link-state routing 
protocol utilizes event-triggered updates (only sends update when a change occurs) -> 
QUESTION NO: 164 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 124
Based on the exhibited routing table, how will packets from a host within the 192.168.10.192/26 
LAN be forwarded to 192.168.10.1? 
A. The router will forward packets from R3 to R2 to R1. 
B. The router will forward packets from R3 to R1 to R2. 
C. The router will forward packets from R3 to R2 to R1 AND from R3 to R1. 
D. The router will forward packets from R3 to R1. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
From the routing table we learn that network 192.168.10.0/30 is learned via 2 equal-cost paths 
(192.168.10.9 &192.168.10.5) -> traffic to this network will be load-balancing. 
QUESTION NO: 165 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 125
C-router is to be used as a "router-on-a-stick" to route between the VLANs. All the interfaces have 
been properly configured and IP routing is operational. The hosts in the VLANs have been 
configured with the appropriate default gateway. What is true about this configuration? 
A. These commands need to be added to the configuration: 
C-router(config)# router eigrp 123 
C-router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0 
B. These commands need to be added to the configuration: 
C-router(config)# router ospf 1 
C-router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0 0.0.3.255 area 0 
C. These commands need to be added to the configuration: 
C-router(config)# router rip 
C-router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0 
D. No further routing configuration is required. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Since all the same router (C-router) is the default gateway for all three VLANs, all traffic destined 
to a different VLA will be sent to the C-router. The C-router will have knowledge of all three 
networks since they will appear as directly connected in the routing table. Since the C-router 
already knows how to get to all three networks, no routing protocols need to be configured. 
QUESTION NO: 166 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 126
Why is flash memory erased prior to upgrading the IOS image from the TFTP server? 
A. The router cannot verify that the Cisco IOS image currently in flash is valid. 
B. Flash memory on Cisco routers can contain only a single IOS image. 
C. Erasing current flash content is requested during the copy dialog. 
D. In order for the router to use the new image as the default, it must be the only IOS image in 
flash. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
During the copy process, the router asked “Erasing flash before copying? [confirm]” and the 
administrator confirmed (by pressing Enter) so the flash was deleted. 
Note: In this case, the flash has enough space to copy a new IOS without deleting the current one. 
The current IOS is deleted just because the administrator wants to do so. If the flash does not 
have enough space you will see an error message like this: 
%Error copying tftp://192.168.2.167/ c1600-k8sy-mz.l23-16a.bin (Not enough space on device) 
QUESTION NO: 167 
Which command would you configure globally on a Cisco router that would allow you to view 
directly connected Cisco devices? 
A. enable cdp 
B. cdp enable 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 127
C. cdp run 
D. run cdp 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
CDP is enabled on Cisco routers by default. If you prefer not to use the CDP capability, disable it 
with the no cdp run command. In order to reenable CDP, use the cdp run command in global 
configuration mode. The “cdp enable” command is an interface command, not global. 
QUESTION NO: 168 
Refer to the exhibit. 
According to the routing table, where will the router send a packet destined for 10.1.5.65? 
A. 10.1.1.2 
B. 10.1.2.2 
C. 10.1.3.3 
D. 10.1.4.4 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
The destination IP address 10.1.5.65 belongs to 10.1.5.64/28, 10.1.5.64/29 & 10.1.5.64/27 
subnets but the “longest prefix match” algorithm will choose the most specific subnet mask -> the 
prefix “/29 will be chosen to route the packet. Therefore the next-hop should be 10.1.3.3 -> . 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 128
QUESTION NO: 169 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which address and mask combination represents a summary of the routes learned by EIGRP? 
A. 192.168.25.0 255.255.255.240 
B. 192.168.25.0 255.255.255.252 
C. 192.168.25.16 255.255.255.240 
D. 192.168.25.16 255.255.255.252 
E. 192.168.25.28 255.255.255.240 
F. 192.168.25.28 255.255.255.252 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
The binary version of 20 is 10100. 
The binary version of 16 is 10000. 
The binary version of 24 is 11000. 
The binary version of 28 is 11100. 
The subnet mask is /28. The mask is 255.255.255.240. 
Note: 
From the output above, EIGRP learned 4 routes and we need to find out the summary of them: 
+ 192.168.25.16 
+ 192.168.25.20 
+ 192.168.25.24 
+ 192.168.25.28 
-> The increment should bE. 28 – 16 = 12 but 12 is not an exponentiation of 2 so we must choose 
16 (24). Therefore the subnet mask is /28 (=1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1111.11110000) = 
255.255.255.240 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 129
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
So the best answer should be 192.168.25.16 255.255.255.240 
QUESTION NO: 170 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Assuming that the entire network topology is shown, what is the operational status of the 
interfaces of R2 as indicated by the command output shown? 
A. One interface has a problem. 
B. Two interfaces have problems. 
C. The interfaces are functioning correctly. 
D. The operational status of the interfaces cannot be determined from the output shown. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
The output shown shows normal operational status of the router’s interfaces. Serial0/0 is down 
because it has been disabled using the “shutdown” command. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 130
QUESTION NO: 171 
Which two locations can be configured as a source for the IOS image in the boot system 
command? (Choose two.) 
A. RAM 
B. NVRAM 
C. flash memory 
D. HTTP server 
E. TFTP server 
F. Telnet server 
Answer: C,E 
Explanation: Explanation 
The following locations can be configured as a source for the IOS image: 
1. + Flash (the default location) 
2. + TFTP server 
3. + ROM (used if no other source is found) 
4. (Please read the explanation of Question 4 for more information) 
QUESTION NO: 172 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Given the output for this command, if the router ID has not been manually set, what router ID will 
OSPF use for this router? 
A. 10.1.1.2 
B. 10.154.154.1 
C. 172.16.5.1 
D. 192.168.5.3 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 131
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
The highest IP address of all loopback interfaces will be chosen -> Loopback 0 will be chosen as 
the router ID. 
QUESTION NO: 173 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What commands must be configured on the 2950 switch and the router to allow communication 
between host 1 and host 2? (Choose two.) 
A. Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0 
Router(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 
Router(config-if)# no shut down 
B. Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0 
Router(config-if)# no shut down 
Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0.1 
Router(config-subif)# encapsulation dot1q 10 
Router(config-subif)# ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0 
Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0.2 
Router(config-subif)# encapsulation dot1q 20 
Router(config-subif)# ip address 192.168.20.1 255.255.255.0 
C. Router(config)# router eigrp 100 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 132
Router(config-router)# network 192.168.10.0 
Router(config-router)# network 192.168.20.0 
D. Switch1(config)# vlan database 
Switch1(config-vlan)# vtp domain XYZ 
Switch1(config-vlan)# vtp server 
E. Switch1(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 
Switch1(config-if)# switchport mode trunk 
F. Switch1(config)# interface vlan 1 
Switch1(config-if)# ip default-gateway 192.168.1.1 
Answer: B,E 
Explanation: 
The router will need to use subinterfaces, where each subinterface is assigned a VLAN and IP 
address for each VLAN. On the switch, the connection to the router need to be configured as a 
trunk using the switchport mode trunk command and it will need a default gateway for VLAN 1. 
QUESTION NO: 174 
Which two statements describe the process identifier that is used in the command to configure 
OSPF on a router? (Choose two.) 
Router(config)# router ospf 1 
A. All OSPF routers in an area must have the same process ID. 
B. Only one process number can be used on the same router. 
C. Different process identifiers can be used to run multiple OSPF processes 
D. The process number can be any number from 1 to 65,535. 
E. Hello packets are sent to each neighbor to determine the processor identifier. 
Answer: C,D 
Explanation: Multiple OSPF processes can be configured on a router using multiple process ID’s. 
The valid process ID’s are shown below: 
Edge-B(config)#router ospf ? 
<1-65535> Process ID 
QUESTION NO: 175 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 133
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
For what two reasons has the router loaded its IOS image from the location that is shown? 
(Choose two.) 
A. Router1 has specific boot system commands that instruct it to load IOS from a TFTP server. 
B. Router1 is acting as a TFTP server for other routers. 
C. Router1 cannot locate a valid IOS image in flash memory. 
D. Router1 defaulted to ROMMON mode and loaded the IOS image from a TFTP server. 
E. Cisco routers will first attempt to load an image from TFTP for management purposes. 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
The loading sequence of CISCO IOS is as follows: 
Booting up the router and locating the Cisco IOS 
1. POST (power on self test) 
2. Bootstrap code executed 
3. Check Configuration Register value (NVRAM) which can be modified using the config-register 
command 
0 = ROM Monitor mode 
1 = ROM IOS 
2 - 15 = startup-config in NVRAM 
4. Startup-config filE. Check for boot system commands (NVRAM) 
If boot system commands in startup-config 
a. Run boot system commands in order they appear in startup-config to locate the IOS 
b. [If boot system commands fail, use default fallback sequence to locate the IOS (Flash, TFTP, 
ROM)?] 
If no boot system commands in startup-config use the default fallback sequence in locating the 
IOS: 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 134
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
a. Flash (sequential) 
b. TFTP server (netboot) 
c. ROM (partial IOS) or keep retrying TFTP depending upon router model 
5. If IOS is loaded, but there is no startup-config file, the router will use the default fallback 
sequence for locating the IOS and then it will enter setup mode or the setup dialogue. 
QUESTION NO: 176 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What can be determined about the router from the console output? 
A. No configuration file was found in NVRAM. 
B. No configuration file was found in flash. 
C. No configuration file was found in the PCMCIA card. 
D. Configuration file is normal and will load in 15 seconds. 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
When no startup configuration file is found in NVRAM, the System Configuration Dialog will appear 
to ask if we want to enter the initial configuration dialog or not. 
QUESTION NO: 177 
Which three elements must be used when you configure a router interface for VLAN trunking? 
(Choose three.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 135
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. one physical interface for each subinterface 
B. one IP network or subnetwork for each subinterface 
C. a management domain for each subinterface 
D. subinterface encapsulation identifiers that match VLAN tags 
E. one subinterface per VLAN 
F. subinterface numbering that matches VLAN tags 
Answer: B,D,E 
Explanation: 
This scenario is commonly called a router on a stick. A short, well written article on this operation 
can be found here: 
http://www.thebryantadvantage.com/RouterOnAStickCCNACertificationExamTutorial.htm 
QUESTION NO: 178 
Which commands are required to properly configure a router to run OSPF and to add network 
192.168.16.0/24 to OSPF area 0? (Choose two.) 
A. Router(config)# router ospf 0 
B. Router(config)# router ospf 1 
C. Router(config)# router ospf area 0 
D. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.16.0 0.0.0.255 0 
E. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.16.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 
F. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.16.0 255.255.255.0 area 0 
Answer: B,E 
Explanation: Explanation 
In the router ospf 
command, the ranges from 1 to 65535 so o is an invalid number -> but 
To configure OSPF, we need a wildcard in the “network” statement, not a subnet mask. We also 
need to assgin an area to this process -> . 
QUESTION NO: 179 
A router receives information about network 192.168.10.0/24 from multiple sources. What will the 
router consider the most reliable information about the path to that network? 
A. a directly connected interface with an address of 192.168.10.254/24 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 136
B. a static route to network 192.168.10.0/24 
C. a RIP update for network 192.168.10.0/24 
D. an OSPF update for network 192.168.0.0/16 
E. a default route with a next hop address of 192.168.10.1 
F. a static route to network 192.168.10.0/24 with a local serial interface configured as the next hop 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
When there is more than one way to reach a destination, it will choose the best one based on a 
couple of things. First, it will choose the route that has the longest match; meaning the most 
specific route. So, in this case the /24 routes will be chosen over the /16 routes. Next, from all the 
/24 routes it will choose the one with the lowest administrative distance. Directly connected routes 
have an AD of 1 so this will be the route chosen. 
QUESTION NO: 180 
What is the default maximum number of equal-cost paths that can be placed into the routing table 
of a Cisco OSPF router? 
A. 2 
B. 8 
C. 16 
D. unlimited 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
maximum-paths (OSPF) 
To control the maximum number of parallel routes that Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) can 
support, use the maximum-paths command. 
Syntax Description 
maximum 
Maximum number of parallel routes that OSPF can install in a routing table. The range is from 1 to 
16 routes. 
Command Default 
8 paths 
QUESTION NO: 181 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 137
Which command shows your active Telnet connections? 
A. show cdp neigbors 
B. show session 
C. show users 
D. show vty logins 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
The “show users” shows telnet/ssh connections to your router while “show sessions” shows 
telnet/ssh connections from your router (to other devices). The question asks about “your active 
Telnet connections”, meaning connections from your router so the answer should be A. 
QUESTION NO: 182 
Which type of EIGRP route entry describes a feasible successor? 
A. a backup route, stored in the routing table 
B. a primary route, stored in the routing table 
C. a backup route, stored in the topology table 
D. a primary route, stored in the topology table 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
EIGRP uses the Neighbor Table to list adjacent routers. The Topology Table list all the learned 
routers to destination whilst the Routing Table contains the best route to a destination, which is 
known as the Successor. The Feasible Successor is a backup route to a destination which is kept 
in the Topology Table. 
QUESTION NO: 183 
The network administrator cannot connect to Switch1 over a Telnet session, although the hosts 
attached to Switch1 can ping the interface Fa0/0 of the router. Given the information in the graphic 
and assuming that the router and Switch2 are configured properly, which of the following 
commands should be issued on Switch1 to correct this problem? 
A. Switch1(config)# line con0 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 138
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Switch1(config-line)# password cisco 
Switch1(config-line)#login 
B. Switch1(config)# interface fa0/1 
Switch1(config-if)# ip address 192.168.24.3 255.255.255.0 
C. Switch1(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.24.1 
D. Switch1(config)# interface fa0/1 
Switch1(config-if)# duplex full 
Switch1(config-if)# speed 100 
E. Switch1(config)# interface fa0/1 
Switch1(config-if)# switchport mode trunk 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Since we know hosts can reach the router through the switch, we know that connectivity, duplex. 
Speed, etc. are good. However, for the switch itself to reach networks outside the local one, the ip 
default-gateway command must be used. 
QUESTION NO: 184 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which of these statements correctly describes the state of the switch once the boot process has 
been completed? 
A. As FastEthernet0/12 will be the last to come up, it will be blocked by STP. 
B. Remote access management of this switch will not be possible without configuration change. 
C. More VLANs will need to be created for this switch. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 139
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
D. The switch will need a different IOS code in order to support VLANs and STP. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Notice the line, which says “Interface VLAN1, changed state to administratively down”. This shows 
that VLAN1 is shut down. Hence remote management of this switch is not possible unless VLAN1 
is brought back up. Since VLAN1 is the only interface shown in the output, you have to assume 
that no other VLAN interface has been configured with an IP Address. 
QUESTION NO: 185 
Two routers named Atlanta and Brevard are connected via their serial interfaces as illustrated, but 
they are unable to communicate. The Atlanta router is known to have the correct configuration. 
Given the partial configurations, identify the fault on the Brevard router that is causing the lack of 
connectivity. 
A. incompatible IP address 
B. insufficient bandwidth 
C. incorrect subnet mask 
D. incompatible encapsulation 
E. link reliability too low 
F. IPCP closed 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Because Interface Serial 0 of Atlanta Router has 192.168.10.1 And Interface Serial 1 of Router 
Brevard has 192.168.11.2. These are from different network. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 140
QUESTION NO: 186 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Users on the 172.17.22.0 network cannot reach the server located on the 172.31.5.0 network. The 
network administrator connected to router Coffee via the console port, issued the show ip route 
command, and was able to ping the server. 
Based on the output of the show ip route command and the topology shown in the graphic, what is 
the cause of the failure? 
A. The network has not fully converged. 
B. IP routing is not enabled. 
C. A static route is configured incorrectly. 
D. The FastEthernet interface on Coffee is disabled. 
E. The neighbor relationship table is not correctly updated. 
F. The routing table on Coffee has not updated . 
Answer: C 
Explanation: The default route or the static route was configured with incorrect next-hop ip 
address 172.19.22.2 The correct ip address will be 172.18.22.2 to reach server located on 
172.31.5.0 network. Ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.18.22.2 
QUESTION NO: 187 
A network administrator is trying to add a new router into an established OSPF network. The 
networks attached to the new router do not appear in the routing tables of the other OSPF routers. 
Given the information in the partial configuration shown below, what configuration error is causing 
this problem? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 141
Router(config)# router ospf 1 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Router(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 area 0 
A. The process id is configured improperly. 
B. The OSPF area is configured improperly. 
C. The network wildcard mask is configured improperly. 
D. The network number is configured improperly. 
E. The AS is configured improperly. 
F. The network subnet mask is configured improperly. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
When configuring OSPF, the mask used for the network statement is a wildcard mask similar to an 
access list. In this specific example, the correct syntax would have been “network 10.0.0.0 
0.0.0.255 area 0.” 
Topic 5, IP Services 
QUESTION NO: 188 
Which statement is correct regarding the operation of DHCP? 
A. A DHCP client uses a ping to detect address conflicts. 
B. A DHCP server uses a gratuitous ARP to detect DHCP clients. 
C. A DHCP client uses a gratuitous ARP to detect a DHCP server. 
D. If an address conflict is de0tected, the address is removed from the pool and an administrator 
must resolve the conflict. 
E. If an address conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool for an amount of time 
configurable by the administrator. 
F. If an address conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool and will not be reused 
until the server is rebooted. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
An address conflict occurs when two hosts use the same IP address. During address assignment, 
DHCP checks for conflicts using ping and gratuitous ARP. If a conflict is detected, the address is 
removed from the pool. The address will not be assigned until the administrator resolves the 
conflict. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 142
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
(Reference: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_1/iproute/configuration/guide/1cddhcp.html) 
QUESTION NO: 189 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What statement is true of the configuration for this network? 
A. The configuration that is shown provides inadequate outside address space for translation of 
the number of inside addresses that are supported. 
B. Because of the addressing on interface FastEthernet0/1, the Serial0/0 interface address will not 
support the NAT configuration as shown. 
C. The number 1 referred to in the ip nat inside source command references access-list number 1. 
D. ExternalRouter must be configured with static routes to networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 
172.16.2.0/24. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
The “list 1 refers to the access-list number 1. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 143
QUESTION NO: 190 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which statement describes the process of dynamically assigning IP addresses by the DHCP 
server? 
A. Addresses are allocated after a negotiation between the server and the host to determine the 
length of the agreement. 
B. Addresses are permanently assigned so that the hosts uses the same address at all times. 
C. Addresses are assigned for a fixed period of time, at the end of the period, a new request for an 
address must be made. 
D. Addresses are leased to hosts, which periodically contact the DHCP server to renew the lease. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: The DHCP lifecycle consists of the following: 
Release: The client may decide at any time that it no longer wishes to use the IP address it was 
assigned, and may terminate the lease, releasing the IP address. 
QUESTION NO: 191 
What are two benefits of using NAT? (Choose two.) 
A. NAT facilitates end-to-end communication when IPsec is enabled. 
B. NAT eliminates the need to re-address all hosts that require external access. 
C. NAT conserves addresses through host MAC-level multiplexing. 
D. Dynamic NAT facilitates connections from the outside of the network. 
E. NAT accelerates the routing process because no modifications are made on the packets. 
F. NAT protects network security because private networks are not advertised. 
Answer: B,F 
Explanation: 
By not revealing the internal Ip addresses, NAT adds some security to the inside network -> F is 
correct. 
NAT has to modify the source IP addresses in the packets -> E is not correct. 
Connection from the outside of the network through a “NAT” network is more difficult than a more 
network because IP addresses of inside hosts are hidden -> C is not correct. 
In order for IPsec to work with NAT we need to allow additional protocols, including Internet Key 
Exchange (IKE), Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) and Authentication Header (AH) -> more 
complex -> A is not correct. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 144
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
By allocating specific public IP addresses to inside hosts, NAT eliminates the need to re-address 
the inside hosts -> B is correct. 
NAT does conserve addresses but not through host MAC-level multiplexing. It conserves 
addresses by allowing many private IP addresses to use the same public IP address to go to the 
Internet -> C is not correct. 
QUESTION NO: 192 
On which options are standard access lists based? 
A. destination address and wildcard mask 
B. destination address and subnet mask 
C. source address and subnet mask 
D. source address and wildcard mask 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Standard ACL’s only examine the source IP address/mask to determine if a match is made. 
Extended ACL’s examine the source and destination address, as well as port information. 
QUESTION NO: 193 
A network engineer wants to allow a temporary entry for a remote user with a specific username 
and password so that the user can access the entire network over the Internet. Which ACL can be 
used? 
A. standard 
B. extended 
C. dynamic 
D. reflexive 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
We can use a dynamic access list to authenticate a remote user with a specific username and 
password. The authentication process is done by the router or a central access server such as a 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 145
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
TACACS+ or RADIUS server. The configuration of dynamic ACL can be read here: 
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk583/tk822/technologies_tech_note09186a0080094524.shtml 
QUESTION NO: 194 
How does a DHCP server dynamically assign IP addresses to hosts? 
A. Addresses are permanently assigned so that the host uses the same address at all times. 
B. Addresses are assigned for a fixed period of time. At the end of the period, a new request for 
an address must be made, and another address is then assigned. 
C. Addresses are leased to hosts. A host will usually keep the same address by periodically 
contacting the DHCP server to renew the lease. 
D. Addresses are allocated after a negotiation between the server and the host to determine the 
length of the agreement. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
DHCP works in a client/server mode and operates like any other client/server relationship. When a 
PC connects to a DHCP server, the server assigns or leases an IP address to that PC. The PC 
connects to the network with that leased IP address until the lease expires. The host must contact 
the DHCP server periodically to extend the lease. This lease mechanism ensures that hosts that 
move or power off do not hold onto addresses that they do not need. The DHCP server returns 
these addresses to the address pool and reallocates them as necessary. 
QUESTION NO: 195 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which rule does the DHCP server use when there is an IP address conflict? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 146
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. The address is removed from the pool until the conflict is resolved. 
B. The address remains in the pool until the conflict is resolved. 
C. Only the IP detected by Gratuitous ARP is removed from the pool. 
D. Only the IP detected by Ping is removed from the pool. 
E. The IP will be shown, even after the conflict is resolved. 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
An address conflict occurs when two hosts use the same IP address. During address assignment, 
DHCP checks for conflicts using ping and gratuitous ARP. If a conflict is detected, the address is 
removed from the pool. The address will not be assigned until the administrator resolves the 
conflict. 
(Reference: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_1/iproute/configuration/guide/1cddhcp.html) 
QUESTION NO: 196 
Refer to the exhibit. 
The Bigtime router is unable to authenticate to the Littletime router. What is the cause of the 
problem? 
A. The usernames are incorrectly configured on the two routers. 
B. The passwords do not match on the two routers. 
C. CHAP authentication cannot be used on a serial interface. 
D. The routers cannot be connected from interface S0/0 to interface S0/0. 
E. With CHAP authentication, one router must authenticate to another router. The routers cannot 
be configured to authenticate to each other. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
With CHAP authentication, the configured passwords must be identical on each router. Here, it is 
configured as little123 on one side and big123 on the other. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 147
QUESTION NO: 197 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which two tasks does the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol perform? (Choose two.) 
A. Set the IP gateway to be used by the network. 
B. Perform host discovery used DHCPDISCOVER message. 
C. Configure IP address parameters from DHCP server to a host. 
D. Provide an easy management of layer 3 devices. 
E. Monitor IP performance using the DHCP server. 
F. Assign and renew IP address from the default pool. 
Answer: C,F 
Explanation: 
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a network protocol used to configure devices 
that are connected to a network (known as hosts) so they can communicate on that network using 
the Internet Protocol (IP). It involves clients and a server operating in a client-server model. DHCP 
servers assigns IP addresses from a pool of addresses and also assigns other parameters such 
as DNS and default gateways to hosts. 
QUESTION NO: 198 
When a DHCP server is configured, which two IP addresses should never be assignable to hosts? 
(Choose two.) 
A. network or subnetwork IP address 
B. broadcast address on the network 
C. IP address leased to the LAN 
D. IP address used by the interfaces 
E. manually assigned address to the clients 
F. designated IP address to the DHCP server 
Answer: A,B 
Explanation: Explanation 
Network or subnetwork IP address (for example 11.0.0.0/8 or 13.1.0.0/16) and broadcast address 
(for example 23.2.1.255/24) should never be assignable to hosts. When try to assign these 
addresses to hosts, you will receive an error message saying that they can’t be assignable. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 148
QUESTION NO: 199 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which two statements about static NAT translations are true? (Choose two.) 
A. They allow connections to be initiated from the outside. 
B. They require no inside or outside interface markings because addresses are statically defined. 
C. They are always present in the NAT table. 
D. They can be configured with access lists, to allow two or more connections to be initiated from 
the outside. 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
Static NAT is to map a single outside IP address to a single inside IP address. This is typically 
done to allow incoming connections from the outside (Internet) to the inside. Since these are 
static, they are always present in the NAT table even if they are not actively in use. 
Topic 6, Network Device Security 
QUESTION NO: 200 
A network administrator needs to configure port security on a switch. Which two statements are 
true? (Choose two.) 
A. The network administrator can apply port security to dynamic access ports. 
B. The network administrator can apply port security to EtherChannels. 
C. When dynamic MAC address learning is enabled on an interface, the switch can learn new 
addresses, up to the maximum defined. 
D. The sticky learning feature allows the addition of dynamically learned addresses to the running 
configuration. 
E. The network administrator can configure static secure or sticky secure MAC addresses in the 
voice VLAN. 
Answer: C,D 
Explanation: 
Follow these guidelines when configuring port security: 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 149
+ Port security can only be configured on static access ports, trunk ports, or 802.1Q tunnel ports. 
+ A secure port cannot be a dynamic access port. 
+ A secure port cannot be a destination port for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN). 
+ A secure port cannot belong to a Fast EtherChannel or Gigabit EtherChannel port group. 
+ You cannot configure static secure or sticky secure MAC addresses on a voice VLAN. 
+ When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, you 
must set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to at least two. 
+ If any type of port security is enabled on the access VLAN, dynamic port security is 
automatically enabled on the voice VLAN. 
+ When a voice VLAN is configured on a secure port that is also configured as a sticky secure 
port, all addresses seen on the voice VLAN are learned as dynamic secure addresses, and all 
addresses seen on the access VLAN (to which the port belongs) are learned as sticky secure 
addresses. 
+ The switch does not support port security aging of sticky secure MAC addresses. 
+ The protect and restrict options cannot be simultaneously enabled on an interface. 
(Reference: 
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst3550/software/release/12.1_19_ea1/config 
uration/guide/swtrafc.html) 
QUESTION NO: 201 DRAG DROP 
Answer: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 150
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 202 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 151
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A junior network administrator was given the task of configuring port security on SwitchA to allow 
only PC_A to access the switched network through port fa0/1. If any other device is detected, the 
port is to drop frames from this device. The administrator configured the interface and tested it with 
successful pings from PC_A to RouterA, and then observes the output from these two show 
commands. 
Which two of these changes are necessary for SwitchA to meet the requirements? (Choose two.) 
A. Port security needs to be globally enabled. 
B. Port security needs to be enabled on the interface. 
C. Port security needs to be configured to shut down the interface in the event of a violation. 
D. Port security needs to be configured to allow only one learned MAC address. 
E. Port security interface counters need to be cleared before using the show command. 
F. The port security configuration needs to be saved to NVRAM before it can become active. 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
From the output we can see that port security is disabled so this needs to be enabled. Also, the 
maximum number of devices is set to 2 so this needs to be just one if we want the single host to 
have access and nothing else. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 152
QUESTION NO: 203 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which set of commands is recommended to prevent the use of a hub in the access layer? 
A. switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk 
switch(config-if)#switchport port-security maximum 1 
B. switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk 
switch(config-if)#switchport port-security mac-address 1 
C. switch(config-if)#switchport mode access 
switch(config-if)#switchport port-security maximum 1 
D. switch(config-if)#switchport mode access 
switch(config-if)#switchport port-security mac-address 1 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
This question is to examine the layer 2 security configuration. 
In order to satisfy the requirements of this question, you should perform the following 
configurations in the interface mode: 
First, configure the interface mode as the access mode 
Second, enable the port security and set the maximum number of connections to 1. 
QUESTION NO: 204 
How does using the service password-encryption command on a router provide additional 
security? 
A. by encrypting all passwords passing through the router 
B. by encrypting passwords in the plain text configuration file 
C. by requiring entry of encrypted passwords for access to the device 
D. by configuring an MD5 encrypted key to be used by routing protocols to validate routing 
exchanges 
E. by automatically suggesting encrypted passwords for use in configuring the router 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
By using this command, all the (current and future) passwords are encrypted. This command is 
primarily useful for keeping unauthorized individuals from viewing your password in your 
configuration file 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 153
QUESTION NO: 205 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Statements A, B, C, and D of ACL 10 have been entered in the shown order and applied to 
interface E0 inbound, to prevent all hosts (except those whose addresses are the first and last IP 
of subnet 172.21.1.128/28) from accessing the network. But as is, the ACL does not restrict 
anyone from the network. How can the ACL statements be re-arranged so that the system works 
as intended? 
A. ACDB 
B. BADC 
C. DBAC 
D. CDBA 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Routers go line by line through an access list until a match is found and then will not look any 
further, even if a more specific of better match is found later on in the access list. So, it it best to 
begin with the most specific entries first, in this cast the two hosts in line C and D. Then, include 
the subnet (B) and then finally the rest of the traffic (A). 
QUESTION NO: 206 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 154
An attempt to deny web access to a subnet blocks all traffic from the subnet. Which interface 
command immediately removes the effect of ACL 102? 
A. no ip access-class 102 in 
B. no ip access-class 102 out 
C. no ip access-group 102 in 
D. no ip access-group 102 out 
E. no ip access-list 102 in 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The “ip access-group” is used to apply and ACL to an interface. From the output shown, we know 
that the ACL is applied to outbound traffic, so “no ip access-group 102 out” will remove the effect 
of this ACL. 
QUESTION NO: 207 
Which Cisco Catalyst feature automatically disables the port in an operational PortFast upon 
receipt of a BPDU? 
A. BackboneFast 
B. UplinkFast 
C. Root Guard 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 155
D. BPDU Guard 
E. BPDU Filter 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
We only enable PortFast feature on access ports (ports connected to end stations). But if 
someone does not know he can accidentally plug that port to another switch and a loop may occur 
when BPDUs are being transmitted and received on these ports. 
With BPDU Guard, when a PortFast receives a BPDU, it will be shut down to prevent a loop. 
QUESTION NO: 208 
When you are troubleshooting an ACL issue on a router, which command would you use to verify 
which interfaces are affected by the ACL? 
A. show ip access-lists 
B. show access-lists 
C. show interface 
D. show ip interface 
E. list ip interface 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Incorrect answer: 
show ip access-lists does not show interfaces affected by an ACL. 
QUESTION NO: 209 CORRECT TEXT 
A network associate is adding security to the configuration of the Corp1 router. The user on host C 
should be able to use a web browser to access financial information from the Finance Web Server. 
No other hosts from the LAN nor the Core should be able to use a web browser to access this 
server. Since there are multiple resources for the corporation at this location including other 
resources on the Finance Web Server, all other traffic should be allowed. 
The task is to create and apply an access-list with no more than three statements that will allow 
ONLY host C web access to the Finance Web Server. No other hosts will have web access to the 
Finance Web Server. All other traffic is permitted. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 156
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Access to the router CLI can be gained by clicking on the appropriate host. 
All passwords have been temporarily set to "cisco". 
The Core connection uses an IP address of 198.18.196.65 
The computers in the Hosts LAN have been assigned addresses of 192.168.33.1 - 
192.168.33.254 
Host A 192.168.33.1 
Host B 192.168.33.2 
Host C 192.168.33.3 
Host D 192.168.33.4 
The servers in the Server LAN have been assigned addresses of 172.22.242.17 - 172.22.242.30 
The Finance Web Server is assigned an IP address of 172.22.242.23. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 157
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: Select the console on Corp1 router 
Configuring ACL 
Corp1>enable 
Corp1#configure terminal 
comment: To permit only Host C (192.168.33.3){source addr} to access finance server address 
(172.22.242.23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.33.3 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 
comment: To deny any source to access finance server address (172.22.242.23) {destination 
addr} on port number 80 (web) 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp any host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 
comment: To permit ip protocol from any source to access any destination because of the implicit 
deny any any statement at the end of ACL. 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any 
Applying the ACL on the Interface 
comment: Check show ip interface brief command to identify the interface type and number by 
checking the IP address configured. 
Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 
If the ip address configured already is incorrect as well as the subnet mask. this should be 
corrected in order ACL to work 
type this commands at interface mode : 
no ip address 192.x.x.x 255.x.x.x (removes incorrect configured ipaddress and subnet mask) 
Configure Correct IP Address and subnet mask : 
ip address 172.22.242.30 255.255.255.240 ( range of address specified going to server is given as 
172.22.242.17 - 172.22.242.30 ) 
Comment: Place the ACL to check for packets going outside the interface towards the finance web 
server. 
Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out 
Corp1(config-if)#end 
Important: To save your running config to startup before exit. 
Corp1#copy running-config startup-config 
Verifying the Configuration: 
Step1: show ip interface brief command identifies the interface on which to apply access list. 
Step2: Click on each host A, B, C, & D. Host opens a web browser page, Select address box of 
the web browser and type the ip address of finance web server (172.22.242.23) to test whether it 
permits /deny access to the finance web Server. 
Step 3: Only Host C (192.168.33.3) has access to the server. If the other host can also access 
then maybe something went wrong in your configuration. Check whether you configured correctly 
and in order. 
Step 4: If only Host C (192.168.33.3) can access the Finance Web Server you can click on NEXT 
button to successfully submit the ACL SIM. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 158
QUESTION NO: 210 
Refer to exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A network administrator cannot establish a Telnet session with the indicated router. What is the 
cause of this failure? 
A. A Level 5 password is not set. 
B. An ACL is blocking Telnet access. 
C. The vty password is missing. 
D. The console password is missing. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
The login keyword has been set, but not password. This will result in the “password required, but 
none set” message to users trying to telnet to this router. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 159
QUESTION NO: 211 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which statement about access lists that are applied to an interface is true? 
A. You can place as many access lists as you want on any interface. 
B. You can apply only one access list on any interface. 
C. You can configure one access list, per direction, per Layer 3 protocol. 
D. You can apply multiple access lists with the same protocol or in different directions. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
We can have only 1 access list per protocol, per direction and per interface. It means: 
+ We can not have 2 inbound access lists on an interface 
+ We can have 1 inbound and 1 outbound access list on an interface 
QUESTION NO: 212 
Which item represents the standard IP ACL? 
A. access-list 110 permit ip any any 
B. access-list 50 deny 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255 
C. access list 101 deny tcp any host 192.168.1.1 
D. access-list 2500 deny tcp any host 192.168.1.1 eq 22 
Answer: B 
Explanation: Explanation 
The standard access lists are ranged from 1 to 99 and from 1300 to 1999 so only access list 50 is 
a standard access list. 
QUESTION NO: 213 
A network administrator is configuring ACLs on a Cisco router, to allow traffic from hosts on 
networks 192.168.146.0, 192.168.147.0, 192.168.148.0, and 192.168.149.0 only. Which two ACL 
statements, when combined, would you use to accomplish this task? (Choose two.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 160
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 0.0.1.255 
B. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.147.0 0.0.255.255 
C. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.148.0 0.0.1.255 
D. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.149.0 0.0.255.255 
E. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 0.0.0.255 
F. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 255.255.255.0 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
“access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 0.0.1.255” would allow only the 192.168.146.0 and 
192.168.147.0 networks, and “access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.148.0 0.0.1.255” would allow only 
the 192.168.148.0 and 192.168.149.0 networks. 
QUESTION NO: 214 
What can be done to secure the virtual terminal interfaces on a router? (Choose two.) 
A. Administratively shut down the interface. 
B. Physically secure the interface. 
C. Create an access list and apply it to the virtual terminal interfaces with the access-group 
command. 
D. Configure a virtual terminal password and login process. 
E. Enter an access list and apply it to the virtual terminal interfaces using the access-class 
command. 
Answer: D,E 
Explanation: Explanation 
It is a waste to administratively shut down the interface. Moreover, someone can still access the 
virtual terminal interfaces via other interfaces -> 
We can not physically secure a virtual interface because it is “virtual” -> 
To apply an access list to a virtual terminal interface we must use the “access-class” command. 
The “access-group” command is only used to apply an access list to a physical interface -> C is 
not correct. 
The most simple way to secure the virtual terminal interface is to configure a username & 
password to prevent unauthorized login. 
QUESTION NO: 215 
Which two commands correctly verify whether port security has been configured on port 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 161
FastEthernet 0/12 on a switch? (Choose two.) 
A. SW1#show port-secure interface FastEthernet 0/12 
B. SW1#show switchport port-secure interface FastEthernet 0/12 
C. SW1#show running-config 
D. SW1#show port-security interface FastEthernet 0/12 
E. SW1#show switchport port-security interface FastEthernet 0/12 
Answer: C,D 
Explanation: Explanation 
We can verify whether port security has been configured by using the “show running-config” or 
“show port-security interface ” for more detail. An example of the output of “show port-security 
interface ” command is shown below: 
QUESTION NO: 216 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 162
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The following commands are executed on interface fa0/1 of 2950Switch. 
2950Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security 
2950Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 
2950Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 1 
The Ethernet frame that is shown arrives on interface fa0/1. What two functions will occur when 
this frame is received by 2950Switch? (Choose two.) 
A. The MAC address table will now have an additional entry of fa0/1 FFFF.FFFF.FFFF. 
B. Only host A will be allowed to transmit frames on fa0/1. 
C. This frame will be discarded when it is received by 2950Switch. 
D. All frames arriving on 2950Switch with a destination of 0000.00aa.aaaa will be forwarded out 
fa0/1. 
E. Hosts B and C may forward frames out fa0/1 but frames arriving from other switches will not be 
forwarded out fa0/1. 
F. Only frames from source 0000.00bb.bbbb, the first learned MAC address of 2950Switch, will be 
forwarded out fa0/1. 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
The configuration shown here is an example of port security, specifically port security using sticky 
addresses. You can use port security with dynamically learned and static MAC addresses to 
restrict a port's ingress traffic by limiting the MAC addresses that are allowed to send traffic into 
the port. When you assign secure MAC addresses to a secure port, the port does not forward 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 163
ingress traffic that has source addresses outside the group of defined addresses. If you limit the 
number of secure MAC addresses to one and assign a single secure MAC address, the device 
attached to that port has the full bandwidth of the port. 
Port security with sticky MAC addresses provides many of the same benefits as port security with 
static MAC addresses, but sticky MAC addresses can be learned dynamically. Port security with 
sticky MAC addresses retains dynamically learned MAC addresses during a link-down condition. 
QUESTION NO: 217 
What will be the result if the following configuration commands are implemented on a Cisco 
switch? 
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security 
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 
A. A dynamically learned MAC address is saved in the startup-configuration file. 
B. A dynamically learned MAC address is saved in the running-configuration file. 
C. A dynamically learned MAC address is saved in the VLAN database. 
D. Statically configured MAC addresses are saved in the startup-configuration file if frames from 
that address are received. 
E. Statically configured MAC addresses are saved in the running-configuration file if frames from 
that address are received. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
In the interface configuration mode, the command switchport port-security mac-address sticky 
enables sticky learning. When entering this command, the interface converts all the dynamic 
secure MAC addresses to sticky secure MAC addresses. 
Topic 7, Troubleshooting 
QUESTION NO: 218 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 164
Answer: 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A simple way to find out which layer is having problem is to remember this rule: “the first statement 
is for Layer 1, the last statement is for Layer 2 and if Layer 1 is down then surely Layer 2 will be 
down too”, so you have to check Layer 1 before checking Layer 2. For example, from the output 
“Serial0/1 is up, line protocol is down” we know that it is a layer 2 problem because the first 
statement (Serial0/1 is up) is good while the last statement (line protocol is down) is bad. For the 
statement “Serial0/1 is down, line protocol is down”, both layers are down so the problem belongs 
to Layer 1. 
There is only one special case with the statement “…. is administrator down, line protocol is 
down”. In this case, we know that the port is currently disabled and shut down by the 
administrators. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 165
QUESTION NO: 219 DRAG DROP 
Answer: 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The question asks us to “begin with the lowest layer” so we have to begin with Layer 1: verify 
physical connection; in this case an Ethernet cable connection. For your information, “verify 
Ethernet cable connection” means that we check if the type of connection (crossover, straight-through, 
rollover…) is correct, the RJ45 headers are plugged in, the signal on the cable is 
acceptable… 
Next we “verify NIC operation”. We do this by simply making a ping to the loopback interface 
127.0.0.1. If it works then the NIC card (layer 1, 2) and TCP/IP stack (layer 3) are working 
properly. 
Verify IP configuration belongs to layer 3. For example, checking if the IP can be assignable for 
host, the PC’s IP is in the same network with the gateway… 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 166
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Verifying the URL by typing in your browser some popular websites like google.com, 
microsoft.com to assure that the far end server is not down (it sometimes make we think we can’t 
access to the Internet). We are using a URL so this step belongs to layer 7 of the OSI model. 
QUESTION NO: 220 
Refer to the exhibit. 
A network administrator attempts to ping Host2 from Host1 and receives the results that are 
shown. What is the problem? 
A. The link between Host1 and Switch1 is down. 
B. TCP/IP is not functioning on Host1 
C. The link between Router1 and Router2 is down. 
D. The default gateway on Host1 is incorrect. 
E. Interface Fa0/0 on Router1 is shutdown. 
F. The link between Switch1 and Router1 is down. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Host1 tries to communicate with Host2. The message destination host unreachable from Router1 
indicates that the problem occurs when the data is forwarded from Host1 to Host2. According to 
the topology, we can infer that the link between Router1 and Router2 is down. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 167
QUESTION NO: 221 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Hosts in network 192.168.2.0 are unable to reach hosts in network 192.168.3.0. Based on the 
output from RouterA, what are two possible reasons for the failure? (Choose two.) 
A. The cable that is connected to S0/0 on RouterA is faulty. 
B. Interface S0/0 on RouterB is administratively down. 
C. Interface S0/0 on RouterA is configured with an incorrect subnet mask. 
D. The IP address that is configured on S0/0 of RouterB is not in the correct subnet. 
E. Interface S0/0 on RouterA is not receiving a clock signal from the CSU/DSU. 
F. The encapsulation that is configured on S0/0 of RouterB does not match the encapsulation that 
is configured on S0/0 of RouterA. 
Answer: E,F 
Explanation: 
From the output we can see that there is a problem with the Serial 0/0 interface. It is enabled, but 
the line protocol is down. The could be a result of mismatched encapsulation or the interface not 
receiving a clock signal from the CSU/DSU. 
QUESTION NO: 222 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 168
An administrator pings the default gateway at 10.10.10.1 and sees the output as shown. At which 
OSI layer is the problem? 
A. data link layer 
B. application layer 
C. access layer 
D. session layer 
E. network layer 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
The command ping uses ICMP protocol, which is a network layer protocol used to propagate 
control message between host and router. The command ping is often used to verify the network 
connectivity, so it works at the network layer. 
QUESTION NO: 223 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 169
The two connected ports on the switch are not turning orange or green. What would be the most 
effective steps to troubleshoot this physical layer problem? (Choose three.) 
A. Ensure that the Ethernet encapsulations match on the interconnected router and switch ports. 
B. Ensure that cables A and B are straight-through cables. 
C. Ensure cable A is plugged into a trunk port. 
D. Ensure the switch has power. 
E. Reboot all of the devices. 
F. Reseat all cables. 
Answer: B,D,F 
Explanation: Explanation 
The ports on the switch are not up indicating it is a layer 1 (physical) problem so we should check 
cable type, power and how they are plugged in. 
QUESTION NO: 224 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 170
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
The network shown in the diagram is experiencing connectivity problems. Which of the following 
will correct the problems? (Choose two.) 
A. Configure the gateway on Host A as 10.1.1.1. 
B. Configure the gateway on Host B as 10.1.2.254. 
C. Configure the IP address of Host A as 10.1.2.2. 
D. Configure the IP address of Host B as 10.1.2.2. 
E. Configure the masks on both hosts to be 255.255.255.224. 
F. Configure the masks on both hosts to be 255.255.255.240. 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
The switch 1 is configured with two VLANs: VLAN1 and VLAN2. 
The IP information of member Host A in VLAN1 is as follows: 
Address : 10.1.1.126 
Mask : 255.255.255.0 
Gateway : 10.1.1.254 
The IP information of member Host B in VLAN2 is as follows: 
Address : 10.1.1.12 
Mask : 255.255.255.0 
Gateway : 10.1.1.254 
The configuration of sub-interface on router 2 is as follows: 
Fa0/0.1 -- 10.1.1.254/24 VLAN1 
Fa0/0.2 -- 10.1.2.254/24 VLAN2 
It is obvious that the configurations of the gateways of members in VLAN2 and the associated 
network segments are wrong. The layer3 addressing information of Host B should be modified as 
follows: 
Address : 10.1.2.X 
Mask : 255.255.255.0 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 171
QUESTION NO: 225 
Refer to the exhibit. 
A problem with network connectivity has been observed. It is suspected that the cable connected 
to switch port Fa0/9 on Switch1 is disconnected. What would be an effect of this cable being 
disconnected? 
A. Host B would not be able to access the server in VLAN9 until the cable is reconnected. 
B. Communication between VLAN3 and the other VLANs would be disabled. 
C. The transfer of files from Host B to the server in VLAN9 would be significantly slower. 
D. For less than a minute, Host B would not be able to access the server in VLAN9. Then normal 
network function would resume. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) is a Layer 2 protocol that utilizes a special-purpose algorithm to 
discover physical loops in a network and effect a logical loop-free topology. STP creates a loop-free 
tree structure consisting of leaves and branches that span the entire Layer 2 network. The 
actual mechanics of how bridges communicate and how the STP algorithm works will be 
discussed at length in the following topics. Note that the terms bridge and switch are used 
interchangeably when discussing STP. In addition, unless otherwise indicated, connections 
between switches are assumed to be trunks. 
QUESTION NO: 226 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 172
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
HostA cannot ping HostB. Assuming routing is properly configured, what is the cause of this 
problem? 
A. HostA is not on the same subnet as its default gateway. 
B. The address of SwitchA is a subnet address. 
C. The Fa0/0 interface on RouterA is on a subnet that can't be used. 
D. The serial interfaces of the routers are not on the same subnet. 
E. The Fa0/0 interface on RouterB is using a broadcast address. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Now let’s find out the range of the networks on serial link: 
For the network 192.168.1.62/27: 
Increment: 32 
Network address: 192.168.1.32 
Broadcast address: 192.168.1.63 
For the network 192.168.1.65/27: 
Increment: 32 
Network address: 192.168.1.64 
Broadcast address: 192.168.1.95 
-> These two IP addresses don’t belong to the same network and they can’t see each other 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 173
QUESTION NO: 227 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which router IOS commands can be used to troubleshoot LAN connectivity problems? (Choose 
three.) 
A. ping 
B. tracert 
C. ipconfig 
D. show ip route 
E. winipcfg 
F. show interfaces 
Answer: A,D,F 
Explanation: 
Ping, show ip route, and show interfaces are all valid troubleshooting IOS commands. Tracert, 
ipconfig, and winipcfg are PC commands, not IOS. 
QUESTION NO: 228 
A network administrator is troubleshooting the OSPF configuration of routers R1 and R2. The 
routers cannot establish an adjacency relationship on their common Ethernet link. 
The graphic shows the output of the show ip ospf interface e0 command for routers R1 and R2. 
Based on the information in the graphic, what is the cause of this problem? 
A. The OSPF area is not configured properly. 
B. The priority on R1 should be set higher. 
C. The cost on R1 should be set higher. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 174
D. The hello and dead timers are not configured properly. 
E. A backup designated router needs to be added to the network. 
F. The OSPF process ID numbers must match. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
In OSPF, the hello and dead intervals must match and here we can see the hello interval is set to 
5 on R1 and 10 on R2. The dead interval is also set to 20 on R1 but it is 40 on R2. 
QUESTION NO: 229 
In which circumstance are multiple copies of the same unicast frame likely to be transmitted in a 
switched LAN? 
A. during high traffic periods 
B. after broken links are re-established 
C. when upper-layer protocols require high reliability 
D. in an improperly implemented redundant topology 
E. when a dual ring topology is in use 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
If we connect two switches via 2 or more links and do not enable STP on these switches then a 
loop (which creates multiple copies of the same unicast frame) will occur. It is an example of an 
improperly implemented redundant topology. 
QUESTION NO: 230 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 175
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 176
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 177
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 178
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 179
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which will fix the issue and allow ONLY ping to work while keeping telnet disabled? 
A. Correctly assign an IP address to interface fa0/1. 
B. Change the ip access-group command on fa0/0 from "in* to "out. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 180
C. Remove access-group 106 in from interface fa0/0 and add access-group 115 in. 
D. Remove access-group 102 out from interface s0/0/0 and add access-group 114 in 
E. Remove access-group 106 in from interface fa0/0 and add access-group 104 in. 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
Let’s have a look at the access list 104: 
The question does not ask about ftp traffic so we don’t care about the two first lines. The 3rd line 
denies all telnet traffic and the 4th line allows icmp traffic to be sent (ping). Remember that the 
access list 104 is applied on the inbound direction so the 5th line “access-list 104 deny icmp any 
any echo-reply” will not affect our icmp traffic because the “echo-reply” message will be sent over 
the outbound direction. 
QUESTION NO: 231 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 181
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 182
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 183
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 184
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What would be the effect of issuing the command ip access-group 114 in to the fa0/0 interface? 
A. Attempts to telnet to the router would fail. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 185
B. It would allow all traffic from the 10.4.4.0 network. 
C. IP traffic would be passed through the interface but TCP and UDP traffic would not. 
D. Routing protocol updates for the 10.4.4.0 network would not be accepted from the fa0/0 
interface. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
From the output of access-list 114: access-list 114 permit ip 10.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 any we can easily 
understand that this access list allows all traffic (ip) from 10.4.4.0/24 network 
QUESTION NO: 232 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 186
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 187
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 188
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 189
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What would be the effect of Issuing the command ip access-group 115 in on the s0/0/1 interface? 
- 
No host could connect to RouterC through s0/0/1. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 190
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. Telnet and ping would work but routing updates would fail. 
B. FTP, FTP-DATA, echo, and www would work but telnet would fail. 
C. Only traffic from the 10.4.4.0 network would pass through the interface. 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
First let’s see what was configured on interface S0/0/1: 
QUESTION NO: 233 CORRECT TEXT 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 191
Answer: On the MGT Router: 
Config t 
Router eigrp 12 
Network 192.168.77.0 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
QUESTION NO: 234 CORRECT TEXT 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 192
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A network associate is configuring a router for the weaver company to provide internet access. 
The ISP has provided the company six public IP addresses of 198.18.184.105 198.18.184.110. 
The company has 14 hosts that need to access the internet simultaneously. The hosts in the 
company LAN have been assigned private space addresses in the range of 192.168.100.17 – 
192.168.100.30. 
Answer: The company has 14 hosts that need to access the internet simultaneously but 
we just have 6 public IP addresses from 198.18.184.105 to 198.18.184.110/29. 
Therefore we have to use NAT overload (or PAT) 
Double click on the Weaver router to open it 
Router>enable 
Router#configure terminal 
First you should change the router's name to Weaver 
Router(config)#hostname Weaver 
Create a NAT pool of global addresses to be allocated with their netmask. 
Weaver(config)#ip nat pool mypool 198.18.184.105 198.18.184.110 netmask 
255.255.255.248 
Create a standard access control list that permits the addresses that are to be 
translated 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 193
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Weaver(config)#access-list 1 permit 192.168.100.16 0.0.0.15 
Establish dynamic source translation, specifying the access list that was defined 
in the prior step 
Weaver(config)#ip nat inside source list 1 pool mypool overload 
This command translates all source addresses that pass access list 1, which 
means a source address from 192.168.100.17 to 192.168.100.30, into an 
address from the pool named mypool (the pool contains addresses from 
198.18.184.105 to 198.18.184.110) 
Overload keyword allows to map multiple IP addresses to a single registered IP 
address (many-to-one) by using different ports 
The question said that appropriate interfaces have been configured for NAT 
inside and NAT outside statements. 
This is how to configure the NAT inside and NAT outside, just for your 
understanding: 
Weaver(config)#interface fa0/0 
Weaver(config-if)#ip nat inside 
Weaver(config-if)#exit 
Weaver(config)#interface s0/0 
Weaver(config-if)#ip nat outside 
Weaver(config-if)#end 
Finally, we should save all your work with the following command: 
Weaver#copy running-config startup-config 
Check your configuration by going to "Host for testing" and type: 
C :>ping 192.0.2.114 
The ping should work well and you will be replied from 192.0.2.114 
QUESTION NO: 235 CORRECT TEXT 
Central Florida Widgets recently installed a new router in their office. Complete the network 
installation by performing the initial router configurations and configuring R1PV2 routing using the 
router command line interface (CLI) on the RC. 
Configure the router per the following requirements: 
Name of the router is R2 
Enable. secret password is cisco 
The password to access user EXEC mode using the console is cisco2 
The password to allow telnet access to the router is cisco3 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 194
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
IPV4 addresses mast be configured as follows: 
Ethernet network 209.165.201.0/27 - router has fourth assignable host address in subnet 
Serial network is 192.0.2.176/28 - router has last assignable host address in the subnet. 
Interfaces should be enabled. 
Router protocol is RIPV2 
Attention: 
In practical examinations, please note the following, the actual information will prevail. 
1. Name or the router is xxx 
2. EnablE. secret password is xxx 
3. Password In access user EXEC mode using the console is xxx 
4. The password to allow telnet access to the router is xxx 
5. IP information 
Answer: Router>enable 
Router#config terminal 
Router(config)#hostname R2 
R2(config)#enable secret Cisco 1 
R2(config)#line console 0 
R2(config-line)#password Cisco 2 
R2(config-line)#exit 
R2(config)#line vty 0 4 
R2(config-line)#password Cisco 3 
R2(config-line)#login 
R2(config-line)#exit 
R2(config)#interface faO/0 
R2(config-if)#ip address 209.165.201.1 255.255.255.224 
R2(config)#interface s0/0/0 
R2(config-if)#ip address 192.0.2.176 255.255.255.240 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 195
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
R2(config-if)#no shutdown 
R2(config-if)#exit 
R2(config)#router rip 
R2(config-router)#version 2 
R2(config-router)#network 209.165.201.0 
R2(config-router)#network 192.0.2.176 
R2(config-router)#end 
R2#copy run start 
QUESTION NO: 236 CORRECT TEXT 
Answer: Select the console on Corp1 router 
Configuring ACL 
Corp1>enable 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 196
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Corp1#configure terminal 
comment: To permit only Host C (192.168.33.3){source addr} to access finance server address 
(172.22.242.23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.33.3 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 
comment: To deny any source to access finance server address (172.22.242.23) {destination 
addr} on port number 80 (web) 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp any host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 
comment: To permit ip protocol from any source to access any destination because of the implicit 
deny any any statement at the end of ACL. 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any 
Applying the ACL on the Interface 
comment: Check show ip interface brief command to identify the interface type and number by 
checking the IP address configured. 
Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 
If the ip address configured already is incorrect as well as the subnet mask. this should be 
corrected in order ACL to work 
type this commands at interface mode : 
no ip address 192.x.x.x 255.x.x.x (removes incorrect configured ipaddress and subnet mask) 
Configure Correct IP Address and subnet mask : 
ip address 172.22.242.30 255.255.255.240 ( range of address specified going to server is given as 
172.22.242.17 - 172.22.242.30 ) 
comment: Place the ACL to check for packets going outside the interface towards the finance web 
server. 
Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out 
Corp1(config-if)#end 
Important: To save your running config to startup before exit. 
Corp1#copy running-config startup-config 
Verifying the Configuration : 
Step1: show ip interface brief command identifies the interface on which to apply access list. 
Step2: Click on each host A,B,C & D . Host opens a web browser page , Select address box of the 
web browser and type the ip address of finance web server(172.22.242.23) to test whether it 
permits /deny access to the finance web Server . 
Step 3: Only Host C (192.168.33.3) has access to the server . If the other host can also access 
then maybe something went wrong in your configuration . check whether you configured correctly 
and in order. 
Step 4: If only Host C (192.168.33.3) can access the Finance Web Server you can click on NEXT 
button to successfully submit the ACL SIM. 
QUESTION NO: 237 CORRECT TEXT 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 197
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: Corp1#conf t 
Corp1(config)# access-list 128 permit tcp host 192.168.240.1 host 172.22.141.26 eq www 
Corp1(config)# access-list 128 deny tcp any host 172.22.141.26 eq www 
Corp1(config)# access-list 128 permit ip any any 
Corp1(config)#int fa0/1 
Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 128 out 
Corp1(config-if)#end 
Corp1#copy run startup-config 
QUESTION NO: 238 CORRECT TEXT 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 198
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Answer: Corp1>enable 
Corp1#configure terminal 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.33.3 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp 192.168.33.0 0.0.0.255 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any 
Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 sh ip int brief 
Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out 
Corp1(config-if)#end 
Corp1#copy running-config startup-config 
Explanation: 
Select the console on Corp1 router 
Configuring ACL Corp1 >enable Corp1#configure terminal 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 199
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
comment: To permit only Host C (192.168. 33. 3){source addr} to access finance server address 
(172. 22. 242. 23) 
{destination addr} on port number 80 (web) 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192. 168. 33. 3 host 172. 22. 242. 23 eq 80 
comment: To deny any source to access finance server address (172. 22. 242. 23) {destination 
addr} on port number 80 (web) 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp any host 172. 22. 242. 23 eq 80 
comment: To permit ip protocol from any source to access any destination because of the implicit 
deny any any statement at the end of ACL. 
Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any 
Applying the ACL on the Interface 
comment: Check show ip interface brief command to identify the interface type and number by 
checking the IP address configured. 
Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 
If the ip address configured already is incorrect as well as the subnet mask, this should be 
corrected in order 
ACL to work 
type this commands at interface mode : 
no ip address 192. x. x. x 255. x. x. x (removes incorrect configured ip address and subnet mask) 
Configure Correct IP Address and subnet mask: 
ip address 172. 22. 242. 30 255. 255. 255. 240 (range of address specified going to server is 
given as 172. 22. 242. 17-172. 22. 242. 30 ) 
comment: Place the ACL to check for packets going outside the interface towards the finance web 
server. 
Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out 
Corp1(config-if)#end 
Important: To save your running config to startup before exit. Corp1#copy running-config startup-config 
Verifying the Configuration : 
Step1: show ip interface brief command identifies the interface on which to apply access list. 
Step2: Click on each host A,B,C & D. Host opens a web browser page, Select address box of the 
web browser and type the ip address of finance web server(172. 22. 242. 23) to test whether it 
permits /deny access to the finance web Server. 
Step 3: Only Host C (192.168. 33. 3) has access to the server. If the other host can also access 
then maybe something went wrong in your configuration check whether you configured correctly 
and in order. 
Step 4: If only Host C (192.168. 33. 3) can access the Finance Web Server you can click on NEXT 
button to successfully submit the ACL SIM. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 200
Topic 8, WAN Technologies 
QUESTION NO: 239 
The output of the show frame-relay pvc command shows "PVC STATUS = INACTIVE". What does 
this mean? 
A. The PVC is configured correctly and is operating normally, but no data packets have been 
detected for more than five minutes. 
B. The PVC is configured correctly, is operating normally, and is no longer actively seeking the 
address of the remote router. 
C. The PVC is configured correctly, is operating normally, and is waiting for interesting traffic to 
trigger a call to the remote router. 
D. The PVC is configured correctly on the local switch, but there is a problem on the remote end of 
the PVC. 
E. The PVC is not configured on the local switch. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
The PVC STATUS displays the status of the PVC. The DCE device creates and sends the report 
to the DTE devices. There are 4 statuses: 
+ ACTIVE: the PVC is operational and can transmit data 
+ INACTIVE: the connection from the local router to the switch is working, but the connection to 
the remote router is not available 
+ DELETED: the PVC is not present and no LMI information is being received from the Frame 
Relay switch 
+ STATIC: the Local Management Interface (LMI) mechanism on the interface is disabled (by 
using the “no keepalive” command). This status is rarely seen so it is ignored in some books. 
QUESTION NO: 240 DRAG DROP 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 201
Answer: 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 241 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 202
In the Frame Relay network, which IP addresses would be assigned to the interfaces with point-to-point 
PVCs? 
A. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 
DLCI 17: 192.168.10.1 /24 
DLCI 99: 192.168.10.2 /24 
DLCI 28: 192.168.10.3 /24 
B. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 
DLCI 17: 192.168.11.1 /24 
DLCI 99: 192.168.12.1 /24 
DLCI 28: 192.168.13.1 /24 
C. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 
DLCI 17: 192.168.11.1 /24 
DLCI 99: 192.168.10.2 /24 
DLCI 28: 192.168.11.2 /24 
D. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 
DLCI 17: 192.168.10.2 /24 
DLCI 99: 192.168.10.3 /24 
DLCI 28: 192.168.10.4 /24 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
With point to point PVC, each connection needs to be in a separate subnet. The R2-R1 connection 
(DLCI 16 to 99) would have each router within the same subnet. Similarly, the R3-R1 connection 
would also be in the same subnet, but it must be in a different one than the R2-R1 connection. 
QUESTION NO: 242 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 203
Which command is used to enable CHAP authentication, with PAP as the fallback method, on a 
serial interface? 
A. Router(config-if)# ppp authentication chap fallback ppp 
B. Router(config-if)# ppp authentication chap pap 
C. Router(config-if)# authentication ppp chap fallback ppp 
D. Router(config-if)# authentication ppp chap pap 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
This command tells the router to first use CHAP and then go to PAP if CHAP isn't available. 
QUESTION NO: 243 
Which protocol is an open standard protocol framework that is commonly used in VPNs, to provide 
secure end-to-end communications? 
A. RSA 
B. L2TP 
C. IPsec 
D. PPTP 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
IPSec is a framework of open standards that provides data confidentiality, data integrity, and data 
authentication between participating peers at the IP layer. IPSec can be used to protect one or 
more data flows between IPSec peers. 
QUESTION NO: 244 
At which layer of the OSI model does PPP perform? 
A. Layer 2 
B. Layer 3 
C. Layer 4 
D. Layer 5 
Answer: A 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 204
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Explanation: 
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) provides a standard method for transporting multi-protocol 
datagrams over point-to-point links. PPP was originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for 
transporting IP traffic between two peers. It is a data link layer protocol (layer 2 in the OSI model ) 
QUESTION NO: 245 
The command frame-relay map ip 10.121.16.8 102 broadcast was entered on the router. Which of 
the following statements is true concerning this command? 
A. This command should be executed from the global configuration mode. 
B. The IP address 10.121.16.8 is the local router port used to forward data. 
C. 102 is the remote DLCI that will receive the information. 
D. This command is required for all Frame Relay configurations. 
E. The broadcast option allows packets, such as RIP updates, to be forwarded across the PVC. 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
Broadcast is added to the configurations of the frame relay, so the PVC supports broadcast, 
allowing the routing protocol updates that use the broadcast update mechanism to be forwarded 
across itself. 
QUESTION NO: 246 
Which two options are valid WAN connectivity methods? (Choose two.) 
A. PPP 
B. WAP 
C. DSL 
D. L2TPv3 
E. Ethernet 
Answer: A,C 
Explanation: 
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) provides a standard method for transporting multi-protocol 
datagrams over point-to-point links. PPP was originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for 
transporting IP traffic between two peers. It is a data link layer protocol used for WAN connections. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 205
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
DSL is also considered a WAN connection, as it can be used to connect networks, typically when 
used with VPN technology. 
QUESTION NO: 247 
Which Layer 2 protocol encapsulation type supports synchronous and asynchronous circuits and 
has built-in security mechanisms? 
A. HDLC 
B. PPP 
C. X.25 
D. Frame Relay 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
PPP: Provides router-to-router and host-to-network connections over synchronous and 
asynchronous circuits. PPP was designed to work with several network layer protocols, including 
IP. PPP also has built-in security mechanisms, such as Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) 
and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). 
QUESTION NO: 248 
Which encapsulation type is a Frame Relay encapsulation type that is supported by Cisco routers? 
A. IETF 
B. ANSI Annex D 
C. Q9333-A Annex A 
D. HDLC 
Answer: A 
Explanation: Explanation 
Cisco supports two Frame Relay encapsulation types: the Cisco encapsulation and the IETF 
Frame Relay encapsulation, which is in conformance with RFC 1490 and RFC 2427. The former 
is often used to connect two Cisco routers while the latter is used to connect a Cisco router to a 
non-Cisco router. You can test with your Cisco router when typing the command Router(config-if)# 
encapsulation frame-relay ? on a WAN link. Below is the output of this command (notice Cisco is 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 206
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
the default encapsulation so it is not listed here, just press Enter to use it). 
Note: Three LMI options are supported by Cisco routers are ansi, Cisco, and Q933a. They 
represent the ANSI Annex D, Cisco, and ITU Q933-A (Annex A) LMI types, respectively. 
HDLC is a WAN protocol same as Frame-Relay and PPP so it is not a Frame Relay encapsulation 
type. 
QUESTION NO: 249 
RouterA is unable to reach RouterB. Both routers are running IOS version 12.0. 
After reviewing the command output and graphic, what is the most likely cause of the problem? 
A. incorrect bandwidth configuration 
B. incorrect LMI configuration 
C. incorrect map statement 
D. incorrect IP address 
Answer: C 
Explanation: Explanation 
With this topology and the DLCI, we can only think of “incorrect map statement”. From the 
topology we can deduce traffic with a DLCI of 75 will be sent to 192.168.2.1 but the text below 
wrongly shows “DLCI 50 for the next router 192.168.2.1 -> . 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 207
QUESTION NO: 250 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What is the meaning of the term dynamic as displayed in the output of the show frame-relay map 
command shown? 
A. The Serial0/0 interface is passing traffic. 
B. The DLCI 100 was dynamically allocated by the router. 
C. The Serial0/0 interface acquired the IP address of 172.16.3.1 from a DHCP server. 
D. The DLCI 100 will be dynamically changed as required to adapt to changes in the Frame Relay 
cloud. 
E. The mapping between DLCI 100 and the end station IP address 172.16.3.1 was learned 
through Inverse ARP. 
Answer: E 
Explanation: 
Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (Inverse ARP) was developed to provide a mechanism for 
dynamic DLCI to Layer 3 address maps. Inverse ARP works much the same way Address 
Resolution Protocol (ARP) works on a LAN. However, with ARP, the device knows the Layer 3 IP 
address and needs to know the remote data link MAC address. With Inverse ARP, the router 
knows the Layer 2 address which is the DLCI, but needs to know the remote Layer 3 IP address. 
When using dynamic address mapping, Inverse ARP requests a next-hop protocol address for 
each active PVC. Once the requesting router receives an Inverse ARP response, it updates its 
DLCI-to-Layer 3 address mapping table. Dynamic address mapping is enabled by default for all 
protocols enabled on a physical interface. If the Frame Relay environment supports LMI 
autosensing and Inverse ARP, dynamic address mapping takes place automatically. Therefore, no 
static address mapping is required. 
QUESTION NO: 251 
A network administrator needs to configure a serial link between the main office and a remote 
location. The router at the remote office is a non-Cisco router. How should the network 
administrator configure the serial interface of the main office router to make the connection? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 208
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 
Main(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 
Main(config-if)# no shut 
B. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 
Main(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 
Main(config-if)# encapsulation ppp 
Main(config-if)# no shut 
C. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 
Main(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 
Main(config-if)# encapsulation frame-relay 
Main(config-if)# authentication chap 
Main(config-if)# no shut 
D. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 
Main(config-if)#ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 
Main(config-if)#encapsulation ietf 
Main(config-if)# no shut 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
With serial point to point links there are two options for the encapsulation. The default, HDLC, is 
Cisco proprietary and works only with other Cisco routers. The other option is PPP which is 
standards based and supported by all vendors. 
QUESTION NO: 252 
What are three reasons that an organization with multiple branch offices and roaming users might 
implement a Cisco VPN solution instead of point-to-point WAN links? (Choose three.) 
A. reduced cost 
B. better throughput 
C. broadband incompatibility 
D. increased security 
E. scalability 
F. reduced latency 
Answer: A,D,E 
Explanation: 
IPsec offer a number of advantages over point to point WAN links, particularly when multiple 
locations are involved. These include reduced cost, increased security since all traffic is encrypted, 
and increased scalability as s single WAN link can be used to connect to all locations in a VPN, 
where as a point to point link would need to be provisioned to each location. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 209
QUESTION NO: 253 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which two statistics appear in show frame-relay map output? (Choose two.) 
A. the number of BECN packets that are received by the router 
B. the value of the local DLCI 
C. the number of FECN packets that are received by the router 
D. the status of the PVC that is configured on the router 
E. the IP address of the local router 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
Sample “show frame-relay map” output: 
R1#sh frame mapSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.1 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), dynamic,broadcast,, status 
defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.3 dlci 403(0x193,0x6430), dynamic,broadcast,, status 
defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.4 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), static,CISCO, status defined, 
active 
QUESTION NO: 254 
Users have been complaining that their Frame Relay connection to the corporate site is very slow. 
The network administrator suspects that the link is overloaded. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 210
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Based on the partial output of the Router# show frame relay pvc command shown in the graphic, 
which output value indicates to the local router that traffic sent to the corporate site is experiencing 
congestion? 
A. DLCI = 100 
B. last time PVC status changed 00:25:40 
C. in BECN packets 192 
D. in FECN packets 147 
E. in DE packets 0 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
If device A is sending data to device B across a Frame Relay infrastructure and one of the 
intermediate Frame Relay switches encounters congestion, congestion being full buffers, over-subscribed 
port, overloaded resources, etc, it will set the BECN bit on packets being returned to 
the sending device and the FECN bit on the packets being sent to the receiving device. 
QUESTION NO: 255 
Which command allows you to verify the encapsulation type (CISCO or IETF) for a Frame Relay 
link? 
A. show frame-relay lmi 
B. show frame-relay map 
C. show frame-relay pvc 
D. show interfaces serial 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
When connecting Cisco devices with non-Cisco devices, you must use IETF4 encapsulation on 
both devices. Check the encapsulation type on the Cisco device with the show frame-relay map 
exec command. 
QUESTION NO: 256 
It has become necessary to configure an existing serial interface to accept a second Frame Relay 
virtual circuit. Which of the following procedures are required to accomplish this task? (Choose 
three.) 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 211
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. Remove the IP address from the physical interface. 
B. Encapsulate the physical interface with multipoint PPP. 
C. Create the virtual interfaces with the interface command. 
D. Configure each subinterface with its own IP address. 
E. Disable split horizon to prevent routing loops between the subinterface networks. 
F. Configure static Frame Relay map entries for each subinterface network. 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: 
For multiple PVC’s on a single interface, you must use subinterfaces, with each subinterface 
configured for each PVC. Each subinterface will then have its own IP address, and no IP address 
will be assigned to the main interface. 
QUESTION NO: 257 
What occurs on a Frame Relay network when the CIR is exceeded? 
A. All TCP traffic is marked discard eligible. 
B. All UDP traffic is marked discard eligible and a BECN is sent. 
C. All TCP traffic is marked discard eligible and a BECN is sent. 
D. All traffic exceeding the CIR is marked discard eligible. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: Explanation 
Committed information rate (CIR): The minimum guaranteed data transfer rate agreed to by the 
Frame Relay switch. Frames that are sent in excess of the CIR are marked as discard eligible 
(DE) which means they can be dropped if the congestion occurs within the Frame Relay network. 
Note: In the Frame Relay frame format, there is a bit called Discard eligible (DE) bit that is used to 
identify frames that are first to be dropped when the CIR is exceeded. 
QUESTION NO: 258 
Which two statements about using the CHAP authentication mechanism in a PPP link are true? 
(Choose two.) 
A. CHAP uses a two-way handshake. 
B. CHAP uses a three-way handshake. 
C. CHAP authentication periodically occurs after link establishment. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 212
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
D. CHAP authentication passwords are sent in plaintext. 
E. CHAP authentication is performed only upon link establishment. 
F. CHAP has no protection from playback attacks. 
Answer: B,C 
Explanation: 
CHAP is an authentication scheme used by Point to Point Protocol (PPP) servers to validate the 
identity of remote clients. CHAP periodically verifies the identity of the client by using a three-way 
handshake. This happens at the time of establishing the initial link (LCP), and may happen again 
at any time afterwards. The verification is based on a shared secret (such as the client user's 
password). 
QUESTION NO: 259 
Refer to the exhibit. 
Which statement describes DLCI 17? 
A. DLCI 17 describes the ISDN circuit between R2 and R3. 
B. DLCI 17 describes a PVC on R2. It cannot be used on R3 or R1. 
C. DLCI 17 is the Layer 2 address used by R2 to describe a PVC to R3. 
D. DLCI 17 describes the dial-up circuit from R2 and R3 to the service provider. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
DLCI-Data Link Connection Identifier Bits: The DLCI serves to identify the virtual connection so 
that the receiving end knows which information connection a frame belongs to. Note that this DLCI 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 213
has only local significance. Frame Relay is strictly a Layer 2 protocol suite. 
QUESTION NO: 260 
What is the result of issuing the frame-relay map ip 192.168.1.2 202 broadcast command? 
A. defines the destination IP address that is used in all broadcast packets on DCLI 202 
B. defines the source IP address that is used in all broadcast packets on DCLI 202 
C. defines the DLCI on which packets from the 192.168.1.2 IP address are received 
D. defines the DLCI that is used for all packets that are sent to the 192.168.1.2 IP address 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
This command identifies the DLCI that should be used for all packets destined to the 192.168.1.2 
address. In this case, DLCI 202 should be used. 
QUESTION NO: 261 
Which PPP subprotocol negotiates authentication options? 
A. NCP 
B. ISDN 
C. SLIP 
D. LCP 
E. DLCI 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
The PPP Link Control Protocol (LCP) is documented in RFC 1661. LPC negotiates link and PPP 
parameters to dynamically configure the data link layer of a PPP connection. Common LCP 
options include the PPP MRU, the authentication protocol, compression of PPP header fields, 
callback, and multilink options. 
QUESTION NO: 262 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 214
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What are two characteristics of Frame Relay point-to-point subinterfaces? (Choose two.) 
A. They create split-horizon issues. 
B. They require a unique subnet within a routing domain. 
C. They emulate leased lines. 
D. They are ideal for full-mesh topologies. 
E. They require the use of NBMA options when using OSPF. 
Answer: B,C 
Explanation: 
Subinterfaces are used for point to point frame relay connections, emulating virtual point to point 
leased lines. Each subinterface requires a unique IP address/subnet. Remember, you can not 
assign multiple interfaces in a router that belong to the same IP subnet. 
QUESTION NO: 263 
What command is used to verify the DLCI destination address in a Frame Relay static 
configuration? 
A. show frame-relay pvc 
B. show frame-relay lmi 
C. show frame-relay map 
D. show frame relay end-to-end 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
Sample “show frame-relay map” output: 
R1#sh frame mapSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.1 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), dynamic,broadcast,, status 
defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.3 dlci 403(0x193,0x6430), dynamic,broadcast,, status 
defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.4 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), static,CISCO, status defined, 
active 
QUESTION NO: 264 
What is the purpose of Inverse ARP? 
A. to map a known IP address to a MAC address 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 215
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. to map a known DLCI to a MAC address 
C. to map a known MAC address to an IP address 
D. to map a known DLCI to an IP address 
E. to map a known IP address to a SPID 
F. to map a known SPID to a MAC address 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Dynamic address mapping relies on the Frame Relay Inverse Address Resolution Protocol 
(Inverse ARP), defined by RFC 1293, to resolve a next hop network protocol (IP) address to a 
local DLCI value. The Frame Relay router sends out Inverse ARP requests on its Frame Relay 
PVC to discover the protocol address of the remote device connected to the Frame Relay network. 
The responses to the Inverse ARP requests are used to populate an address-to-DLCI mapping 
table on the Frame Relay router or access server. The router builds and maintains this address-to- 
DLCI mapping table, which contains all resolved Inverse ARP requests, including both dynamic 
and static mapping entries. 
Topic 9, Mix Questions Set 
QUESTION NO: 265 
What is a valid HSRP virtual MAC address? 
A. 0000.5E00.01A3 
B. 0007.B400.AE01 
C. 0000.0C07.AC15 
D. 0007.5E00.B301 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 266 
In GLBP, which router will respond to client ARP requests? 
A. The active virtual gateway will reply with one of four possible virtual MAC addresses. 
B. All GLBP member routers will reply in round-robin fashion. 
C. The active virtual gateway will reply with its own hardware MAC address. 
D. The GLBP member routers will reply with one of four possible burned in hardware addresses. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 216
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 267 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
Which statement describes VRRP object tracking? 
A. It monitors traffic flow and link utilization. 
B. It ensures the best VRRP router is the virtual router master for the group. 
C. It causes traffic to dynamically move to higher bandwidth links. 
D. It thwarts man-in-the-middle attacks. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 268 
What are three benefits of GLBP? (Choose three.) 
A. GLBP supports up to eight virtual forwarders per GLBP group. 
B. GLBP supports clear text and MD5 password authentication between GLBP group members. 
C. GLBP is an open source standardized protocol that can be used with multiple vendors. 
D. GLBP supports up to 1024 virtual routers. 
E. GLBP can load share traffic across a maximum of four routers. 
F. GLBP elects two AVGs and two standby AVGs for redundancy. 
Answer: B,D,E 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 269 
Which three statements about HSRP operation are true? (Choose three.) 
A. The virtual IP address and virtual MA+K44C address are active on the HSRP Master router. 
B. The HSRP default timers are a 3 second hello interval and a 10 second dead interval. 
C. HSRP supports only clear-text authentication. 
D. The HSRP virtual IP address must be on a different subnet than the routers' interfaces on the 
same LAN. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 217
E. The HSRP virtual IP address must be the same as one of the router's interface addresses on 
the LAN. 
F. HSRP supports up to 255 groups per interface, enabling an administrative form of load 
balancing. 
Answer: A,B,F 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 270 
Which three statements about Syslog utilization are true? (Choose three.) 
A. Utilizing Syslog improves network performance. 
B. The Syslog server automatically notifies the network administrator of network problems. 
C. A Syslog server provides the storage space necessary to store log files without using router 
disk space. 
D. There are more Syslog messages available within Cisco IOS than there are comparable SNMP 
trap messages. 
E. Enabling Syslog on a router automatically enables NTP for accurate time stamping. 
F. A Syslog server helps in aggregation of logs and alerts. 
Answer: C,D,F 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 271 
A network administrator enters the following command on a router: logging trap 3. What are three 
message types that will be sent to the Syslog server? (Choose three.) 
A. informational 
B. emergency 
C. warning 
D. critical 
E. debug 
F. error 
Answer: B,D,F 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 218
QUESTION NO: 272 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What is the default Syslog facility level? 
A. local4 
B. local5 
C. local6 
D. local7 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 273 
What command instructs the device to timestamp Syslog debug messages in milliseconds? 
A. service timestamps log datetime localtime 
B. service timestamps debug datetime msec 
C. service timestamps debug datetime localtime 
D. service timestamps log datetime msec 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 274 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What is the cause of the Syslog output messages? 
A. The EIGRP neighbor on Fa0/1 went down due to a failed link. 
B. The EIGRP neighbor connected to Fa0/1 is participating in a different EIGRP process, causing 
the adjacency to go down. 
C. A shut command was executed on interface Fa0/1, causing the EIGRP adjacency to go down. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 219
D. Interface Fa0/1 has become error disabled, causing the EIGRP adjacency to go down. 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 275 
What are three components that comprise the SNMP framework? (Choose three.) 
A. MIB 
B. agent 
C. set 
D. AES 
E. supervisor 
F. manager 
Answer: A,B,F 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 276 
What are three components that comprise the SNMP framework? (Choose three.) 
A. MIB 
B. agent 
C. set 
D. AES 
E. supervisor 
F. manager 
Answer: A,B,F 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 277 
What SNMP message alerts the manager to a condition on the network? 
A. response 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 220
B. get 
C. trap 
D. capture 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 278 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What authentication type is used by SNMPv2? 
A. HMAC-MD5 
B. HMAC-SHA 
C. CBC-DES 
D. community strings 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 279 
Which three statements about the features of SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 are true? (Choose three.) 
A. SNMPv3 enhanced SNMPv2 security features. 
B. SNMPv3 added the Inform protocol message to SNMP. 
C. SNMPv2 added the Inform protocol message to SNMP. 
D. SNMPv3 added the GetBulk protocol messages to SNMP. 
E. SNMPv2 added the GetBulk protocol message to SNMP. 
F. SNMPv2 added the GetNext protocol message to SNMP. 
Answer: A,C,E 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 280 
What are three reasons to collect Netflow data on a company network? (Choose three.) 
A. To identify applications causing congestion. 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 221
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
B. To authorize user network access. 
C. To report and alert link up / down instances. 
D. To diagnose slow network performance, bandwidth hogs, and bandwidth utilization. 
E. To detect suboptimal routing in the network. 
F. To confirm the appropriate amount of bandwidth that has been allocated to each Class of 
Service. 
Answer: A,D,F 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 281 
What Netflow component can be applied to an interface to track IPv4 traffic? 
A. flow monitor 
B. flow record 
C. flow sampler 
D. flow exporter 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 282 
What Cisco IOS feature can be enabled to pinpoint an application that is causing slow network 
performance? 
A. SNMP 
B. Netflow 
C. WCCP 
D. IP SLA 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 283 
What command visualizes the general NetFlow data on the command line? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 222
A. show ip flow export 
B. show ip flow top-talkers 
C. show ip cache flow 
D. show mls sampling 
E. show mls netflow ip 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 284 
What are three values that must be the same within a sequence of packets for Netflow to consider 
them a network flow? (Choose three.) 
A. source IP address 
B. source MAC address 
C. egress interface 
D. ingress interface 
E. destination IP address 
F. IP next-hop 
Answer: A,D,E 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 285 
What are three factors a network administrator must consider before implementing Netflow in the 
network? (Choose three.) 
A. CPU utilization 
B. where Netflow data will be sent 
C. number of devices exporting Netflow data 
D. port availability 
E. SNMP version 
F. WAN encapsulation 
Answer: A,B,C 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 223
QUESTION NO: 286 
Refer to the exhibit. 
A network administrator is configuring an EtherChannel between SW1 and SW2. The SW1 
configuration is shown. What is the correct configuration for SW2? 
A. interface FastEthernet 0/1 
channel-group 1 mode active 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
interface FastEthernet 0/2 
channel-group 1 mode active 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
B. interface FastEthernet 0/1 
channel-group 2 mode auto 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
interface FastEthernet 0/2 
channel-group 2 mode auto 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
C. interface FastEthernet 0/1 
channel-group 1 mode desirable 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 224
interface FastEthernet 0/2 
channel-group 1 mode desirable 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
D. interface FastEthernet 0/1 
channel-group 1 mode passive 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
interface FastEthernet 0/2 
channel-group 1 mode passive 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 287 
Which two statements about the OSPF Router ID are true? (Choose two.) 
A. It identifies the source of a Type 1 LSA. 
B. It should be the same on all routers in an OSPF routing instance. 
C. By default, the lowest IP address on the router becomes the OSPF Router ID. 
D. The router automatically chooses the IP address of a loopback as the OSPF Router ID. 
E. It is created using the MAC Address of the loopback interface. 
Answer: A,D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 288 
What parameter can be different on ports within an EtherChannel? 
A. speed 
B. DTP negotiation settings 
C. trunk encapsulation 
D. duplex 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 225
QUESTION NO: 289 
What are two benefits of using a single OSPF area network design? (Choose two.) 
A. It is less CPU intensive for routers in the single area. 
B. It reduces the types of LSAs that are generated. 
C. It removes the need for virtual links. 
D. It increases LSA response times. 
E. It reduces the number of required OSPF neighbor adjacencies. 
Answer: B,C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 290 
Refer to the exhibit. 
What set of commands was configured on interface Fa0/3 to produce the given output? 
A. interface FastEthernet 0/3 
channel-group 1 mode desirable 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
B. interface FastEthernet 0/3 
channel-group 2 mode passive 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
C. interface FastEthernet 0/3 
channel-group 2 mode active 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
switchport mode trunk 
D. interface FastEthernet 0/3 
channel-group 2 mode on 
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 226
switchport mode trunk 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 291 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What are two enhancements that OSPFv3 supports over OSPFv2? (Choose two.) 
A. It requires the use of ARP. 
B. It can support multiple IPv6 subnets on a single link. 
C. It supports up to 2 instances of OSPFv3 over a common link. 
D. It routes over links rather than over networks. 
Answer: B,D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 292 
Refer to the exhibit. 
If the devices produced the given output, what is the cause of the EtherChannel problem? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 227
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
A. SW1's Fa0/1 interface is administratively shut down. 
B. There is an encapsulation mismatch between SW1's Fa0/1 and SW2's Fa0/1 interfaces. 
C. There is an MTU mismatch between SW1's Fa0/1 and SW2's Fa0/1 interfaces. 
D. There is a speed mismatch between SW1's Fa0/1 and SW2's Fa0/1 interfaces. 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 293 
When a router undergoes the exchange protocol within OSPF, in what order does it pass through 
each state? 
A. exstart state > loading state > exchange state > full state 
B. exstart state > exchange state > loading state > full state 
C. exstart state > full state > loading state > exchange state 
D. loading state > exchange state > full state > exstart state 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 294 
A network administrator creates a layer 3 EtherChannel, bundling four interfaces into channel 
group 1. On what interface is the IP address configured? 
A. the port-channel 1 interface 
B. the highest number member interface 
C. all member interfaces 
D. the lowest number member interface 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 295 
What command sequence will configure a router to run OSPF and add network 10.1.1.0 /24 to 
area 0? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 228
A. router ospf area 0 
network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 area 0 
B. router ospf 
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 
C. router ospf 1 
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 
D. router ospf area 0 
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 
E. router ospf 
network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 area 0 
F. router ospf 1 
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 
Answer: C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 296 
Refer to the exhibit. 
If the router Cisco returns the given output and has not had its router ID set manually, what value 
will OSPF use as its router ID? 
A. 192.168.1.1 
B. 172.16.1.1 
C. 1.1.1.1 
D. 2.2.2.2 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 229
QUESTION NO: 297 
What OSPF command, when configured, will include all interfaces into area 0? 
A. network 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 area 0 
B. network 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 area 0 
C. network 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 area 0 
D. network all-interfaces area 0 
Answer: A 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 298 
Which statement describes the process ID that is used to run OSPF on a router? 
A. It is globally significant and is used to represent the AS number. 
B. It is locally significant and is used to identify an instance of the OSPF database. 
C. It is globally significant and is used to identify OSPF stub areas. 
D. It is locally significant and must be the same throughout an area. 
Answer: B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 299 
Which three are the components of SNMP? (Choose three) 
A. MIB 
B. SNMP Manager 
C. SysLog Server 
D. SNMP Agent 
E. Set 
Answer: A,B,D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 300 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 230
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
What are the Popular destinations for syslog messages to be saved? 
A. Flash 
B. The logging buffer .RAM 
C. The console terminal 
D. Other terminals 
E. Syslog server 
Answer: B,C,E 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 301 
Syslog was configured with a level 3 trap. Which 3 types of logs would be generated (choose 
three) 
A. Emergencies 
B. Alerts 
C. Critical 
D. Errors 
E. Warnings 
Answer: A,B,C 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 302 
What are the benefit of using Netflow? (Choose three.) 
A. Network, Application & User Monitoring 
B. Network Planning 
C. Security Analysis 
D. Accounting/Billing 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 303 
Which protocol can cause overload on a CPU of a managed device? 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 231
A. Netflow 
B. WCCP 
C. IP SLA 
D. SNMP 
Answer: D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 304 
What are the three things that the Netflow uses to consider the traffic to be in a same flow? 
A. IP address 
B. Interface name 
C. Port numbers 
D. L3 protocol type 
E. MAC address 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 305 
What is the alert message generated by SNMP agents called ? 
A. TRAP 
B. INFORM 
C. GET 
D. SET 
Answer: A,B 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 306 
Which three features are added in SNMPv3 over SNMPv2? 
A. Message Integrity 
B. Compression 
C. Authentication 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 232
D. Encryption 
E. Error Detection 
Answer: A,C,D 
Explanation: 
QUESTION NO: 307 
In a GLBP network, who is responsible for the arp request? 
A. AVF 
B. AVG 
C. Active Router 
D. Standby Router 
Answer: B 
Cisco 200-120 Exam 
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 233

More Related Content

PDF
CCNA DUMPS 200-120
PPTX
CCNA 200-120 Latest Dumps
PDF
Cisco CCNAX .200 120
PDF
More than 200 CCNA Question Answer
PDF
Ccna 200-120 Exam Dumps
PDF
CCNA 200-120 Exam Questions
PDF
CCNA Dec, 2015 Questions
PDF
CCNA Exam Question
CCNA DUMPS 200-120
CCNA 200-120 Latest Dumps
Cisco CCNAX .200 120
More than 200 CCNA Question Answer
Ccna 200-120 Exam Dumps
CCNA 200-120 Exam Questions
CCNA Dec, 2015 Questions
CCNA Exam Question

What's hot (20)

PDF
CCNA 200-120 Exam Quick Notes
PDF
Cisco.actualtests.200 120.v2013-12-10.by.watson.314q (2 new q)
PDF
Cisco.exactquestions.200 120.v2014-12-23.by.konrad.338q
PDF
Ccent notes part 1
PDF
1000 Ccna Questions And Answers
DOCX
How to configure vlan, stp, dtp step by step guide
PDF
CCNA Quick Notes
DOCX
Ccna 2 rse practice skills assessment
PDF
Basic ccna interview questions and answers ~ sysnet notes
PPTX
CCNA Exam 200-120 pdf
PDF
Ccna new lab_manual_by_esp_team
DOC
Lab practice 1 configuring basic routing and switching (with answer)
DOCX
Ccna 1 practice final exam answer v5
PDF
ccna 1 v5.0 itn practice final exam answers
PDF
Ccna cheat sheet
DOCX
Lab view the switch mac address table lab - view the switch
PPT
Chapter2ccna
PPT
CCNA Advanced Switching
PPT
Chapter8ccna
PDF
640 802 exam
CCNA 200-120 Exam Quick Notes
Cisco.actualtests.200 120.v2013-12-10.by.watson.314q (2 new q)
Cisco.exactquestions.200 120.v2014-12-23.by.konrad.338q
Ccent notes part 1
1000 Ccna Questions And Answers
How to configure vlan, stp, dtp step by step guide
CCNA Quick Notes
Ccna 2 rse practice skills assessment
Basic ccna interview questions and answers ~ sysnet notes
CCNA Exam 200-120 pdf
Ccna new lab_manual_by_esp_team
Lab practice 1 configuring basic routing and switching (with answer)
Ccna 1 practice final exam answer v5
ccna 1 v5.0 itn practice final exam answers
Ccna cheat sheet
Lab view the switch mac address table lab - view the switch
Chapter2ccna
CCNA Advanced Switching
Chapter8ccna
640 802 exam
Ad

Similar to CCNAX 200 120 dumps (20)

PDF
CISCO Exact Questions By: Konard
PDF
Đề Thi Trắc Nghiệm CCNA Full
PDF
200-301-demo.pdf
PDF
Cisco 200-301 Exam Dumps
PDF
Cisco 200-301 Exam Dumps
PDF
00-105 Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 1 (ICND1.pdf
DOCX
Ccna guide
PDF
Ccna discovery
PDF
Cisco 200-301 Exam Dumps.pdf
PDF
CCNA DUMPS 640-802
PDF
Ccn aquestions jul_7_2015
PDF
Ccna guide
PDF
Ccna exam 640 802
PDF
Ccna final exam
PDF
Lecture 06
PDF
CCNA_questions_2021.pdf
PDF
Ccna network simulator
PDF
Ccna dumps
PDF
Ccna exam dumps
PDF
Ccna certification training
CISCO Exact Questions By: Konard
Đề Thi Trắc Nghiệm CCNA Full
200-301-demo.pdf
Cisco 200-301 Exam Dumps
Cisco 200-301 Exam Dumps
00-105 Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 1 (ICND1.pdf
Ccna guide
Ccna discovery
Cisco 200-301 Exam Dumps.pdf
CCNA DUMPS 640-802
Ccn aquestions jul_7_2015
Ccna guide
Ccna exam 640 802
Ccna final exam
Lecture 06
CCNA_questions_2021.pdf
Ccna network simulator
Ccna dumps
Ccna exam dumps
Ccna certification training
Ad

More from abdulquyyum (6)

PDF
Cisco Route Maps
PDF
NGN Next Generation Networks
PDF
NGN, Ngn present, Next generation Networks, AQBUTT, Abdul Quyyum Butt, Abdul ...
PPTX
PPTX
Win xp installation
PPTX
Cisco Route Maps
NGN Next Generation Networks
NGN, Ngn present, Next generation Networks, AQBUTT, Abdul Quyyum Butt, Abdul ...
Win xp installation

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
PPTX
OMC Textile Division Presentation 2021.pptx
PPT
Teaching material agriculture food technology
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PPTX
TLE Review Electricity (Electricity).pptx
PDF
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
PPTX
Machine Learning_overview_presentation.pptx
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PDF
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
PDF
A comparative analysis of optical character recognition models for extracting...
PDF
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
PDF
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
PDF
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
PDF
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PDF
Accuracy of neural networks in brain wave diagnosis of schizophrenia
PPTX
SOPHOS-XG Firewall Administrator PPT.pptx
PDF
Machine learning based COVID-19 study performance prediction
PPTX
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
OMC Textile Division Presentation 2021.pptx
Teaching material agriculture food technology
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
TLE Review Electricity (Electricity).pptx
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
Machine Learning_overview_presentation.pptx
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
A comparative analysis of optical character recognition models for extracting...
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Accuracy of neural networks in brain wave diagnosis of schizophrenia
SOPHOS-XG Firewall Administrator PPT.pptx
Machine learning based COVID-19 study performance prediction
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx

CCNAX 200 120 dumps

  • 1. Cisco 200-120 CCNA Cisco Certified Network Associate CCNA Version: 18.1
  • 2. Topic 1, Operation of IP Data Networks QUESTION NO: 1 Refer to the exhibit: What will Router1 do when it receives the data frame shown? (Choose three.) A. Router1 will strip off the source MAC address and replace it with the MAC address 0000.0c36.6965. B. Router1 will strip off the source IP address and replace it with the IP address 192.168.40.1. C. Router1 will strip off the destination MAC address and replace it with the MAC address 0000.0c07.4320. D. Router1 will strip off the destination IP address and replace it with the IP address of 192.168.40.1. E. Router1 will forward the data packet out interface FastEthernet0/1. F. Router1 will forward the data packet out interface FastEthernet0/2. Answer: A,C,F Explanation: Remember, the source and destination MAC changes as each router hop along with the TTL being decremented but the source and destination IP address remain the same from source to destination. QUESTION NO: 2 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 2
  • 3. Cisco 200-120 Exam Which three statements correctly describe Network Device A? (Choose three.) A. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.128, each interface does not require an IP address. B. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.128, each interface does require an IP address on a unique IP subnet. C. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.0, must be a Layer 2 device for the PCs to communicate with each other. D. With a network wide mask of 255.255.255.0, must be a Layer 3 device for the PCs to communicate with each other. E. With a network wide mask of 255.255.254.0, each interface does not require an IP address. Answer: B,D,E Explanation: If Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.128 the hosts vary from x.x.x.0 - x.x.x.127 & x.x.x.128- x.x.x.255,so the IP Addresses of 2 hosts fall in different subnets so each interface needs an IP an address so that they can communicate each other. If Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 the 2 specified hosts fall in different subnets so they need a Layer 3 device to communicate. If Subnet Mask is 255.255.254.0 the 2 specified hosts are in same subnet so are in network address and can be accommodated in same Layer 2 domain and can communicate with each other directly using the Layer 2 address. QUESTION NO: 3 Which layer in the OSI reference model is responsible for determining the availability of the receiving program and checking to see if enough resources exist for that communication? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 3
  • 4. A. transport B. network C. presentation D. session E. application Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: E Explanation: This question is to examine the OSI reference model. The Application layer is responsible for identifying and establishing the availability of the intended communication partner and determining whether sufficient resources for the intended communication exist. QUESTION NO: 4 Which of the following describes the roles of devices in a WAN? (Choose three.) A. A CSU/DSU terminates a digital local loop. B. A modem terminates a digital local loop. C. A CSU/DSU terminates an analog local loop. D. A modem terminates an analog local loop. E. A router is commonly considered a DTE device. F. A router is commonly considered a DCE device. Answer: A,D,E Explanation: The idea behind a WAN is to be able to connect two DTE networks together through a DCE network. The network’s DCE device (includes CSU/DSU) provides clocking to the DTE-connected interface (the router’s serial interface). "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 4
  • 5. A modem modulates outgoing digital signals from a computer or other digital device to analog signals for a conventional copper twisted pair telephone line and demodulates the incoming analog signal and converts it to a digital signal for the digital device. A CSU/DSU is used between two digital lines - For more explanation of answer D, in telephony the local loop (also referred to as a subscriber line) is the physical link or circuit that connects from the demarcation point of the customer premises to the edge of the carrier or telecommunications service provider’s network. Therefore a modem terminates an analog local loop is correct. QUESTION NO: 5 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 5
  • 6. Cisco 200-120 Exam Host A pings interface S0/0 on router 3. What is the TTL value for that ping? A. 252 B. 253 C. 254 D. 255 Answer: B Explanation: Explanation From the CCNA ICND2 Exam book: “Routers decrement the TTL by 1 every time they forward a packet; if a router decrements the TTL to 0, it throws away the packet. This prevents packets from rotating forever.” I want to make it clear that before the router forwards a packet, the TTL is still remain the same. For example in the topology above, pings to S0/1 and S0/0 of Router 2 have the same TTL. The picture below shows TTL values for each interface of each router and for Host B. Notice that Host A initializes ICMP packet with a TTL of 255: QUESTION NO: 6 A network administrator is verifying the configuration of a newly installed host by establishing an "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 6
  • 7. Cisco 200-120 Exam FTP connection to a remote server. What is the highest layer of the protocol stack that the network administrator is using for this operation? A. application B. presentation C. session D. transport E. internet F. data link Answer: A Explanation: Explanation FTP belongs to Application layer and it is also the highest layer of the OSI model. QUESTION NO: 7 Refer to the exhibit. After HostA pings HostB, which entry will be in the ARP cache of HostA to support this transmission? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 7
  • 8. A. Exhibit A B. Exhibit B C. Exhibit C D. Exhibit D E. Exhibit E F. Exhibit F Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: A Explanation: When a host needs to reach a device on another subnet, the ARP cache entry will be that of the Ethernet address of the local router (default gateway) for the physical MAC address. The destination IP address will not change, and will be that of the remote host (HostB). QUESTION NO: 8 A network interface port has collision detection and carrier sensing enabled on a shared twisted pair network. From this statement, what is known about the network interface port? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 8
  • 9. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. This is a 10 Mb/s switch port. B. This is a 100 Mb/s switch port. C. This is an Ethernet port operating at half duplex. D. This is an Ethernet port operating at full duplex. E. This is a port on a network interface card in a PC. Answer: C Explanation: Modern Ethernet networks built with switches and full-duplex connections no longer utilize CSMA/CD. CSMA/CD is only used in obsolete shared media Ethernet (which uses repeater or hub). QUESTION NO: 9 A receiving host computes the checksum on a frame and determines that the frame is damaged. The frame is then discarded. At which OSI layer did this happen? A. session B. transport C. network D. data link E. physical Answer: D Explanation: The Data Link layer provides the physical transmission of the data and handles error notification, network topology, and flow control. The Data Link layer formats the message into pieces, each called a data frame, and adds a customized header containing the hardware destination and source address. Protocols Data Unit (PDU) on Datalink layer is called frame. According to this question the frame is damaged and discarded which will happen at the Data Link layer. QUESTION NO: 10 Which of the following correctly describe steps in the OSI data encapsulation process? (Choose two.) A. The transport layer divides a data stream into segments and may add reliability and flow control information. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 9
  • 10. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. The data link layer adds physical source and destination addresses and an FCS to the segment. C. Packets are created when the network layer encapsulates a frame with source and destination host addresses and protocol-related control information. D. Packets are created when the network layer adds Layer 3 addresses and control information to a segment. E. The presentation layer translates bits into voltages for transmission across the physical link. Answer: A,D Explanation: The Application Layer (Layer 7) refers to communications services to applications and is the interface between the network and the application. Examples include. Telnet, HTTP, FTP, Internet browsers, NFS, SMTP gateways, SNMP, X.400 mail, and FTAM. The Presentation Layer (Layer 6) defining data formats, such as ASCII text, EBCDIC text, binary, BCD, and JPEG. Encryption also is defined as a presentation layer service. Examples include. JPEG, ASCII, EBCDIC, TIFF, GIF, PICT, encryption, MPEG, and MIDI. The Session Layer (Layer 5) defines how to start, control, and end communication sessions. This includes the control and management of multiple bidirectional messages so that the application can be notified if only some of a series of messages are completed. This allows the presentation layer to have a seamless view of an incoming stream of data. The presentation layer can be presented with data if all flows occur in some cases. Examples include. RPC, SQL, NFS, NetBios names, AppleTalk ASP, and DECnet SCP The Transport Layer (Layer 4) defines several functions, including the choice of protocols. The most important Layer 4 functions are error recovery and flow control. The transport layer may provide for retransmission, i.e., error recovery, and may use flow control to prevent unnecessary congestion by attempting to send data at a rate that the network can accommodate, or it might not, depending on the choice of protocols. Multiplexing of incoming data for different flows to applications on the same host is also performed. Reordering of the incoming data stream when packets arrive out of order is included. Examples include. TCP, UDP, and SPX. The Network Layer (Layer 3) defines end-to-end delivery of packets and defines logical addressing to accomplish this. It also defines how routing works and how routes are learned; and how to fragment a packet into smaller packets to accommodate media with smaller maximum transmission unit sizes. Examples include. IP, IPX, AppleTalk DDP, and ICMP. Both IP and IPX define logical addressing, routing, the learning of routing information, and end-to-end delivery rules. The IP and IPX protocols most closely match the OSI network layer (Layer 3) and are called Layer 3 protocols because their functions most closely match OSI's Layer 3. The Data Link Layer (Layer 2) is concerned with getting data across one particular link or medium. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 10
  • 11. Cisco 200-120 Exam The data link protocols define delivery across an individual link. These protocols are necessarily concerned with the type of media in use. Examples includE. IEEE 802.3/802.2, HDLC, Frame Relay, PPP, FDDI, ATM, and IEEE 802.5/802.2. QUESTION NO: 11 Refer to the graphic. Host A is communicating with the server. What will be the source MAC address of the frames received by Host A from the server? A. the MAC address of router interface e0 B. the MAC address of router interface e1 C. the MAC address of the server network interface D. the MAC address of host A Answer: A Explanation: Whereas switches can only examine and forward packets based on the contents of the MAC header, routers can look further into the packet to discover the network for which a packet is destined. Routers make forwarding decisions based on the packet's network-layer header (such as an IPX header or IP header). These network-layer headers contain source and destination network addresses. Local devices address packets to the router's MAC address in the MAC header. After receiving the packets, the router must perform the following steps: "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 11
  • 12. 1. Check the incoming packet for corruption, and remove the MAC header . The router checks the packet for MAC-layer errors. The router then strips off the MAC header and examines the network-layer header to determine what to do with the packet. 2. Examine the age of the packet. The router must ensure that the packet has not come too far to be forwarded. For example, IPX headers contain a hop count. By default, 15 hops is the maximum number of hops (or routers) that a packet can cross. If a packet has a hop count of 15, the router discards the packet. IP headers contain a Time to Live (TTL) value. Unlike the IPX hop count, which increments as the packet is forwarded through each router, the IP TTL value decrements as the IP packet is forwarded through each router. If an IP packet has a TTL value of 1, the router discards the packet. A router cannot decrement the TTL value to 1 and then forward the packet. 3. Determine the route to the destination. Routers maintain a routing table that lists available networks, the direction to the desired network (the outgoing interface number), and the distance to those networks. After determining which direction to forward the packet, the router must build a new header. (If you want to read the IP routing tables on a Windows 95/98 workstation, type ROUTE PRINT in the DOS box.) 4. Build the new MAC header and forward the packet. Finally, the router builds a new MAC header for the packet. The MAC header includes the router's MAC address and the final destination's MAC address or the MAC address of the next router in the path. QUESTION NO: 12 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 12
  • 13. What two results would occur if the hub were to be replaced with a switch that is configured with one Ethernet VLAN? (Choose two.) A. The number of collision domains would remain the same. B. The number of collision domains would decrease. C. The number of collision domains would increase. D. The number of broadcast domains would remain the same. E. The number of broadcast domains would decrease. F. The number of broadcast domains would increase. Answer: C,D Explanation: Basically, a collision domain is a network segment that allows normal network traffic to flow back and forth. In the old days of hubs, this meant you had a lot of collisions, and the old CSMA/CD would be working overtime to try to get those packets re-sent every time there was a collision on the wire (since ethernet allows only one host to be transmitting at once without there being a traffic jam). With switches, you break up collision domains by switching packets bound for other collision domains. These days, since we mostly use switches to connect computers to the network, you generally have one collision domain to a PC. Broadcast domains are exactly what they imply: they are network segments that allow broadcasts to be sent across them. Since switches and bridges allow for broadcast traffic to go unswitched, broadcasts can traverse collision domains freely. Routers, however, don't allow broadcasts through by default, so when a broadcast hits a router (or the perimeter of a VLAN), it doesn't get forwarded. The simple way to look at it is this way: switches break up collision domains, while routers (and VLANs) break up collision domains and broadcast domains. Also, a broadcast domain can contain multiple collision domains, but a collision domain can never have more than one broadcast domain associated with it. Collision Domain: A group of Ethernet or Fast Ethernet devices in a CSMA/CD LAN that are connected by repeaters and compete for access on the network. Only one device in the collision domain may transmit at any one time, and the other devices in the domain listen to the network in order to avoid data collisions. A collision domain is sometimes referred to as an Ethernet segment. Broadcast Domain: Broadcasting sends a message to everyone on the local network (subnet). An example for Broadcasting would be DHCP Request from a Client PC. The Client is asking for a IP Address, but the client does not know how to reach the DHCP Server. So the client sends a DHCP Discover packet to EVERY PC in the local subnet (Broadcast). But only the DHCP Server will answer to the Request. How to count them? Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 13
  • 14. Cisco 200-120 Exam Broadcast Domain: No matter how many hosts or devices are connected together, if they are connected with a repeater, hub, switch or bridge, all these devices are in ONE Broadcast domain (assuming a single VLAN). A Router is used to separate Broadcast-Domains (we could also call them Subnets - or call them VLANs). So, if a router stands between all these devices, we have TWO broadcast domains. Collision Domain: Each connection from a single PC to a Layer 2 switch is ONE Collision domain. For example, if 5 PCs are connected with separate cables to a switch, we have 5 Collision domains. If this switch is connected to another switch or a router, we have one collision domain more. If 5 Devices are connected to a Hub, this is ONE Collision Domain. Each device that is connected to a Layer 1 device (repeater, hub) will reside in ONE single collision domain. QUESTION NO: 13 Which three statements accurately describe Layer 2 Ethernet switches? (Choose three.) A. Spanning Tree Protocol allows switches to automatically share VLAN information. B. Establishing VLANs increases the number of broadcast domains. C. Switches that are configured with VLANs make forwarding decisions based on both Layer 2 and Layer 3 address information. D. Microsegmentation decreases the number of collisions on the network. E. In a properly functioning network with redundant switched paths, each switched segment will contain one root bridge with all its ports in the forwarding state. All other switches in that broadcast domain will have only one root port. F. If a switch receives a frame for an unknown destination, it uses ARP to resolve the address. Answer: B,D,E Explanation: Explanation Microsegmentation is a network design (functionality) where each workstation or device on a network gets its own dedicated segment (collision domain) to the switch. Each network device gets the full bandwidth of the segment and does not have to share the segment with other devices. Microsegmentation reduces and can even eliminate collisions because each segment is its own collision domain -> . Note: Microsegmentation decreases the number of collisions but it increases the number of collision domains. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 14
  • 15. QUESTION NO: 14 Where does routing occur within the DoD TCP/IP reference model? A. application B. internet C. network D. transport Answer: B Explanation: The picture below shows the comparison between TCP/IP model & OSI model. Notice that the Internet Layer of TCP/IP is equivalent to the Network Layer which is responsible for routing decision. QUESTION NO: 15 Refer to exhibit: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 15
  • 16. Cisco 200-120 Exam Which destination addresses will be used by Host A to send data to Host C? (Choose two.) A. the IP address of Switch 1 B. the MAC address of Switch 1 C. the IP address of Host C D. the MAC address of Host C E. the IP address of the router's E0 interface F. the MAC address of the router's E0 interface Answer: C,F Explanation: Explanation While transferring data through many different networks, the source and destination IP addresses are not changed. Only the source and destination MAC addresses are changed. So in this case Host A will use the IP address of Host C and the MAC address of E0 interface to send data. When the router receives this data, it replaces the source MAC address with it own E1 interface’s MAC address and replaces the destination MAC address with Host C’s MAC address before sending to Host C . QUESTION NO: 16 For what two purposes does the Ethernet protocol use physical addresses? (Choose two.) A. to uniquely identify devices at Layer 2 B. to allow communication with devices on a different network C. to differentiate a Layer 2 frame from a Layer 3 packet "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 16
  • 17. D. to establish a priority system to determine which device gets to transmit first E. to allow communication between different devices on the same network F. to allow detection of a remote device when its physical address is unknown Answer: A,E Explanation: Physical addresses or MAC addresses are used to identify devices at layer 2. MAC addresses are only used to communicate on the same network. To communicate on different network we have to use Layer 3 addresses (IP addresses) -> B is not correct. Layer 2 frame and Layer 3 packet can be recognized via headers. Layer 3 packet also contains physical address -> On Ethernet, each frame has the same priority to transmit by default -> All devices need a physical address to identify itself. If not, they can not communicate -> QUESTION NO: 17 Refer to the exhibit. Based on the information given, which switch will be elected root bridge and why? A. Switch A, because it has the lowest MAC address B. Switch A, because it is the most centrally located switch C. Switch B, because it has the highest MAC address D. Switch C, because it is the most centrally located switch E. Switch C, because it has the lowest priority F. Switch D, because it has the highest priority Answer: E Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 17
  • 18. Cisco 200-120 Exam Explanation: To elect the root bridge in the LAN, first check the priority value. The switch having the lowest priority will win the election process. If Priority Value is the same then it checks the MAC Address; the switch having the lowest MAC Address will become the root bridge. In this case, switch C has the lowest MAC Address so it becomes the root bridge. QUESTION NO: 18 Which of the following statements describe the network shown in the graphic? (Choose two.) A. There are two broadcast domains in the network. B. There are four broadcast domains in the network. C. There are six broadcast domains in the network. D. There are four collision domains in the network. E. There are five collision domains in the network. F. There are seven collision domains in the network. Answer: A,F Explanation: Only router can break up broadcast domains so in the exhibit there are 2 broadcast domains: from e0 interface to the left is a broadcast domain and from e1 interface to the right is another broadcast domain ->. Both router and switch can break up collision domains so there is only 1 collision domain on the left of the router (because hub doesn’t break up collision domain) and there are 6 collision "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 18
  • 19. Cisco 200-120 Exam domains on the right of the router (1 collision domain from e1 interface to the switch + 5 collision domains for 5 PCs in Production) -> QUESTION NO: 19 In an Ethernet network, under what two scenarios can devices transmit? (Choose two.) A. when they receive a special token B. when there is a carrier C. when they detect no other devices are sending D. when the medium is idle E. when the server grants access Answer: C,D Explanation: Explanation Ethernet network is a shared environment so all devices have the right to access to the medium. If more than one device transmits simultaneously, the signals collide and can not reach the destination. If a device detects another device is sending, it will wait for a specified amount of time before attempting to transmit. When there is no traffic detected, a device will transmit its message. While this transmission is occurring, the device continues to listen for traffic or collisions on the LAN. After the message is sent, the device returns to its default listening mode. QUESTION NO: 20 A router has two Fast Ethernet interfaces and needs to connect to four VLANs in the local network. How can you accomplish this task, using the fewest physical interfaces and without decreasing network performance? A. Use a hub to connect the four VLANS with a Fast Ethernet interface on the router. B. Add a second router to handle the VLAN traffic. C. Add two more Fast Ethernet interfaces. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 19
  • 20. Cisco 200-120 Exam D. Implement a router-on-a-stick configuration. Answer: D Explanation: A router on a stick allows you to use sub-interfaces to create multiple logical networks on a single physical interface. QUESTION NO: 21 Host 1 is trying to communicate with Host 2. The e0 interface on Router C is down. Which of the following are true? (Choose two.) A. Router C will use ICMP to inform Host 1 that Host 2 cannot be reached. B. Router C will use ICMP to inform Router B that Host 2 cannot be reached. C. Router C will use ICMP to inform Host 1, Router A, and Router B that Host 2 cannot be reached. D. Router C will send a Destination Unreachable message type. E. Router C will send a Router Selection message type. F. Router C will send a Source Quench message type. Answer: A,D Explanation: Host 1 is trying to communicate with Host 2. The e0 interface on Router C is down. Router C will send ICMP packets to inform Host 1 that Host 2 cannot be reached. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 20
  • 21. QUESTION NO: 22 What is the difference between a CSU/DSU and a modem? A. A CSU/DSU converts analog signals from a router to a leased line; a modem converts analog signals from a router to a leased line. B. A CSU/DSU converts analog signals from a router to a phone line; a modem converts digital signals from a router to a leased line. C. A CSU/DSU converts digital signals from a router to a phone line; a modem converts analog signals from a router to a phone line. D. A CSU/DSU converts digital signals from a router to a leased line; a modem converts digital signals from a router to a phone line. Answer: D Explanation: CSU/DSU is used to convert digital signals from a router to a network circuit such as a T1, while a modem is used to convert digital signals over a regular POTS line. QUESTION NO: 23 DRAG DROP Answer: Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 21
  • 22. To remember which type of cable you should use, follow these tips: - To connect two serial interfaces of 2 routers we use serial cable– To specify when we use crossover cable or straight-through cable, we should remember:Group 1: Router, Host, Server Group 2: Hub, SwitchOne device in group 1 + One device in group 2: use straight-through cable Two devices in the same group: use crossover cable For example: we use straight-through cable to connect switch to router, switch to host, hub to host, hub to server… and we use crossover cable to connect switch to switch, switch to hub, router to router, host to host… ) QUESTION NO: 24 DRAG DROP Answer: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 22
  • 23. Explanation: QUESTION NO: 25 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 23
  • 24. Answer: Explanation: Source Mac Address Destination Mac Address Source IP address Destination MAC address MAC 0000.0c89.3333 MAC 0000.0c89.9999 IP 172.16.34.250 IP 172.16.21.7 QUESTION NO: 26 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 24
  • 25. Answer: Explanation: QUESTION NO: 27 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 25
  • 26. Answer: Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 26
  • 27. Cisco 200-120 Exam Topic 2, LAN Switching Technologies QUESTION NO: 28 Refer to the exhibit. Switch port FastEthernet 0/24 on ALSwitch1 will be used to create an IEEE 802.1Q-compliant trunk to another switch. Based on the output shown, what is the reason the trunk does not form, even though the proper cabling has been attached? A. VLANs have not been created yet. B. An IP address must be configured for the port. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 27
  • 28. Cisco 200-120 Exam C. The port is currently configured for access mode. D. The correct encapsulation type has not been configured. E. The “no shutdown” command has not been entered for the port. Answer: C Explanation: According to the output shown the switchport (layer 2 Switching) is enabled and the port is in access mode. To make a trunk link the port should configured as a trunk port, not an access port, by using the following command: (Config-if)#switchport mode trunk QUESTION NO: 29 Which port state is introduced by Rapid-PVST? A. learning B. listening C. discarding D. forwarding Answer: C Explanation: PVST+ is based on IEEE802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). But PVST+ has only 3 port states (discarding, learning and forwarding) while STP has 5 port states (blocking, listening, learning, forwarding and disabled). So discarding is a new port state in PVST+. QUESTION NO: 30 VLAN 3 is not yet configured on your switch. What happens if you set the switchport access vlan 3 command in interface configuration mode? A. The command is rejected. B. The port turns amber. C. The command is accepted and the respective VLAN is added to vlan.dat. D. The command is accepted and you must configure the VLAN manually. Answer: C Explanation: The “switchport access vlan 3” will put that interface as belonging to VLAN 3 while also updated the VLAN database automatically to include VLAN 3. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 28
  • 29. QUESTION NO: 31 Cisco 200-120 Exam What value is primarily used to determine which port becomes the root port on each nonroot switch in a spanning-tree topology? A. path cost B. lowest port MAC address C. VTP revision number D. highest port priority number E. port priority number and MAC address Answer: A Explanation: The path cost to the root bridge is the most important value to determine which port will become the root port on each non-root switch. In particular, the port with lowest cost to the root bridge will become root port (on non-root switch). QUESTION NO: 32 In a switched environment, what does the IEEE 802.1Q standard describe? A. the operation of VTP B. a method of VLAN trunking C. an approach to wireless LAN communication D. the process for root bridge selection E. VLAN pruning Answer: B Explanation: A broadcast domain must sometimes exist on more than one switch in the network. To accomplish this, one switch must send frames to another switch and indicate which VLAN a particular frame belongs to. On Cisco switches, a trunk link is created to accomplish this VLAN identification. ISL and IEEE 802.1Q are different methods of putting a VLAN identifier in a Layer 2 frame. The IEEE 802.1Q protocol interconnects VLANs between multiple switches, routers, and servers. With 802.1Q, a network administrator can define a VLAN topology to span multiple physical devices. Cisco switches support IEEE 802.1Q for FastEthernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. An 802.1Q "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 29
  • 30. trunk link provides VLAN identification by adding a 4-byte tag to an Ethernet Frame as it leaves a trunk port. QUESTION NO: 33 Refer to the exhibit. Switch-1 needs to send data to a host with a MAC address of 00b0.d056.efa4. What will Switch-1 do with this data? A. Switch-1 will drop the data because it does not have an entry for that MAC address. B. Switch-1 will flood the data out all of its ports except the port from which the data originated. C. Switch-1 will send an ARP request out all its ports except the port from which the data originated. D. Switch-1 will forward the data to its default gateway. Answer: B Explanation: This question tests the operating principles of the Layer 2 switch. Check the MAC address table of Switch1 and find that the MAC address of the host does not exist in the table. Switch1 will flood the data out all of its ports except the port from which the data originated to determine which port the host is located in. Switches work as follows: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 30
  • 31. Cisco 200-120 Exam In output there is no MAC address of give host so switch floods to all ports except the source port. QUESTION NO: 34 What is the function of the command switchport trunk native vlan 999 on a Cisco Catalyst switch? A. It creates a VLAN 999 interface. B. It designates VLAN 999 for untagged traffic. C. It blocks VLAN 999 traffic from passing on the trunk. D. It designates VLAN 999 as the default for all unknown tagged traffic. Answer: B Explanation: Configuring the Native VLAN for Untagged Traffic A trunk port configured with 802.1Q tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic. By default, the switch forwards untagged traffic in the native VLAN configured for the port. The native VLAN is VLAN 1 by default. QUESTION NO: 35 Which two protocols are used by bridges and/or switches to prevent loops in a layer 2 network? (Choose two.) A. 802.1d B. VTP C. 802.1q D. STP E. SAP Answer: A,D Explanation: This question is to examine the STP protocol. STP (802.1d) is used to prevent Layer 2 loops. 802.1q is a Frame Relay protocol which belongs to VLAN. SAP is a concept of the OSI model. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 31
  • 32. QUESTION NO: 36 Which switch would STP choose to become the root bridge in the selection process? A. 32768: 11-22-33-44-55-66 B. 32768: 22-33-44-55-66-77 C. 32769: 11-22-33-44-55-65 D. 32769: 22-33-44-55-66-78 Answer: A Explanation: The root bridge of the spanning tree is the bridge with the smallest (lowest) bridge ID. Each bridge has a configurable priority number and a MAC Address; the bridge ID contains both numbers combined together - Bridge priority + MAC (32768.0200.0000.1111). The Bridge priority default is 32768 and can only be configured in multiples of 4096(Spanning tree uses the 12 bits extended system ID). To compare two bridge IDs, the priority is compared first, as if looking at a real number anything less than 32768...will become the target of being the root. If two bridges have equal priority then the MAC addresses are compared; for example, if switches A (MAC=0200.0000.1111) and B (MAC=0200.0000.2222) both have a priority of 32768 then switch A will be selected as the root bridge. In this case, 32768: 11-22-33-44-55-66 would be the bridge because it has a lower priority and MAC address. QUESTION NO: 37 A switch is configured with all ports assigned to VLAN 2 with full duplex FastEthernet to segment existing departmental traffic. What is the effect of adding switch ports to a new VLAN on the switch? A. More collision domains will be created. B. IP address utilization will be more efficient. C. More bandwidth will be required than was needed previously. D. An additional broadcast domain will be created. Answer: D Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 32
  • 33. Cisco 200-120 Exam Each VLAN creates its own broadcast domain. Since this is a full duplex switch, each port is a separate collision domain. QUESTION NO: 38 What are three benefits of implementing VLANs? (Choose three.) A. A higher level of network security can be reached by separating sensitive data traffic from other network traffic. B. A more efficient use of bandwidth can be achieved allowing many physical groups to use the same network infrastructure. C. A more efficient use of bandwidth can be achieved allowing many logical networks to use the same network infrastructure. D. Broadcast storms can be mitigated by increasing the number of broadcast domains, thus reducing their size. E. Broadcast storms can be mitigated by decreasing the number of broadcast domains, thus increasing their size. F. VLANs make it easier for IT staff to configure new logical groups, because the VLANs all belong to the same broadcast domain. G. Port-based VLANs increase switch-port use efficiency, thanks to 802.1Q trunks. Answer: A,C,D Explanation: Benefits of VLANs VLAN is a network structure which allows users to communicate while in different locations by sharing one multicast domain and a single broadcast. They provide numerous networking benefits and have become popular in the market. For instance, it helps reduce administrative costs when users are geographically dispersed. 1. Inexpensive The popularity of VLANs is due to the fact that changes, adds, and moves can be attained simply by making necessary configurations on the VLAN port. Time-consuming, re-addressing, and host reconfigurations is now a thing of the past, because network configuration can be made at ease when need arises. 2. Better management A VLAN typically solve the scalability issues that exist in a large network by breaking the main domain into several VLAN groups or smaller broadcast configurations, thereby encourage better control of multicast traffic as well as broadcast domains. 3. Improves network security High-security can be positioned in different VLAN groups to ensure that non-members cannot receive their broadcasts. On the other hand, a router is added and workgroups relocated into "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 33
  • 34. Cisco 200-120 Exam centralized locations. 4. Enhances performance A more efficient use of bandwidth can be achieved allowing many logical networks to use the same network infrastructure. 5. Segment multiple networks VLANs are typically used to achieve multiple purposes. They are popularly used to reduce broadcast traffic. Each VLAN creates a separate, smaller broadcast domain. 6. Better administration VLANs facilitate grouping of multiple geographical stations. When VLAN users move to another physical location, the network does not have to be configured. QUESTION NO: 39 Which IEEE standard protocol is initiated as a result of successful DTP completion in a switch over Fast Ethernet? A. 802.3ad B. 802.1w C. 802.1D D. 802.1Q Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) is a Cisco proprietary protocol for negotiating trunking on a link between two devices and for negotiating the type of trunking encapsulation (802.1Q) to be used. QUESTION NO: 40 Which of the following are benefits of VLANs? (Choose three.) A. They increase the size of collision domains. B. They allow logical grouping of users by function. C. They can enhance network security. D. They increase the size of broadcast domains while decreasing the number of collision domains. E. They increase the number of broadcast domains while decreasing the size of the broadcast domains. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 34
  • 35. F. They simplify switch administration. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B,C,E Explanation: Explanation When using VLAN the number and size of collision domains remain the same -> VLANs allow to group users by function, not by location or geography -> . VLANs help minimize the incorrect configuration of VLANs so it enhances the security of the network -> . VLAN increases the size of broadcast domains but does not decrease the number of collision domains -> VLANs increase the number of broadcast domains while decreasing the size of the broadcast domains which increase the utilization of the links. It is also a big advantage of VLAN -> . VLANs are useful but they are more complex and need more administration -> QUESTION NO: 41 Refer to the exhibit. A technician has installed SwitchB and needs to configure it for remote access from the management workstation connected to SwitchA. Which set of commands is required to accomplish this task? A. SwitchB(config)# interface FastEthernet 0/1 SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 35
  • 36. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. SwitchB(config)# interface vlan 1 SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config-if)# ip default-gateway 192.168.8.254 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown C. SwitchB(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.8.254 SwitchB(config)# interface vlan 1 SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown D. SwitchB(config)# ip default-network 192.168.8.254 SwitchB(config)# interface vlan 1 SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown E. SwitchB(config)# ip route 192.168.8.254 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config)# interface FastEthernet 0/1 SwitchB(config-if)# ip address 192.168.8.252 255.255.255.0 SwitchB(config-if)# no shutdown Answer: C Explanation: Explanation To remote access to SwitchB, it must have a management IP address on a VLAN on that switch. Traditionally, we often use VLAN 1 as the management VLAN (but in fact it is not secure). In the exhibit, we can recognize that the Management Workstation is in a different subnet from the SwitchB. For intersubnetwork communication to occur, you must configure at least one default gateway. This default gateway is used to forward traffic originating from the switch only, not to forward traffic sent by devices connected to the switch. QUESTION NO: 42 Which two states are the port states when RSTP has converged? (Choose two.) A. discarding B. listening C. learning D. forwarding E. disabled Answer: A,D Explanation: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk389/tk621/technologies_white_paper09186a0080094cfa.shtml #states "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 36
  • 37. QUESTION NO: 43 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which two commands can be used to verify a trunk link configuration status on a given Cisco switch interface? (Choose two.) A. show interface trunk B. show interface interface C. show ip interface brief D. show interface vlan E. show interface switchport Answer: A,E Explanation: Example output from these two commands: SW3#show interface trunk Port Mode Encapsulation Status Native vlanFa0/19 auto n-802.1q trunking 1Fa0/20 auto n-802.1q trunking 1Fa0/21 auto n-802.1q trunking 1Fa0/22 auto n-802.1q trunking 1 Port Vlans allowed on trunkFa0/19 1-4094Fa0/20 1-4094Fa0/21 1-4094Fa0/22 1-4094 SW1#show interface fast 0/2 switchportName: Fa0/2Switchport: EnabledAdministrative Mode: dynamic desirableOperational Mode: downAdministrative Trunking Encapsulation: dot1qNegotiation of TrunkinG. OnAccess Mode VLAN: 1 (default)Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)Voice VLAN: none QUESTION NO: 44 Which command enables RSTP on a switch? A. spanning-tree uplinkfast B. spanning-tree mode rapid-pvst C. spanning-tree backbonefast D. spanning-tree mode mst Answer: B Explanation: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is an enhancement of the original STP 802.1D protocol. The RSTP 802.1w protocol is an IEEE open implementation. Cisco has its own proprietary "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 37
  • 38. Cisco 200-120 Exam implementation of RSTP, that includes the benefits of its Per-VLAN spanning tree protocols, called Rapid-PVST+. To activate the Rapid-PVST+ protocol: switch(config)#spanning-tree mode rapid-pvst QUESTION NO: 45 Refer to the exhibit. All switch ports are assigned to the correct VLANs, but none of the hosts connected to SwitchA can communicate with hosts in the same VLAN connected to SwitchB. Based on the output shown, what is the most likely problem? A. The access link needs to be configured in multiple VLANs. B. The link between the switches is configured in the wrong VLAN. C. The link between the switches needs to be configured as a trunk. D. VTP is not configured to carry VLAN information between the switches. E. Switch IP addresses must be configured in order for traffic to be forwarded between the switches. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 38
  • 39. Answer: C Explanation: In order to pass traffic from VLANs on different switches, the connections between the switches must be configured as trunk ports. QUESTION NO: 46 Refer to the exhibit. Which WAN protocol is being used? A. ATM B. HDLC C. Frame Relay D. PPP Answer: C Explanation: This question is to examine the show int command. According to the information provided in the exhibit, we can know that the data link protocol used in this network is the Frame Relay protocol. “LMI enq sent…” QUESTION NO: 47 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 39
  • 40. Cisco 200-120 Exam Given the output shown from this Cisco Catalyst 2950, what is the reason that interface FastEthernet 0/10 is not the root port for VLAN 2? A. This switch has more than one interface connected to the root network segment in VLAN 2. B. This switch is running RSTP while the elected designated switch is running 802.1d Spanning Tree. C. This switch interface has a higher path cost to the root bridge than another in the topology. D. This switch has a lower bridge ID for VLAN 2 than the elected designated switch. Answer: C Explanation: Since the port is in the blocked status, we must assume that there is a shorter path to the root bridge elsewhere. QUESTION NO: 48 Why will a switch never learn a broadcast address? A. Broadcasts only use network layer addressing. B. A broadcast frame is never forwarded by a switch. C. A broadcast address will never be the source address of a frame. D. Broadcast addresses use an incorrect format for the switching table. E. Broadcast frames are never sent to switches. Answer: C Explanation: Switches dynamically learn MAC addresses based on the source MAC addresses that it sees, and since a broadcast is never the source, it will never learn the broadcast address. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 40
  • 41. QUESTION NO: 49 Refer to the exhibit. Why has this switch not been elected the root bridge for VLAN1? A. It has more than one interface that is connected to the root network segment. B. It is running RSTP while the elected root bridge is running 802.1d spanning tree. C. It has a higher MAC address than the elected root bridge. D. It has a higher bridge ID than the elected root bridge. Answer: D Explanation: The root bridge is determined by the lowest bridge ID, and this switch has a bridge ID priority of 32768, which is higher than the roots priority of 20481. QUESTION NO: 50 Which two link protocols are used to carry multiple VLANs over a single link? (Choose two.) A. VTP B. 802.1q C. IGP D. ISL E. 802.3u Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 41
  • 42. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B,D Explanation: Cisco switches can use two different encapsulation types for trunks, the industry standard 802.1q or the Cisco proprietary ISL. Generally, most network engineers prefer to use 802.1q since it is standards based and will interoperate with other vendors. QUESTION NO: 51 Assuming the default switch configuration, which VLAN range can be added, modified, and removed on a Cisco switch? A. 1 through 1001 B. 2 through 1001 C. 1 through 1002 D. 2 through 1005 Answer: B Explanation: Explanation VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on Cisco switch. It always exists and can not be added, modified or removed. VLANs 1002-1005 are default VLANs for FDDI & Token Ring and they can’t be deleted or used for Ethernet. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 42
  • 43. QUESTION NO: 52 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which statement about VLAN operation on Cisco Catalyst switches is true? A. When a packet is received from an 802.1Q trunk, the VLAN ID can be determined from the source MAC address and the MAC address table. B. Unknown unicast frames are retransmitted only to the ports that belong to the same VLAN. C. Broadcast and multicast frames are retransmitted to ports that are configured on different VLAN. D. Ports between switches should be configured in access mode so that VLANs can span across the ports. Answer: B Explanation: Each VLAN resides in its own broadcast domain, so incoming frames with unknown destinations are only transmitted to ports that reside in the same VLAN as the incoming frame. QUESTION NO: 53 Refer to the topology shown in the exhibit. Which ports will be STP designated ports if all the links are operating at the same bandwidth? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 43
  • 44. (Choose three.) A. Switch A - Fa0/0 B. Switch A - Fa0/1 C. Switch B - Fa0/0 D. Switch B - Fa0/1 E. Switch C - Fa0/0 F. Switch C - Fa0/1 Answer: B,C,D Explanation: This question is to check the spanning tree election problem. 1. First, select the root bridge, which can be accomplished by comparing the bridge ID, the smallest will be selected. Bridge-id= bridge priority + MAC address. The three switches in the figure all have the default priority, so we should compare the MAC address, it is easy to find that SwitchB is the root bridge. 2. Select the root port on the non-root bridge, which can be completed through comparing root path cost. The smallest will be selected as the root port. 3. Next, select the Designated Port. First, compare the path cost, if the costs happen to be the same, then compare the BID, still the smallest will be selected. Each link has a DP. Based on the exhibit above, we can find DP on each link. The DP on the link between SwitchA and SwitchC is SwitchA'Fa0/1, because it has the smallest MAC address. QUESTION NO: 54 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 44
  • 45. Cisco 200-120 Exam How should the FastEthernet0/1 ports on the 2950 model switches that are shown in the exhibit be configured to allow connectivity between all devices? A. The ports only need to be connected by a crossover cable. B. SwitchX(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 SwitchX(config-if)# switchport mode trunk C. SwitchX(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 SwitchX(config-if)# switchport mode access SwitchX(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1 D. SwitchX(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 SwitchX(config-if)# switchport mode trunk SwitchX(config-if)# switchport trunk vlan 1 SwitchX(config-if)# switchport trunk vlan 10 SwitchX(config-if)# switchport trunk vlan 20 Answer: B Explanation: IN order for multiple VLANs to cross switches, the connection between the switches must be a trunk. The “switchport mode trunk” command is all that is needed, the individual VLANs should not be listed over that trunk interface. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 45
  • 46. QUESTION NO: 55 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam A frame on VLAN 1 on switch S1 is sent to switch S2 where the frame is received on VLAN 2. What causes this behavior? A. trunk mode mismatches B. allowing only VLAN 2 on the destination C. native VLAN mismatches D. VLANs that do not correspond to a unique IP subnet Answer: C Explanation: Untagged frames are encapsulated with the native VLAN. In this case, the native VLANs are different so although S1 will tag it as VLAN 1 it will be received by S2. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 46
  • 47. QUESTION NO: 56 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which three statements about RSTP are true? (Choose three.) A. RSTP significantly reduces topology reconverging time after a link failure. B. RSTP expands the STP port roles by adding the alternate and backup roles. C. RSTP port states are blocking, discarding, learning, or forwarding. D. RSTP provides a faster transition to the forwarding state on point-to-point links than STP does. E. RSTP also uses the STP proposal-agreement sequence. F. RSTP uses the same timer-based process as STP on point-to-point links. Answer: A,B,D Explanation: One big disadvantage of STP is the low convergence which is very important in switched network. To overcome this problem, in 2001, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which significantly reduces the convergence time after a topology change occurs in the network. While STP can take 30 to 50 seconds to transit from a blocking state to a forwarding state, RSTP is typically able to respond less than 10 seconds of a physical link failure. RSTP works by adding an alternative port and a backup port compared to STP. These ports are allowed to immediately enter the forwarding state rather than passively wait for the network to converge. RSTP bridge port roles: * Root port – A forwarding port that is the closest to the root bridge in terms of path cost* Designated port – A forwarding port for every LAN segment* Alternate port – A best alternate path to the root bridge. This path is different than using the root port. The alternative port moves to the forwarding state if there is a failure on the designated port for the segment.* Backup port – A backup/redundant path to a segment where another bridge port already connects. The backup port applies only when a single switch has two links to the same segment (collision domain). To have two links to the same collision domain, the switch must be attached to a hub.* Disabled port – Not strictly part of STP, a network administrator can manually disable a port QUESTION NO: 57 At which layer of the OSI model is RSTP used to prevent loops? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 47
  • 48. A. physical B. data link C. network D. transport Answer: B Explanation: Explanation RSTP and STP operate on switches and are based on the exchange of Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) between switches. One of the most important fields in BPDUs is the Bridge Priority in which the MAC address is used to elect the Root Bridge -> RSTP operates at Layer 2 – Data Link layer -> . QUESTION NO: 58 What does a Layer 2 switch use to decide where to forward a received frame? A. source MAC address B. source IP address C. source switch port D. destination IP address E. destination port address F. destination MAC address Answer: F Explanation: When a frame is received, the switch looks at the destination hardware address and finds the interface if it is in its MAC address table. If the address is unknown, the frame is broadcast on all interfaces except the one it was received on. QUESTION NO: 59 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 48
  • 49. Which statement is true? A. The Fa0/11 role confirms that SwitchA is the root bridge for VLAN 20. B. VLAN 20 is running the Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol. C. The MAC address of the root bridge is 0017.596d.1580. D. SwitchA is not the root bridge, because not all of the interface roles are designated. Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Only non-root bridge can have root port. Fa0/11 is the root port so we can confirm this switch is not the root bridge -> From the output we learn this switch is running Rapid STP, not PVST -> 0017.596d.1580 is the MAC address of this switch, not of the root bridge. The MAC address of the root bridge is 0017.596d.2a00 -> All of the interface roles of the root bridge are designated. SwitchA has one Root port and 1 Alternative port so it is not the root bridge. QUESTION NO: 60 Which two benefits are provided by creating VLANs? (Choose two.) A. added security B. dedicated bandwidth C. provides segmentation Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 49
  • 50. Cisco 200-120 Exam D. allows switches to route traffic between subinterfaces E. contains collisions Answer: A,C Explanation: A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented on an organizational basis, by functions, project teams, or applications rather than on a physical or geographical basis. Security: VLANs also improve security by isolating groups. High-security users can be grouped into a VLAN, possible on the same physical segment, and no users outside that VLAN can communicate with them LAN Segmentation VLANs allow logical network topologies to overlay the physical switched infrastructure such that any arbitrary collection of LAN ports can be combined into an autonomous user group or community of interest. The technology logically segments the network into separate Layer 2 broadcast domains whereby packets are switched between ports designated to be within the same VLAN. By containing traffic originating on a particular LAN only to other LANs in the same VLAN, switched virtual networks avoid wasting bandwidth. QUESTION NO: 61 Which command can be used from a PC to verify the connectivity between hosts that connect through a switch in the same LAN? A. ping address B. tracert address C. traceroute address D. arp address Answer: A Explanation: ICMP pings are used to verify connectivity between two IP hosts. Traceroute is used to verify the router hop path traffic will take but in this case since the hosts are in the same LAN there will be no router hops involved. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 50
  • 51. QUESTION NO: 62 Based on the network shown in the graphic Which option contains both the potential networking problem and the protocol or setting that should be used to prevent the problem? A. routing loops, hold down timers B. switching loops, split horizon C. routing loops, split horizon D. switching loops, VTP E. routing loops, STP F. switching loops, STP Answer: F Explanation: The Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) prevents loops from being formed when switches or bridges are interconnected via multiple paths. Spanning-Tree Protocol implements the 802.1D IEEE algorithm by exchanging BPDU messages with other switches to detect loops, and then removes the loop by shutting down selected bridge interfaces. This algorithm guarantees that there is one and only one active path between two network devices. QUESTION NO: 63 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 51
  • 52. Cisco 200-120 Exam Which two statements are true about interVLAN routing in the topology that is shown in the exhibit? (Choose two.) A. Host E and host F use the same IP gateway address. B. Router1 and Switch2 should be connected via a crossover cable. C. Router1 will not play a role in communications between host A and host D. D. The FastEthernet 0/0 interface on Router1 must be configured with subinterfaces. E. Router1 needs more LAN interfaces to accommodate the VLANs that are shown in the exhibit. F. The FastEthernet 0/0 interface on Router1 and the FastEthernet 0/1 interface on Switch2 trunk ports must be configured using the same encapsulation type. Answer: D,F Explanation: In order for multiple VLANs to connect to a single physical interface on a Cisco router, subinterfaces must be used, one for each VLAN. This is known as the router on a stick configuration. Also, for any trunk to be formed, both ends of the trunk must agree on the encapsulation type, so each one must be configured for 802.1q or ISL. QUESTION NO: 64 Which two of these are characteristics of the 802.1Q protocol? (Choose two.) A. It is used exclusively for tagging VLAN frames and does not address network reconvergence following switched network topology changes. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 52
  • 53. B. It modifies the 802.3 frame header, and thus requires that the FCS be recomputed. C. It is a Layer 2 messaging protocol which maintains VLAN configurations across networks. D. It includes an 8-bit field which specifies the priority of a frame. E. It is a trunking protocol capable of carrying untagged frames. Answer: B,E Explanation: 802.1Q protocol, or Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks protocol, mainly stipulates the realization of the VLAN. 802.1Q is a standardized relay method that inserts 4 bytes field into the original Ethernet frame and re-calculate the FCS. 802.1Q frame relay supports two types of frame: marked and non-marked. Non-marked frame carries no VLAN identification information. QUESTION NO: 65 Refer to the exhibit. Each of these four switches has been configured with a hostname, as well as being configured to run RSTP. No other configuration changes have been made. Which three of these show the correct RSTP port roles for the indicated switches and interfaces? (Choose three.) A. SwitchA, Fa0/2, designated B. SwitchA, Fa0/1, root Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 53
  • 54. C. SwitchB, Gi0/2, root D. SwitchB, Gi0/1, designated E. SwitchC, Fa0/2, root F. SwitchD, Gi0/2, root Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: A,B,F Explanation: Explanation The question says “no other configuration changes have been made” so we can understand these switches have the same bridge priority. Switch C has lowest MAC address so it will become root bridge and 2 of its ports (Fa0/1 & Fa0/2) will be designated ports. Because SwitchC is the root bridge so the 2 ports nearest SwitchC on SwitchA (Fa0/1) and SwitchD (Gi0/2) will be root ports.. Now we come to the most difficult part of this question: SwitchB must have a root port so which port will it choose? To answer this question we need to know about STP cost and port cost. In general, “cost” is calculated based on bandwidth of the link. The higher the bandwidth on a link, the lower the value of its cost. Below are the cost values you should memorize: SwitchB will choose the interface with lower cost to the root bridge as the root port so we must calculate the cost on interface Gi0/1 & Gi0/2 of SwitchB to the root bridge. This can be calculated from the “cost to the root bridge” of each switch because a switch always advertises its cost to the root bridge in its BPDU. The receiving switch will add its local port cost value to the cost in the BPDU. One more thing to notice is that a root bridge always advertises the cost to the root bridge (itself) with an initial value of 0. Now let’s have a look at the topology again "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 54
  • 55. Cisco 200-120 Exam SwitchC advertises its cost to the root bridge with a value of 0. Switch D adds 4 (the cost value of 1Gbps link) and advertises this value (4) to SwitchB. SwitchB adds another 4 and learns that it can reach SwitchC via Gi0/1 port with a total cost of 8. The same process happens for SwitchA and SwitchB learns that it can reach SwitchC via Gi0/2 with a total cost of 23 -> Switch B chooses Gi0/1 as its root port -> Now our last task is to identify the port roles of the ports between SwitchA & SwitchB. It is rather easy as the MAC address of SwitchA is lower than that of SwitchB so Fa0/2 of SwitchA will be designated port while Gi0/2 of SwitchB will be alternative port. Below summaries all the port roles of these switches: "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 55
  • 56. + DP: Designated Port (forwarding state) + RP: Root Port (forwarding state) + AP: Alternative Port (blocking state) QUESTION NO: 66 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 56
  • 57. Cisco 200-120 Exam The network administrator normally establishes a Telnet session with the switch from host A. However, host A is unavailable. The administrator's attempt to telnet to the switch from host B fails, but pings to the other two hosts are successful. What is the issue? A. Host B and the switch need to be in the same subnet. B. The switch interface connected to the router is down. C. Host B needs to be assigned an IP address in VLAN 1. D. The switch needs an appropriate default gateway assigned. E. The switch interfaces need the appropriate IP addresses assigned. Answer: D Explanation: Ping was successful form host B to other hosts because of intervlan routing configured on router. But to manage switch via telnet the VLAN32 on the switch needs to be configured interface vlan32 along with ip address and its appropriate default-gateway address. Since VLAN1 interface is already configure on switch Host A was able to telnet switch. QUESTION NO: 67 Refer to the exhibit. Which switch provides the spanning-tree designated port role for the network segment that services the printers? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 57
  • 58. A. Switch1 B. Switch2 C. Switch3 D. Switch4 Answer: C Explanation: Printers are connected by hubs. Decide the switch that provides the spanning-tree designated port role between Switch3 and Switch4. They have the same priority 32768. Compare their MAC addresses. Switch3 with a smaller MAC address will provide a designated port for printers. QUESTION NO: 68 What is one benefit of PVST+? A. PVST+ supports Layer 3 load balancing without loops. B. PVST+ reduces the CPU cycles for all the switches in the network. C. PVST+ allows the root switch location to be optimized per VLAN. D. PVST+ automatically selects the root bridge location, to provide optimized bandwidth usage. Answer: C Explanation: The PVST+ provides Layer 2 load-balancing for the VLAN on which it runs. You can create different logical topologies by using the VLANs on your network to ensure that all of your links are used but that no one link is oversubscribed. Each instance of PVST+ on a VLAN has a single root switch. This root switch propagates the spanning-tree information associated with that VLAN to all other switches in the network. Because each switch has the same information about the network, this process ensures that the network topology is maintained and optimized per VLAN. Reference: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst3750x_3560x/software/release/12.2_55_se /configuration/guide/swstp.html QUESTION NO: 69 Which are valid modes for a switch port used as a VLAN trunk? (Choose three.) A. transparent B. auto Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 58
  • 59. C. on D. desirable E. blocking F. forwarding Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B,C,D Explanation: These are the different types of trunk modes: QUESTION NO: 70 Refer to Exhibit: How many broadcast domains are shown in the graphic assuming only the default VLAN is configured on the switches? A. one B. two C. six D. twelve Answer: A Explanation: Explanation Only router can break up broadcast domains but in this exhibit no router is used so there is only 1 broadcast domain. For your information, there are 7 collision domains in this exhibit (6 collision domains between hubs & switches + 1 collision between the two switches). "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 59
  • 60. QUESTION NO: 71 Which three of these statements regarding 802.1Q trunking are correct? (Choose three.) A. 802.1Q native VLAN frames are untagged by default. B. 802.1Q trunking ports can also be secure ports. C. 802.1Q trunks can use 10 Mb/s Ethernet interfaces. D. 802.1Q trunks require full-duplex, point-to-point connectivity. E. 802.1Q trunks should have native VLANs that are the same at both ends. Answer: A,C,E Explanation: By default, 802.1Q trunk defined Native VLAN in order to forward unmarked frame. Switches can forward Layer 2 frame from Native VLAN on unmarked trunks port. Receiver switches will transmit all unmarked packets to Native VLAN. Native VLAN is the default VLAN configuration of port. Note for the 802.1Q trunk ports between two devices, the same Native VLAN configuration is required on both sides of the link. If the Native VLAN in 802.1Q trunk ports on same trunk link is properly configured, it could lead to layer 2 loops. The 802.1Q trunk link transmits VLAN information through Ethernet. QUESTION NO: 72 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 60
  • 61. Cisco 200-120 Exam The output that is shown is generated at a switch. Which three statements are true? (Choose three.) A. All ports will be in a state of discarding, learning, or forwarding. B. Thirty VLANs have been configured on this switch. C. The bridge priority is lower than the default value for spanning tree. D. All interfaces that are shown are on shared media. E. All designated ports are in a forwarding state. F. This switch must be the root bridge for all VLANs on this switch. Answer: A,C,E Explanation: Explanation From the output, we see that all ports are in designated role (forwarding state). The command “show spanning-tree vlan 30 only shows us information about VLAN 30. We don’t know how many VLAN exists in this switch -> The bridge priority of this switch is 24606 which is lower than the default value bridge priority 32768. All three interfaces on this switch have the connection type “p2p”, which means Point-to-point environment – not a shared media. The only thing we can specify is this switch is the root bridge for VLAN 3o but we can not guarantee it is also the root bridge for other VLANs. QUESTION NO: 73 Refer to the exhibit. At the end of an RSTP election process, which access layer switch port will assume the discarding "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 61
  • 62. role? A. Switch3, port fa0/1 B. Switch3, port fa0/12 C. Switch4, port fa0/11 D. Switch4, port fa0/2 E. Switch3, port Gi0/1 F. Switch3, port Gi0/2 Answer: C Explanation: Explanation In this question, we only care about the Access Layer switches (Switch3 & 4). Switch 3 has a lower bridge ID than Switch 4 (because the MAC of Switch3 is smaller than that of Switch4) so both ports of Switch3 will be in forwarding state. The alternative port will surely belong to Switch4. Switch4 will need to block one of its ports to avoid a bridging loop between the two switches. But how does Switch4 select its blocked port? Well, the answer is based on the BPDUs it receives from Switch3. A BPDU is superior to another if it has: 1. A lower Root Bridge ID 2. A lower path cost to the Root 3. A lower Sending Bridge ID 4. A lower Sending Port ID These four parameters are examined in order. In this specific case, all the BPDUs sent by Switch3 have the same Root Bridge ID, the same path cost to the Root and the same Sending Bridge ID. The only parameter left to select the best one is the Sending Port ID (Port ID = port priority + port index). In this case the port priorities are equal because they use the default value, so Switch4 will compare port index values, which are unique to each port on the switch, and because Fa0/12 is inferior to Fa0/1, Switch4 will select the port connected with Fa0/1 (of Switch3) as its root port and block the other port -> Port fa0/11 of Switch4 will be blocked (discarding role). QUESTION NO: 74 Which term describes a spanning-tree network that has all switch ports in either the blocking or fowarding state? A. converged B. redundant C. provisioned D. spanned Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 62
  • 63. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: A Explanation: Explanation Spanning Tree Protocol convergence (Layer 2 convergence) happens when bridges and switches have transitioned to either the forwarding or blocking state. When layer 2 is converged, root bridge is elected and all port roles (Root, Designated and Non-Designated) in all switches are selected. QUESTION NO: 75 What are the possible trunking modes for a switch port? (Choose three.) A. transparent B. auto C. on D. desirable E. client F. forwarding Answer: B,C,D Explanation: These are the different types of trunk modes: QUESTION NO: 76 Which two of these statements regarding RSTP are correct? (Choose two.) A. RSTP cannot operate with PVST+. B. RSTP defines new port roles. C. RSTP defines no new port states. D. RSTP is a proprietary implementation of IEEE 802.1D STP. E. RSTP is compatible with the original IEEE 802.1D STP. Answer: B,E Explanation: When network topology changes, rapid spanning tree protocol (IEEE802.1W, referred to as RSTP) will speed up significantly the speed to re-calculate spanning tree. RSTP not only defines the role of other ports: alternative port and backup port, but also defines status of 3 ports: discarding "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 63
  • 64. Cisco 200-120 Exam status, learning status, forwarding status. RSTP is 802.1D standard evolution, not revolution. It retains most of the parameters, and makes no changes. QUESTION NO: 77 Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are true of the interfaces on Switch1? (Choose two.) A. Multiple devices are connected directly to FastEthernet0/1. B. A hub is connected directly to FastEthernet0/5. C. FastEthernet0/1 is connected to a host with multiple network interface cards. D. FastEthernet0/5 has statically assigned MAC addresses. E. FastEthernet0/1 is configured as a trunk link. F. Interface FastEthernet0/2 has been disabled. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 64
  • 65. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B,E Explanation: Carefully observe the information given after command show. Fa0/1 is connected to Switch2, seven MAC addresses correspond to Fa0/1, and these MAC are in different VLAN. From this we know that Fa0/1 is the trunk interface. From the information given by show cdp neighbors we find that there is no Fa0/5 in CDP neighbor. However, F0/5 corresponds to two MAC addresses in the same VLAN. Thus we know that Fa0/5 is connected to a Hub. Based on the output shown, there are multiple MAC addresses from different VLANs attached to the FastEthernet 0/1 interface. Only trunks are able to pass information from devices in multiple VLANs. QUESTION NO: 78 Three switches are connected to one another via trunk ports. Assuming the default switch configuration, which switch is elected as the root bridge for the spanning-tree instance of VLAN 1? A. the switch with the highest MAC address B. the switch with the lowest MAC address C. the switch with the highest IP address D. the switch with the lowest IP address Answer: B Explanation: Each switch in your network will have a Bridge ID Priority value, more commonly referred to as a BID. This BID is a combination of a default priority value and the switch's MAC address, with the priority value listed first. The lowest BID will win the election process. For example, if a Cisco switch has the default priority value of 32,768 and a MAC address of 11- 22-33-44-55-66, the BID would be 32768:11-22-33-44-55-66. Therefore, if the switch priority is left at the default, the MAC address is the deciding factor in the root bridge election. QUESTION NO: 79 What are three advantages of VLANs? (Choose three.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 65
  • 66. A. VLANs establish broadcast domains in switched networks. B. VLANs utilize packet filtering to enhance network security. C. VLANs provide a method of conserving IP addresses in large networks. D. VLANs provide a low-latency internetworking alternative to routed networks. E. VLANs allow access to network services based on department, not physical location. F. VLANs can greatly simplify adding, moving, or changing hosts on the network. Answer: A,E,F Explanation: VLAN technology is often used in practice, because it can better control layer2 broadcast to improve network security. This makes network more flexible and scalable. Packet filtering is a function of firewall instead of VLAN. QUESTION NO: 80 Cisco Catalyst switches CAT1 and CAT2 have a connection between them using ports FA0/13. An 802.1Q trunk is configured between the two switches. On CAT1, VLAN 10 is chosen as native, but on CAT2 the native VLAN is not specified. What will happen in this scenario? A. 802.1Q giants frames could saturate the link. B. VLAN 10 on CAT1 and VLAN 1 on CAT2 will send untagged frames. C. A native VLAN mismatch error message will appear. D. VLAN 10 on CAT1 and VLAN 1 on CAT2 will send tagged frames. Answer: C Explanation: Explanation A “native VLAN mismatch” error will appear by CDP if there is a native VLAN mismatch on an 802.1Q link. “VLAN mismatch” can cause traffic from one vlan to leak into another vlan. QUESTION NO: 81 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 66
  • 67. A network technician is asked to design a small network with redundancy. The exhibit represents this design, with all hosts configured in the same VLAN. What conclusions can be made about this design? A. This design will function as intended. B. Spanning-tree will need to be used. C. The router will not accept the addressing scheme. D. The connection between switches should be a trunk. E. The router interfaces must be encapsulated with the 802.1Q protocol. Answer: C Explanation: Explanation Each interface on a router must be in a different network. If two interfaces are in the same network, the router will not accept it and show error when the administrator assigns it. QUESTION NO: 82 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 67
  • 68. A technician is troubleshooting host connectivity issues on the switches. The hosts in VLANs 10 and 15 on Sw11 are unable to communicate with hosts in the same VLANs on Sw12. Hosts in the Admin VLAN are able to communicate. The port-to-VLAN assignments are identical on the two switches. What could be the problem? A. The Fa0/1 port is not operational on one of the switches. B. The link connecting the switches has not been configured as a trunk. C. At least one port needs to be configured in VLAN 1 for VLANs 10 and 15 to be able to communicate. D. Port FastEthernet 0/1 needs to be configured as an access link on both switches. E. A router is required for hosts on SW11 in VLANs 10 and 15 to communicate with hosts in the same VLAN on Sw12. Answer: B Explanation: In order for hosts in the same VLAN to communicate with each other over multiple switches, those switches need to be configured as trunks on their connected interfaces so that they can pass traffic from multiple VLANs. QUESTION NO: 83 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 68
  • 69. Cisco 200-120 Exam Given this output for SwitchC, what should the network administrator's next action be? A. Check the trunk encapsulation mode for SwitchC's fa0/1 port. B. Check the duplex mode for SwitchC's fa0/1 port. C. Check the duplex mode for SwitchA's fa0/2 port. D. Check the trunk encapsulation mode for SwitchA's fa0/2 port. Answer: C Explanation: Here we can see that this port is configured for full duplex, so the next step would be to check the duplex setting of the port on the other switch. A mismatched trunk encapsulation would not result in input errors and CRC errors. Topic 3, IP addressing (IPv4 / IPv6) QUESTION NO: 84 You have been asked to come up with a subnet mask that will allow all three web servers to be on "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 69
  • 70. the same network while providing the maximum number of subnets. Which network address and subnet mask meet this requirement? A. 192.168.252.0 255.255.255.252 B. 192.168.252.8 255.255.255.248 C. 192.168.252.8 255.255.255.252 D. 192.168.252.16 255.255.255.240 E. 192.168.252.16 255.255.255.252 Answer: B Explanation: A subnet mask of 255.255.255.248 will allow for up to 6 hosts to reside in this network. A subnet mask of 255.255.255.252 will allow for only 2 usable IP addresses, since we can not use the network or broadcast address. QUESTION NO: 85 Given an IP address 172.16.28.252 with a subnet mask of 255.255.240.0, what is the correct network address? A. 172.16.16.0 B. 172.16.0.0 C. 172.16.24.0 D. 172.16.28.0 Answer: A Explanation: For this example, the network range is 172.16.16.1 - 172.16.31.254, the network address is 172.16.16.0 and the broadcast IP address is 172.16.31.255. QUESTION NO: 86 Which IPv6 address is the equivalent of the IPv4 interface loopback address 127.0.0.1? A. ::1 B. :: C. 2000::/3 D. 0::/10 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 70
  • 71. Answer: A Explanation: In IPv6 the loopback address is written as, 1 This is a 128bit number, with the first 127 bits being '0' and the 128th bit being '1'. It's just a single address, so could also be written as ::1/128. QUESTION NO: 87 You are working in a data center environment and are assigned the address range 10.188.31.0/23. You are asked to develop an IP addressing plan to allow the maximum number of subnets with as many as 30 hosts each. Which IP address range meets these requirements? A. 10.188.31.0/26 B. 10.188.31.0/25 C. 10.188.31.0/28 D. 10.188.31.0/27 E. 10.188.31.0/29 Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Each subnet has 30 hosts < 32 = 25 so we need a subnet mask which has at least 5 bit 0s -> /27. Also the question requires the maximum number of subnets (which minimum the number of hosts-per- subnet) so /27 is the best choice. QUESTION NO: 88 What are three features of the IPv6 protocol? (Choose three.) A. optional IPsec B. autoconfiguration C. no broadcasts D. complicated header E. plug-and-play F. checksums Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 71
  • 72. Answer: B,C,E Explanation: An important feature of IPv6 is that it allows plug and play option to the network devices by allowing them to configure themselves independently. It is possible to plug a node into an IPv6 network without requiring any human intervention. This feature was critical to allow network connectivity to an increasing number of mobile devices. This is accomplished by autoconfiguration. IPv6 does not implement traditional IP broadcast, i.e. the transmission of a packet to all hosts on the attached link using a special broadcast address, and therefore does not define broadcast addresses. In IPv6, the same result can be achieved by sending a packet to the link-local all nodes multicast group at address ff02::1, which is analogous to IPv4 multicast to address 224.0.0.1. QUESTION NO: 89 Which command enables IPv6 forwarding on a Cisco router? A. ipv6 local B. ipv6 host C. ipv6 unicast-routing D. ipv6 neighbor Answer: C Explanation: to enable IPv6 routing on the Cisco router use the following command: ipv6 unicast-routing If this command is not recognized, your version of IOS does not support IPv6. QUESTION NO: 90 What is known as "one-to-nearest" addressing in IPv6? A. global unicast B. anycast C. multicast D. unspecified address Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 72
  • 73. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B Explanation: IPv6 Anycast addresses are used for one-to-nearest communication, meaning an Anycast address is used by a device to send data to one specific recipient (interface) that is the closest out of a group of recipients (interfaces). QUESTION NO: 91 What is the first 24 bits in a MAC address called? A. NIC B. BIA C. OUI D. VAI Answer: C Explanation: An Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) is a 24-bit number that uniquely identifies a vendor, manufacturer, or other organization globally or worldwide. They are used as the first 24 nits of the MAC address to uniquely identify a particular piece of equipment. QUESTION NO: 92 Refer to the exhibit. Which subnet mask will place all hosts on Network B in the same subnet with the least amount of wasted addresses? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 73
  • 74. A. 255.255.255.0 B. 255.255.254.0 C. 255.255.252.0 D. 255.255.248.0 Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B Explanation: Explanation 310 hosts < 512 = 29 -> We need a subnet mask of 9 bits 0 -> 1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1110.0000 0000 -> 255.255.254.0 QUESTION NO: 93 Refer to the exhibit. What is the most appropriate summarization for these routes? A. 10.0.0.0 /21 B. 10.0.0.0 /22 C. 10.0.0.0 /23 D. 10.0.0.0 /24 Answer: B Explanation: The 10.0.0.0/22 subnet mask will include the 10.0.0.0, 10.0.1.0, 10.0.2.0, and 10.0.3.0 networks, and only those four networks. QUESTION NO: 94 Which two are features of IPv6? (Choose two.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 74
  • 75. A. anycast B. broadcast C. multicast D. podcast E. allcast Answer: A,C Explanation: IPv6 addresses are classified by the primary addressing and routing methodologies common in networkinG. unicast addressing, anycast addressing, and multicast addressing. QUESTION NO: 95 Which two of these statements are true of IPv6 address representation? (Choose two.) A. There are four types of IPv6 addresses: unicast, multicast, anycast, and broadcast. B. A single interface may be assigned multiple IPv6 addresses of any type. C. Every IPv6 interface contains at least one loopback address. D. The first 64 bits represent the dynamically created interface ID. E. Leading zeros in an IPv6 16 bit hexadecimal field are mandatory. Answer: B,C Explanation: Leading zeros in IPv6 are optional do that 05C7 equals 5C7 and 0000 equals 0 -> D is not correct. QUESTION NO: 96 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 75
  • 76. A new subnet with 60 hosts has been added to the network. Which subnet address should this network use to provide enough usable addresses while wasting the fewest addresses? A. 192.168.1.56/26 B. 192.168.1.56/27 C. 192.168.1.64/26 D. 192.168.1.64/27 Answer: C Explanation: A subnet with 60 host is 2*2*2*2*2*2 = 64 -2 == 62 6 bits needed for hosts part. Therefore subnet bits are 2 bits (8-6) in fourth octet. 8bits+ 8bits+ 8bits + 2bits = /26 /26 bits subnet is 24bits + 11000000 = 24bits + 192 256 – 192 = 64 0 -63 64 – 127 QUESTION NO: 97 Refer to the exhibit. All of the routers in the network are configured with the ip subnet-zero command. Which network addresses should be used for Link A and Network A? (Choose two.) A. Network A - 172.16.3.48/26 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 76
  • 77. B. Network A - 172.16.3.128/25 C. Network A - 172.16.3.192/26 D. Link A - 172.16.3.0/30 E. Link A - 172.16.3.40/30 F. Link A - 172.16.3.112/30 Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B,D Explanation: Only a /30 is needed for the point to point link and sine the use of the ip subnet-zero was used, 172.16.3.0/30 is valid. Also, a /25 is required for 120 hosts and again 172.16.3.128/25 is the best, valid option. QUESTION NO: 98 The network administrator needs to address seven LANs. RIP version 1 is the only routing protocol in use on the network and subnet 0 is not being used. What is the maximum number of usable IP addresses that can be supported on each LAN if the organization is using one class C address block? A. 8 B. 6 C. 30 D. 32 E. 14 F. 16 Answer: C Explanation: Since there is one class C network that means 256 total IP addresses. Since we need 7 LAN blocks and we can not use the first one (subnet 0) we take 256/8=32 hosts. However, since we need to reserve the network and broadcast addresses for each of these subnets, only 30 total IP addresses are usable. QUESTION NO: 99 What will happen if a private IP address is assigned to a public interface connected to an ISP? A. Addresses in a private range will be not be routed on the Internet backbone. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 77
  • 78. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. Only the ISP router will have the capability to access the public network. C. The NAT process will be used to translate this address to a valid IP address. D. A conflict of IP addresses happens, because other public routers can use the same range. Answer: A Explanation: Private RFC 1918 IP addresses are meant to be used by organizations locally within their own network only, and can not be used globally for Internet use. QUESTION NO: 100 Which two benefits are provided by using a hierarchical addressing network addressing scheme? (Choose two.) A. reduces routing table entries B. auto-negotiation of media rates C. efficient utilization of MAC addresses D. dedicated communications between devices E. ease of management and troubleshooting Answer: A,E Explanation: Here are some of the benefits of hierarchical addressing: Reference: http://www.ciscopress.com/articles/article.asp?p=174107 QUESTION NO: 101 What is the alternative notation for the IPv6 address B514:82C3:0000:0000:0029:EC7A:0000:EC72? A. B514 : 82C3 : 0029 : EC7A : EC72 B. B514 : 82C3 :: 0029 : EC7A : EC72 C. B514 : 82C3 : 0029 :: EC7A : 0000 : EC72 D. B514 : 82C3 :: 0029 : EC7A : 0 : EC72 Answer: D Explanation: There are two ways that an IPv6 address can be additionally compressed: compressing leading "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 78
  • 79. Cisco 200-120 Exam zeros and substituting a group of consecutive zeros with a single double colon (::). Both of these can be used in any number of combinations to notate the same address. It is important to note that the double colon (::) can only be used once within a single IPv6 address notation. So, the extra 0’s can only be compressed once. QUESTION NO: 102 Refer to the diagram. All hosts have connectivity with one another. Which statements describe the addressing scheme that is in use in the network? (Choose three.) A. The subnet mask in use is 255.255.255.192. B. The subnet mask in use is 255.255.255.128. C. The IP address 172.16.1.25 can be assigned to hosts in VLAN1 D. The IP address 172.16.1.205 can be assigned to hosts in VLAN1 E. The LAN interface of the router is configured with one IP address. F. The LAN interface of the router is configured with multiple IP addresses. Answer: B,C,F Explanation: The subnet mask in use is 255.255.255.128: This is subnet mask will support up to 126 hosts, which is needed. The IP address 172.16.1.25 can be assigned to hosts in VLAN1: The usable host range in this subnet is 172.16.1.1-172.16.1.126 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 79
  • 80. Cisco 200-120 Exam The LAN interface of the router is configured with multiple IP addresses: The router will need 2 subinterfaces for the single physical interface, one with an IP address that belongs in each VLAN. QUESTION NO: 103 Which two statements describe characteristics of IPv6 unicast addressing? (Choose two.) A. Global addresses start with 2000::/3. B. Link-local addresses start with FE00:/12. C. Link-local addresses start with FF00::/10. D. There is only one loopback address and it is ::1. E. If a global address is assigned to an interface, then that is the only allowable address for the interface. Answer: A,D Explanation: Below is the list of common kinds of IPv6 addresses: QUESTION NO: 104 The network administrator has been asked to give reasons for moving from IPv4 to IPv6. What are two valid reasons for adopting IPv6 over IPv4? (Choose two.) A. no broadcast B. change of source address in the IPv6 header C. change of destination address in the IPv6 header D. Telnet access does not require a password E. autoconfiguration F. NAT "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 80
  • 81. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: A,E Explanation: IPv6 does not use broadcasts, and autoconfiguration is a feature of IPV6 that allows for hosts to automatically obtain an IPv6 address. QUESTION NO: 105 An administrator must assign static IP addresses to the servers in a network. For network 192.168.20.24/29, the router is assigned the first usable host address while the sales server is given the last usable host address. Which of the following should be entered into the IP properties box for the sales server? A. IP address: 192.168.20.14 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.248 Default Gateway: 192.168.20.9 B. IP address: 192.168.20.254 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 192.168.20.1 C. IP address: 192.168.20.30 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.248 Default Gateway: 192.168.20.25 D. IP address: 192.168.20.30 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 Default Gateway: 192.168.20.17 E. IP address: 192.168.20.30 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 Default Gateway: 192.168.20.25 Answer: C Explanation: For the 192.168.20.24/29 network, the usable hosts are 192.168.24.25 (router) – 192.168.24.30 (used for the sales server). QUESTION NO: 106 Which subnet mask would be appropriate for a network address range to be subnetted for up to eight LANs, with each LAN containing 5 to 26 hosts? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 81
  • 82. A. 0.0.0.240 B. 255.255.255.252 C. 255.255.255.0 D. 255.255.255.224 E. 255.255.255.240 Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: D Explanation: For a class C network, a mask of 255.255.255.224 will allow for up to 8 networks with 32 IP addresses each (30 usable). QUESTION NO: 107 How many bits are contained in each field of an IPv6 address? A. 24 B. 4 C. 8 D. 16 Answer: D Explanation: An IPv6 address is represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, each group representing 16 bits (two octets). The groups are separated by colons (:). An example of an IPv6 address is 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. QUESTION NO: 108 What are three approaches that are used when migrating from an IPv4 addressing scheme to an IPv6 scheme. (Choose three.) A. enable dual-stack routing B. configure IPv6 directly C. configure IPv4 tunnels between IPv6 islands D. use proxying and translation to translate IPv6 packets into IPv4 packets E. statically map IPv4 addresses to IPv6 addresses F. use DHCPv6 to map IPv4 addresses to IPv6 addresses "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 82
  • 83. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: A,C,D Explanation: Several methods are used terms of migration including tunneling, translators, and dual stack. Tunnels are used to carry one protocol inside another, while translators simply translate IPv6 packets into IPv4 packets. Dual stack uses a combination of both native IPv4 and IPv6. With dual stack, devices are able to run IPv4 and IPv6 together and if IPv6 communication is possible that is the preferred protocol. Hosts can simultaneously reach IPv4 and IPv6 content. QUESTION NO: 109 Refer to the exhibit. In this VLSM addressing scheme, what summary address would be sent from router A? A. 172.16.0.0 /16 B. 172.16.0.0 /20 C. 172.16.0.0 /24 D. 172.32.0.0 /16 E. 172.32.0.0 /17 F. 172.64.0.0 /16 Answer: A Explanation: Explanation Router A receives 3 subnets: 172.16.64.0/18, 172.16.32.0/24 and 172.16.128.0/18. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 83
  • 84. All these 3 subnets have the same form of 172.16.x.x so our summarized subnet must be also in that form -> Only A, B or . The smallest subnet mask of these 3 subnets is /18 so our summarized subnet must also have its subnet mask equal or smaller than /18. -> Only answer A has these 2 conditions -> . QUESTION NO: 110 How is an EUI-64 format interface ID created from a 48-bit MAC address? A. by appending 0xFF to the MAC address B. by prefixing the MAC address with 0xFFEE C. by prefixing the MAC address with 0xFF and appending 0xFF to it D. by inserting 0xFFFE between the upper three bytes and the lower three bytes of the MAC address E. by prefixing the MAC address with 0xF and inserting 0xF after each of its first three bytes Answer: D Explanation: The modified EUI-64 format interface identifier is derived from the 48-bit link-layer (MAC) address by inserting the hexadecimal number FFFE between the upper three bytes (OUI field) and the lower three bytes (serial number) of the link layer address. QUESTION NO: 111 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 84
  • 85. What is the most efficient summarization that R1 can use to advertise its networks to R2? A. 172.1.0.0/22 B. 172.1.0.0/21 C. 172.1.4.0/22 D. 172.1.4.0/24 172.1.5.0/24 172.1.6.0/24 172.1.7.0/24 E. 172.1.4.0/25 172.1.4.128/25 172.1.5.0/24 172.1.6.0/24 172.1.7.0/24 Answer: C Explanation: The 172.1.4.0/22 subnet encompasses all routes from the IP range 172.1.4.0 – 172.1.7.255. QUESTION NO: 112 Which option is a valid IPv6 address? A. 2001:0000:130F::099a::12a B. 2002:7654:A1AD:61:81AF:CCC1 C. FEC0:ABCD:WXYZ:0067::2A4 D. 2004:1:25A4:886F::1 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 85
  • 86. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: D Explanation: An IPv6 address is represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, each group representing 16 bits (two octets). The groups are separated by colons (:). An example of an IPv6 address is 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. The leading 0’s in a group can be collapsed using ::, but this can only be done once in an IP address. QUESTION NO: 113 Which three are characteristics of an IPv6 anycast address? (Choose three.) A. one-to-many communication model B. one-to-nearest communication model C. any-to-many communication model D. a unique IPv6 address for each device in the group E. the same address for multiple devices in the group F. delivery of packets to the group interface that is closest to the sending device Answer: B,E,F Explanation: A new address type made specifically for IPv6 is called the Anycast Address. These IPv6 addresses are global addresses, these addresses can be assigned to more than one interface unlike an IPv6 unicast address. Anycast is designed to send a packet to the nearest interface that is apart of that anycast group. The sender creates a packet and forwards the packet to the anycast address as the destination address which goes to the nearest router. The nearest router or interface is found by using the metric of a routing protocol currently running on the network. However in a LAN setting the nearest interface is found depending on the order the neighbors were learned. The anycast packet in a LAN setting forwards the packet to the neighbor it learned about first. QUESTION NO: 114 A national retail chain needs to design an IP addressing scheme to support a nationwide network. The company needs a minimum of 300 sub-networks and a maximum of 50 host addresses per subnet. Working with only one Class B address, which of the following subnet masks will support an appropriate addressing scheme? (Choose two.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 86
  • 87. A. 255.255.255.0 B. 255.255.255.128 C. 255.255.252.0 D. 255.255.255.224 E. 255.255.255.192 F. 255.255.248.0 Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: B,E Explanation: Subnetting is used to break the network into smaller more efficient subnets to prevent excessive rates of Ethernet packet collision in a large network. Such subnets can be arranged hierarchically, with the organization's network address space (see also Autonomous System) partitioned into a tree-like structure. Routers are used to manage traffic and constitute borders between subnets. A routing prefix is the sequence of leading bits of an IP address that precede the portion of the address used as host identifier. In IPv4 networks, the routing prefix is often expressed as a "subnet mask", which is a bit mask covering the number of bits used in the prefix. An IPv4 subnet mask is frequently expressed in quad-dotted decimal representation, e.g., 255.255.255.0 is the subnet mask for the 192.168.1.0 network with a 24-bit routing prefix (192.168.1.0/24). QUESTION NO: 115 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator is adding two new hosts to SwitchA. Which three values could be used for the configuration of these hosts? (Choose three.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 87
  • 88. A. host A IP address: 192.168.1.79 B. host A IP address: 192.168.1.64 C. host A default gateway: 192.168.1.78 D. host B IP address: 192.168.1.128 E. host B default gateway: 192.168.1.129 F. host B IP address: 192.168.1.190 Answer: A,C,F Explanation: QUESTION NO: 116 Which IPv6 address is the all-router multicast group? A. FF02::1 B. FF02::2 C. FF02::3 D. FF02::4 Answer: B Explanation: Well-known IPv6 multicast addresses: Address Description ff02::1 All nodes on the local network segment ff02::2 All routers on the local network segment QUESTION NO: 117 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 88
  • 89. Cisco 200-120 Exam Which address range efficiently summarizes the routing table of the addresses for router Main? A. 172.16.0.0./21 B. 172.16.0.0./20 C. 172.16.0.0./16 D. 172.16.0.0/18 Answer: B Explanation: The 172.16.0.0./20 network is the best option as it includes all networks from 172.16.0.0 – 172.16.16.0 and does it more efficiently than the /16 and /18 subnets. The /21 subnet will not include all the other subnets in this one single summarized address. QUESTION NO: 118 Which IPv6 address is valid? A. 2001:0db8:0000:130F:0000:0000:08GC:140B B. 2001:0db8:0:130H::87C:140B C. 2031::130F::9C0:876A:130B D. 2031:0:130F::9C0:876A:130B Answer: D Explanation: An IPv6 address is represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, each group representing 16 bits (two octets). The groups are separated by colons (:). An example of an IPv6 address is 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. The leading 0’s in a group can be collapsed using ::, but this can only be done once in an IP address. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 89
  • 90. QUESTION NO: 119 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which command can you use to manually assign a static IPv6 address to a router interface? A. ipv6 autoconfig 2001:db8:2222:7272::72/64 B. ipv6 address 2001:db8:2222:7272::72/64 C. ipv6 address PREFIX_1 ::1/64 D. ipv6 autoconfig Answer: B Explanation: To assign an IPv6 address to an interface, use the “ipv6 address” command and specify the IP address you wish to use. QUESTION NO: 120 Which of these represents an IPv6 link-local address? A. FE80::380e:611a:e14f:3d69 B. FE81::280f:512b:e14f:3d69 C. FEFE:0345:5f1b::e14d:3d69 D. FE08::280e:611:a:f14f:3d69 Answer: A Explanation: In the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6), the address block fe80::/10 has been reserved for link-local unicast addressing. The actual link local addresses are assigned with the prefix fe80::/64. They may be assigned by automatic (stateless) or stateful (e.g. manual) mechanisms. QUESTION NO: 121 The network administrator is asked to configure 113 point-to-point links. Which IP addressing scheme defines the address range and subnet mask that meet the requirement and waste the fewest subnet and host addresses? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 90
  • 91. A. 10.10.0.0/16 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 B. 10.10.0.0/18 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 C. 10.10.1.0/24 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 D. 10.10.0.0/23 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 E. 10.10.1.0/25 subnetted with mask 255.255.255.252 Answer: D Explanation: Explanation We need 113 point-to-point links which equal to 113 sub-networks < 128 so we need to borrow 7 bits (because 2^7 = 128). The network used for point-to-point connection should be /30. So our initial network should be 30 – 7 = 23. So 10.10.0.0/23 is the correct answer. You can understand it more clearly when writing it in binary form: /23 = 1111 1111.1111 1110.0000 0000 /30 = 1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1100 (borrow 7 bits) Topic 4, IP Routing Technologies QUESTION NO: 122 DRAG DROP Answer: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 91
  • 92. Explanation: QUESTION NO: 123 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 92
  • 93. Answer: Explanation: QUESTION NO: 124 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 93
  • 94. Answer: Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 94
  • 95. Cisco 200-120 Exam Explanation If we have many entries matching for next hop ip address then the router will choose the one with most specific path to send the packet. This is called the “longest match” rule, the route with the most bits in the mask set to “1 will be chosen to route packet. QUESTION NO: 125 Which parameter or parameters are used to calculate OSPF cost in Cisco routers? A. Bandwidth B. Bandwidth and Delay C. Bandwidth, Delay, and MTU D. Bandwidth, MTU, Reliability, Delay, and Load Answer: A Explanation: The well-known formula to calculate OSPF cost is Cost = 108 / Bandwidth "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 95
  • 96. QUESTION NO: 126 Cisco 200-120 Exam Why do large OSPF networks use a hierarchical design? (Choose three.) A. to decrease latency by increasing bandwidth B. to reduce routing overhead C. to speed up convergence D. to confine network instability to single areas of the network E. to reduce the complexity of router configuration F. to lower costs by replacing routers with distribution layer switches Answer: B,C,D Explanation: OSPF implements a two-tier hierarchical routing model that uses a core or backbone tier known as area zero (0). Attached to that backbone via area border routers (ABRs) are a number of secondary tier areas. The hierarchical approach is used to achieve the following: • Rapid convergence because of link and/or switch failures • Deterministic traffic recovery • Scalable and manageable routing hierarchy, reduced routing overhead. QUESTION NO: 127 Which command encrypts all plaintext passwords? A. Router# service password-encryption B. Router(config)# password-encryption C. Router(config)# service password-encryption D. Router# password-encryption Answer: C Explanation: Command The “service password-encryption” command allows you to encrypt all passwords on your router so they can not be easily guessed from your running-config. This command uses a very weak encryption because the router has to be very quickly decode the passwords for its operation. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 96
  • 97. Cisco 200-120 Exam It is meant to prevent someone from looking over your shoulder and seeing the password, that is all. This is configured in global configuration mode. QUESTION NO: 128 Which two are advantages of static routing when compared to dynamic routing? (Choose two.) A. Configuration complexity decreases as network size increases. B. Security increases because only the network administrator may change the routing table. C. Route summarization is computed automatically by the router. D. Routing tables adapt automatically to topology changes. E. An efficient algorithm is used to build routing tables, using automatic updates. F. Routing updates are automatically sent to neighbors. G. Routing traffic load is reduced when used in stub network links. Answer: B,G Explanation: Since static routing is a manual process, it can be argued that it is more secure (and more prone to human errors) since the network administrator will need to make changes to the routing table directly. Also, in stub networks where there is only a single uplink connection, the load is reduced as stub routers just need a single static default route, instead of many routes that all have the same next hop IP address. QUESTION NO: 129 A network administrator needs to allow only one Telnet connection to a router. For anyone viewing the configuration and issuing the show run command, the password for Telnet access should be encrypted. Which set of commands will accomplish this task? A. service password-encryption access-list 1 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 line vty 0 4 login password cisco access-class 1 B. enable password secret line vty 0 login "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 97
  • 98. password cisco C. service password-encryption line vty 1 login password cisco D. service password-encryption line vty 0 4 login password cisco Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: C Explanation: Only one VTY connection is allowed which is exactly what's requested. Incorrect answer: command. line vty0 4 would enable all 5 vty connections. QUESTION NO: 130 Refer to the exhibit. The speed of all serial links is E1 and the speed of all Ethernet links is 100 Mb/s. A static route will be established on the Manchester router to direct traffic toward the Internet over the most direct path available. What configuration on the Manchester router will establish a route toward the Internet for traffic that originates from workstations on the Manchester LAN? A. ip route 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.100.2 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 98
  • 99. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 128.107.1.1 C. ip route 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.252 128.107.1.1 D. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.100.1 E. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.100.2 F. ip route 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 172.16.100.2 Answer: E Explanation: We use default routing to send packets with a remote destination network not in the routing table to the next-hop router. You should generally only use default routing on stub networks—those with only one exit path out of the network. According to exhibit, all traffic towards Internet that originates from workstations should forward to Router R1. Syntax for default route is: ip route <Remote_Network> <Netmask> <Next_Hop_Address>. QUESTION NO: 131 Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator must establish a route by which London workstations can forward traffic to the Manchester workstations. What is the simplest way to accomplish this? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 99
  • 100. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. Configure a dynamic routing protocol on London to advertise all routes to Manchester. B. Configure a dynamic routing protocol on London to advertise summarized routes to Manchester. C. Configure a dynamic routing protocol on Manchester to advertise a default route to the London router. D. Configure a static default route on London with a next hop of 10.1.1.1. E. Configure a static route on London to direct all traffic destined for 172.16.0.0/22 to 10.1.1.2. F. Configure Manchester to advertise a static default route to London. Answer: E Explanation: This static route will allow for communication to the Manchester workstations and it is better to use this more specific route than a default route as traffic destined to the Internet will then not go out the London Internet connection. QUESTION NO: 132 Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator requires easy configuration options and minimal routing protocol traffic. What two options provide adequate routing table information for traffic that passes between the two routers and satisfy the requests of the network administrator? (Choose two.) A. a dynamic routing protocol on InternetRouter to advertise all routes to CentralRouter. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 100
  • 101. B. a dynamic routing protocol on InternetRouter to advertise summarized routes to CentralRouter. C. a static route on InternetRouter to direct traffic that is destined for 172.16.0.0/16 to CentralRouter. D. a dynamic routing protocol on CentralRouter to advertise all routes to InternetRouter. E. a dynamic routing protocol on CentralRouter to advertise summarized routes to InternetRouter. F. a static, default route on CentralRouter that directs traffic to InternetRouter. Answer: C,F Explanation: The use of static routes will provide the necessary information for connectivity while producing no routing traffic overhead. QUESTION NO: 133 What is the effect of using the service password-encryption command? A. Only the enable password will be encrypted. B. Only the enable secret password will be encrypted. C. Only passwords configured after the command has been entered will be encrypted. D. It will encrypt the secret password and remove the enable secret password from the configuration. E. It will encrypt all current and future passwords. Answer: E Explanation: Enable vty, console, AUX passwords are configured on the Cisco device. Use the show run command to show most passwords in clear text. If the service password-encryption is used, all the passwords are encrypted. As a result, the security of device access is improved. QUESTION NO: 134 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 101
  • 102. Cisco 200-120 Exam What is the effect of the configuration that is shown? A. It configures SSH globally for all logins. B. It tells the router or switch to try to establish an SSh connection first and if that fails to use Telnet. C. It configures the virtual terminal lines with the password 030752180500. D. It configures a Cisco network device to use the SSH protocol on incoming communications via the virtual terminal ports. E. It allows seven failed login attempts before the VTY lines are temporarily shutdown. Answer: D Explanation: Secure Shell (SSH) is a protocol which provides a secure remote access connection to network devices. Communication between the client and server is encrypted in both SSH version 1 and SSH version 2. If you want to prevent non-SSH connections, add the “transport input ssh” command under the lines to limit the router to SSH connections only. Straight (non-SSH) Telnets are refused. Reference: www.cisco.com/warp/public/707/ssh.shtml QUESTION NO: 135 Refer to the exhibit. What is the reason that the interface status is "administratively down, line protocol down"? A. There is no encapsulation type configured. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 102
  • 103. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. There is a mismatch in encapsulation types. C. The interface is not receiving any keepalives. D. The interface has been configured with the shutdown command. E. The interface needs to be configured as a DTE device. F. The wrong type of cable is connected to the interface. Answer: D Explanation: Interfaces can be enabled or disabled with shutdown/no shutdown command. If you interface is down, it will display administratively down status. You can bring up an interface having administratively down interface using no shutdown command. QUESTION NO: 136 Refer to the exhibit. When running OSPF, what would cause router A not to form an adjacency with router B? A. The loopback addresses are on different subnets. B. The values of the dead timers on the routers are different. C. Route summarization is enabled on both routers. D. The process identifier on router A is different than the process identifier on router B. Answer: B Explanation: Explanation To form an adjacency (become neighbor), router A & B must have the same Hello interval, Dead interval and AREA numbers "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 103
  • 104. QUESTION NO: 137 A router has learned three possible routes that could be used to reach a destination network. One route is from EIGRP and has a composite metric of 20514560. Another route is from OSPF with a metric of 782. The last is from RIPv2 and has a metric of 4. Which route or routes will the router install in the routing table? A. the OSPF route B. the EIGRP route C. the RIPv2 route D. all three routes E. the OSPF and RIPv2 routes Answer: B Explanation: Explanation When one route is advertised by more than one routing protocol, the router will choose to use the routing protocol which has lowest Administrative Distance. The Administrative Distances of popular routing protocols are listed below: QUESTION NO: 138 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 104
  • 105. Cisco 200-120 Exam The company uses EIGRP as the routing protocol. What path will packets take from a host on the 192.168.10.192/26 network to a host on the LAN attached to router R1? A. The path of the packets will be R3 to R2 to R1. B. The path of the packets will be R3 to R1 to R2. C. The path of the packets will be both R3 to R2 to R1 AND R3 to R1. D. The path of the packets will be R3 to R1. Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Host on the LAN attached to router R1 belongs to 192.168.10.64/26 subnet. From the output of the routing table of R3 we learn this network can be reach via 192.168.10.9, which is an IP address in 192.168.10.8/30 network (the network between R1 & R3) -> packets destined for 192.168.10.64 will be routed from R3 -> R1 -> LAN on R1. QUESTION NO: 139 A network administrator is troubleshooting an EIGRP problem on a router and needs to confirm the IP addresses of the devices with which the router has established adjacency. The retransmit interval and the queue counts for the adjacent routers also need to be checked. What command "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 105
  • 106. will display the required information? A. Router# show ip eigrp adjacency B. Router# show ip eigrp topology C. Router# show ip eigrp interfaces D. Router# show ip eigrp neighbors Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Below is an example of the show ip eigrp neighbors command. The retransmit interval (Smooth Round Trip Timer – SRTT) and the queue counts (Q count, which shows the number of queued EIGRP packets) for the adjacent routers are listed: QUESTION NO: 140 Refer to the graphic. R1 is unable to establish an OSPF neighbor relationship with R3. What are possible reasons for this problem? (Choose two.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 106
  • 107. A. All of the routers need to be configured for backbone Area 1. B. R1 and R2 are the DR and BDR, so OSPF will not establish neighbor adjacency with R3. C. A static route has been configured from R1 to R3 and prevents the neighbor adjacency from being established. D. The hello and dead interval timers are not set to the same values on R1 and R3. E. EIGRP is also configured on these routers with a lower administrative distance. F. R1 and R3 are configured in different areas. Answer: D,F Explanation: This question is to examine the conditions for OSPF to create neighborhood. So as to make the two routers become neighbors, each router must be matched with the following items: 1. The area ID and its types; 2. Hello and failure time interval timer; 3. OSPF Password (Optional); QUESTION NO: 141 What is a global command? A. a command that is set once and affects the entire router B. a command that is implemented in all foreign and domestic IOS versions C. a command that is universal in application and supports all protocols D. a command that is available in every release of IOS, regardless of the version or deployment status E. a command that can be entered in any configuration mode Answer: A Explanation: When you enter global configuration mode and enter a command, it is applied to the running configuration file that is currently running in ram. The configuration of a global command affects the entire router. An example of a global command is one used for the hostname of the router. QUESTION NO: 142 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 107
  • 108. Cisco 200-120 Exam When running EIGRP, what is required for RouterA to exchange routing updates with RouterC? A. AS numbers must be changed to match on all the routers B. Loopback interfaces must be configured so a DR is elected C. The no auto-summary command is needed on Router A and Router C D. Router B needs to have two network statements, one for each connected network Answer: A Explanation: This question is to examine the understanding of the interaction between EIGRP routers. The following information must be matched so as to create neighborhood. EIGRP routers to establish, must match the following information: 1. AS Number; 2. K value. QUESTION NO: 143 A Cisco router is booting and has just completed the POST process. It is now ready to find and load an IOS image. What function does the router perform next? A. It checks the configuration register. B. It attempts to boot from a TFTP server. C. It loads the first image file in flash memory. D. It inspects the configuration file in NVRAM for boot instructions. Answer: A Explanation: Default (normal) Boot SequencePower on Router - Router does POST - Bootstrap starts IOS load - Check configuration registerto see what mode the router should boot up in (usually 0x2102 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 108
  • 109. Cisco 200-120 Exam to read startup-config in NVRAM / or 0x2142 to start in "setup-mode") - check the startup-config file in NVRAM for boot-system commands - load IOS from Flash. QUESTION NO: 144 Refer to the exhibit. What is the meaning of the output MTU 1500 bytes? A. The maximum number of bytes that can traverse this interface per second is 1500. B. The minimum segment size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. C. The maximum segment size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. D. The minimum packet size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. E. The maximum packet size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. F. The maximum frame size that can traverse this interface is 1500 bytes. Answer: E Explanation: Explanation The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the maximum Layer 3 packet (in bytes) that the layer can pass onwards. QUESTION NO: 145 On a corporate network, hosts on the same VLAN can communicate with each other, but they are unable to communicate with hosts on different VLANs. What is needed to allow communication between the VLANs? A. a router with subinterfaces configured on the physical interface that is connected to the switch B. a router with an IP address on the physical interface connected to the switch "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 109
  • 110. Cisco 200-120 Exam C. a switch with an access link that is configured between the switches D. a switch with a trunk link that is configured between the switches Answer: A Explanation: Different VLANs can't communicate with each other , they can communicate with the help of Layer3 router. Hence , it is needed to connect a router to a switch , then make the sub-interface on the router to connect to the switch, establishing Trunking links to achieve communications of devices which belong to different VLANs. When using VLANs in networks that have multiple interconnected switches, you need to use VLAN trunking between the switches. With VLAN trunking, the switches tag each frame sent between switches so that the receiving switch knows to what VLAN the frame belongs. End user devices connect to switch ports that provide simple connectivity to a single VLAN each. The attached devices are unaware of any VLAN structure. By default, only hosts that are members of the same VLAN can communicate. To change this and allow inter-VLAN communication, you need a router or a layer 3 switch. Here is the example of configuring the router for inter-vlan communication RouterA(config)#int f0/0.1 RouterA(config-subif)#encapsulation ? dot1Q IEEE 802.1Q Virtual LAN RouterA(config-subif)#encapsulation dot1Q or isl VLAN ID RouterA(config-subif)# ip address x.x.x.x y.y.y.y QUESTION NO: 146 Which command displays CPU utilization? A. show protocols B. show process C. show system D. show version Answer: B Explanation: Explanation The “show process” (in fact, the full command is “show processes”) command gives us lots of information about each process but in fact it is not easy to read. Below shows the output of this command (some next pages are omitted) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 110
  • 111. Cisco 200-120 Exam A more friendly way to check the CPU utilization is the command “show processes cpu history”, in which the total CPU usage on the router over a period of time: one minute, one hour, and 72 hours are clearly shown: "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 111
  • 112. Cisco 200-120 Exam + The Y-axis of the graph is the CPU utilization.+ The X-axis of the graph is the increment within the period displayed in the graph For example, from the last graph (last 72 hours) we learn that the highest CPU utilization within 72 hours is 37% about six hours ago. QUESTION NO: 147 What two things will a router do when running a distance vector routing protocol? (Choose two.) A. Send periodic updates regardless of topology changes. B. Send entire routing table to all routers in the routing domain. C. Use the shortest-path algorithm to the determine best path. D. Update the routing table based on updates from their neighbors. E. Maintain the topology of the entire network in its database. Answer: A,D Explanation: Distance means how far and Vector means in which direction. Distance Vector routing protocols pass periodic copies of routing table to neighbor routers and accumulate distance vectors. In distance vector routing protocols, routers discover the best path to destination from each neighbor. The routing updates proceed step by step from router to router. QUESTION NO: 148 Which command is used to display the collection of OSPF link states? A. show ip ospf link-state B. show ip ospf lsa database C. show ip ospf neighbors D. show ip ospf database Answer: D Explanation: The “show ip ospf database” command displays the link states. Here is an example: Here is the lsa database on R2. R2#show ip ospf database "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 112
  • 113. OSPF Router with ID (2.2.2.2) (Process ID 1) Router Link States (Area 0) Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Link count2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 793 0x80000003 0x004F85 210.4.4.4 10.4.4.4 776 0x80000004 0x005643 1111.111.111.111 111.111.111.111 755 0x80000005 0x0059CA 2133.133.133.133 133.133.133.133 775 0x80000005 0x00B5B1 2 Net Link States (Area 0) Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum10.1.1.1 111.111.111.111 794 0x80000001 0x001E8B10.2.2.3 133.133.133.133 812 0x80000001 0x004BA910.4.4.1 111.111.111.111 755 0x80000001 0x007F1610.4.4.3 133.133.133.133 775 0x80000001 0x00C31F QUESTION NO: 149 Refer to the exhibit. The technician wants to upload a new IOS in the router while keeping the existing IOS. What is the maximum size of an IOS file that could be loaded if the original IOS is also kept in flash? A. 3 MB B. 4 MB C. 5 MB D. 7 MB E. 8 MB Answer: B Explanation: In this example, there are a total of 8 MB, but 3.8 are being used already, so another file as large as 4MB can be loaded in addition to the original file. QUESTION NO: 150 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 113
  • 114. Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam The two exhibited devices are the only Cisco devices on the network. The serial network between the two devices has a mask of 255.255.255.252. Given the output that is shown, what three statements are true of these devices? (Choose three.) A. The Manchester serial address is 10.1.1.1. B. The Manchester serial address is 10.1.1.2. C. The London router is a Cisco 2610. D. The Manchester router is a Cisco 2610. E. The CDP information was received on port Serial0/0 of the Manchester router. F. The CDP information was sent by port Serial0/0 of the London router. Answer: A,C,E Explanation: From the output, we learn that the IP address of the neighbor router is 10.1.1.2 and the question stated that the subnet mask of the network between two router is 255.255.255.252. Therefore there are only 2 available hosts in this network (22 – 2 = 2). So we can deduce the ip address (of the serial interface) of Manchester router is 10.1.1.1 -> The platform of the neighbor router is cisco 2610, as shown in the output -> Maybe the most difficult choice of this question is the answer E or F. Please notice that “Interface” refers to the local port on the local router, in this case it is the port of Manchester router, and “Port ID (outgoing port)” refers to the port on the neighbor router. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 114
  • 115. QUESTION NO: 151 If IP routing is enabled, which two commands set the gateway of last resort to the default gateway? (Choose two.) A. ip default-gateway 0.0.0.0 B. ip route 172.16.2.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 C. ip default-network 0.0.0.0 D. ip default-route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1 E. ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.2.1 Answer: C,E Explanation: Both the “ip default-network” and “ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 (next hop)” commands can be used to set the default gateway in a Cisco router. QUESTION NO: 152 Which parameter would you tune to affect the selection of a static route as a backup, when a dynamic protocol is also being used? A. hop count B. administrative distance C. link bandwidth D. link delay E. link cost Answer: B Explanation: By default the administrative distance of a static route is 1, meaning it will be preferred over all dynamic routing protocols. If you want to have the dynamic routing protocol used and have the static route be used only as a backup, you need to increase the AD of the static route so that it is higher than the dynamic routing protocol. QUESTION NO: 153 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 115
  • 116. A network associate has configured OSPF with the command: City(config-router)# network 192.168.12.64 0.0.0.63 area 0 After completing the configuration, the associate discovers that not all the interfaces are participating in OSPF. Which three of the interfaces shown in the exhibit will participate in OSPF according to this configuration statement? (Choose three.) A. FastEthernet0 /0 B. FastEthernet0 /1 C. Serial0/0 D. Serial0/1.102 E. Serial0/1.103 F. Serial0/1.104 Answer: B,C,D Explanation: Explanation The “network 192.168.12.64 0.0.0.63 equals to network 192.168.12.64/26. This network has: + Increment: 64 (/26= 1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1111.1100 0000) + Network address: 192.168.12.64 + Broadcast address: 192.168.12.127 Therefore all interface in the range of this network will join OSPF. QUESTION NO: 154 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 116
  • 117. The Lakeside Company has the internetwork in the exhibit. The administrator would like to reduce the size of the routing table on the Central router. Which partial routing table entry in the Central router represents a route summary that represents the LANs in Phoenix but no additional subnets? A. 10.0.0.0/22 is subnetted, 1 subnets D 10.0.0.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 B. 10.0.0.0/28 is subnetted, 1 subnets D 10.2.0.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 C. 10.0.0.0/30 is subnetted, 1 subnets D 10.2.2.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 D. 10.0.0.0/22 is subnetted, 1 subnets D 10.4.0.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 E. 10.0.0.0/28 is subnetted, 1 subnets D 10.4.4.0 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 F. 10.0.0.0/30 is subnetted, 1 subnets D 10.4.4.4 [90/20514560] via 10.2.0.2, 6w0d, Serial0/1 Answer: D Explanation: The 10.4.0.0/22 route includes 10.4.0.0/24, 10.4.1.0/24, 10.4.2.0/24 and 10.4.3.0/24 only. QUESTION NO: 155 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 117
  • 118. Refer to the graphic. Cisco 200-120 Exam A static route to the 10.5.6.0/24 network is to be configured on the HFD router. Which commands will accomplish this? (Choose two.) A. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 0.0.0.255 fa0/0 B. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 0.0.0.255 10.5.4.6 C. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0 fa0/0 D. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0 10.5.4.6 E. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.4.6 0.0.0.255 10.5.6.0 F. HFD(config)# ip route 10.5.4.6 255.255.255.0 10.5.6.0 Answer: C,D Explanation: The simple syntax of static route: ip route destination-network-address subnet-mask {next-hop-IP-address | exit-interface} + destination-network-address: destination network address of the remote network + subnet mask: subnet mask of the destination network + next-hop-IP-address: the IP address of the receiving interface on the next-hop router + exit-interface: the local interface of this router where the packets will go out In the statement “ip route 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0 fa0/0: + 10.5.6.0 255.255.255.0: the destination network +fa0/0: the exit-interface QUESTION NO: 156 Before installing a new, upgraded version of the IOS, what should be checked on the router, and "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 118
  • 119. Cisco 200-120 Exam which command should be used to gather this information? (Choose two.) A. the amount of available ROM B. the amount of available flash and RAM memory C. the version of the bootstrap software present on the router D. show version E. show processes F. show running-config Answer: B,D Explanation: Explanation When upgrading new version of the IOS we need to copy the IOS to the Flash so first we have to check if the Flash has enough memory or not. Also running the new IOS may require more RAM than the older one so we should check the available RAM too. We can check both with the “show version” command. QUESTION NO: 157 Which command reveals the last method used to powercycle a router? A. show reload B. show boot C. show running-config D. show version Answer: D Explanation: Explanation The “show version” command can be used to show the last method to powercycle (reset) a router "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 119
  • 120. QUESTION NO: 158 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which command would you use on a Cisco router to verify the Layer 3 path to a host? A. tracert address B. traceroute address C. telnet address D. ssh address Answer: B Explanation: In computing, traceroute is a computer network diagnostic tool for displaying the route (path) and "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 120
  • 121. Cisco 200-120 Exam measuring transit delays of packets across an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The history of the route is recorded as the round-trip times of the packets received from each successive host (remote node) in the route (path); the sum of the mean times in each hop indicates the total time spent to establish the connection. Traceroute proceeds unless all (three) sent packets are lost more than twice, then the connection is lost and the route cannot be evaluated. Ping, on the other hand, only computes the final round-trip times from the destination point. QUESTION NO: 159 What information does a router running a link-state protocol use to build and maintain its topological database? (Choose two.) A. hello packets B. SAP messages sent by other routers C. LSAs from other routers D. beacons received on point-to-point links E. routing tables received from other link-state routers F. TTL packets from designated routers Answer: A,C Explanation: Neighbor discovery is the first step in getting a link state environment up and running. In keeping with the friendly neighbor terminology, a Hello protocol is used for this step. The protocol will define a Hello packet format and a procedure for exchanging the packets and processing the information the packets contain. After the adjacencies are established, the routers may begin sending out LSAs. As the term flooding implies, the advertisements are sent to every neighbor. In turn, each received LSA is copied and forwarded to every neighbor except the one that sent the LSA. QUESTION NO: 160 Which statements describe the routing protocol OSPF? (Choose three.) A. It supports VLSM. B. It is used to route between autonomous systems. C. It confines network instability to one area of the network. D. It increases routing overhead on the network. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 121
  • 122. Cisco 200-120 Exam E. It allows extensive control of routing updates. F. It is simpler to configure than RIP v2. Answer: A,C,E Explanation: The OSPF protocol is based on link-state technology, which is a departure from the Bellman-Ford vector based algorithms used in traditional Internet routing protocols such as RIP. OSPF has introduced new concepts such as authentication of routing updates, Variable Length Subnet Masks (VLSM), route summarization, and so forth. OSPF uses flooding to exchange link-state updates between routers. Any change in routing information is flooded to all routers in the network. Areas are introduced to put a boundary on the explosion of link-state updates. Flooding and calculation of the Dijkstra algorithm on a router is limited to changes within an area. QUESTION NO: 161 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator configures a new router and enters the copy startup-config running-config command on the router. The network administrator powers down the router and sets it up at a remote location. When the router starts, it enters the system configuration dialog as shown. What is the cause of the problem? A. The network administrator failed to save the configuration. B. The configuration register is set to 0x2100. C. The boot system flash command is missing from the configuration. D. The configuration register is set to 0x2102. E. The router is configured with the boot system startup command. Answer: A Explanation: Explanation The “System Configuration Dialog” appears only when no startup configuration file is found. The network administrator has made a mistake because the command “copy startup-config running-config” will copy the startup config (which is empty) over the running config (which is configured by "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 122
  • 123. Cisco 200-120 Exam the administrator). So everything configured was deleted. Note: We can tell the router to ignore the start-up configuration on the next reload by setting the register to 0×2142. This will make the “System Configuration Dialog” appear at the next reload. QUESTION NO: 162 What is the default administrative distance of OSPF? A. 90 B. 100 C. 110 D. 120 Answer: C Explanation: Administrative distance is the feature that routers use in order to select the best path when there are two or more different routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols. Administrative distance defines the reliability of a routing protocol. Each routing protocol is prioritized in order of most to least reliable (believable) with the help of an administrative distance value. Default Distance Value Table This table lists the administrative distance default values of the protocols that Cisco supports: Route Source Default Distance Values Connected interface 0 Static route 1 Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) summary route 5 External Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 20 Internal EIGRP 90 IGRP 100 OSPF 110 Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 123
  • 124. 115 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 120 Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) 140 On Demand Routing (ODR) 160 External EIGRP 170 Internal BGP 200 Unknown* 255 QUESTION NO: 163 Which characteristics are representative of a link-state routing protocol? (Choose three.) A. provides common view of entire topology B. exchanges routing tables with neighbors C. calculates shortest path D. utilizes event-triggered updates E. utilizes frequent periodic updates Answer: A,C,D Explanation: Explanation Each of routers running link-state routing protocol learns paths to all the destinations in its “area” so we can say although it is a bit unclear. Link-state routing protocols generate routing updates only (not the whole routing table) when a change occurs in the network topology so Link-state routing protocol like OSPF uses Dijkstra algorithm to calculate the shortest path -> . Unlike Distance vector routing protocol (which utilizes frequent periodic updates), link-state routing protocol utilizes event-triggered updates (only sends update when a change occurs) -> QUESTION NO: 164 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 124
  • 125. Based on the exhibited routing table, how will packets from a host within the 192.168.10.192/26 LAN be forwarded to 192.168.10.1? A. The router will forward packets from R3 to R2 to R1. B. The router will forward packets from R3 to R1 to R2. C. The router will forward packets from R3 to R2 to R1 AND from R3 to R1. D. The router will forward packets from R3 to R1. Answer: C Explanation: Explanation From the routing table we learn that network 192.168.10.0/30 is learned via 2 equal-cost paths (192.168.10.9 &192.168.10.5) -> traffic to this network will be load-balancing. QUESTION NO: 165 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 125
  • 126. C-router is to be used as a "router-on-a-stick" to route between the VLANs. All the interfaces have been properly configured and IP routing is operational. The hosts in the VLANs have been configured with the appropriate default gateway. What is true about this configuration? A. These commands need to be added to the configuration: C-router(config)# router eigrp 123 C-router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0 B. These commands need to be added to the configuration: C-router(config)# router ospf 1 C-router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0 0.0.3.255 area 0 C. These commands need to be added to the configuration: C-router(config)# router rip C-router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0 D. No further routing configuration is required. Answer: D Explanation: Since all the same router (C-router) is the default gateway for all three VLANs, all traffic destined to a different VLA will be sent to the C-router. The C-router will have knowledge of all three networks since they will appear as directly connected in the routing table. Since the C-router already knows how to get to all three networks, no routing protocols need to be configured. QUESTION NO: 166 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 126
  • 127. Why is flash memory erased prior to upgrading the IOS image from the TFTP server? A. The router cannot verify that the Cisco IOS image currently in flash is valid. B. Flash memory on Cisco routers can contain only a single IOS image. C. Erasing current flash content is requested during the copy dialog. D. In order for the router to use the new image as the default, it must be the only IOS image in flash. Answer: C Explanation: Explanation During the copy process, the router asked “Erasing flash before copying? [confirm]” and the administrator confirmed (by pressing Enter) so the flash was deleted. Note: In this case, the flash has enough space to copy a new IOS without deleting the current one. The current IOS is deleted just because the administrator wants to do so. If the flash does not have enough space you will see an error message like this: %Error copying tftp://192.168.2.167/ c1600-k8sy-mz.l23-16a.bin (Not enough space on device) QUESTION NO: 167 Which command would you configure globally on a Cisco router that would allow you to view directly connected Cisco devices? A. enable cdp B. cdp enable Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 127
  • 128. C. cdp run D. run cdp Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: C Explanation: CDP is enabled on Cisco routers by default. If you prefer not to use the CDP capability, disable it with the no cdp run command. In order to reenable CDP, use the cdp run command in global configuration mode. The “cdp enable” command is an interface command, not global. QUESTION NO: 168 Refer to the exhibit. According to the routing table, where will the router send a packet destined for 10.1.5.65? A. 10.1.1.2 B. 10.1.2.2 C. 10.1.3.3 D. 10.1.4.4 Answer: C Explanation: Explanation The destination IP address 10.1.5.65 belongs to 10.1.5.64/28, 10.1.5.64/29 & 10.1.5.64/27 subnets but the “longest prefix match” algorithm will choose the most specific subnet mask -> the prefix “/29 will be chosen to route the packet. Therefore the next-hop should be 10.1.3.3 -> . "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 128
  • 129. QUESTION NO: 169 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam Which address and mask combination represents a summary of the routes learned by EIGRP? A. 192.168.25.0 255.255.255.240 B. 192.168.25.0 255.255.255.252 C. 192.168.25.16 255.255.255.240 D. 192.168.25.16 255.255.255.252 E. 192.168.25.28 255.255.255.240 F. 192.168.25.28 255.255.255.252 Answer: C Explanation: The binary version of 20 is 10100. The binary version of 16 is 10000. The binary version of 24 is 11000. The binary version of 28 is 11100. The subnet mask is /28. The mask is 255.255.255.240. Note: From the output above, EIGRP learned 4 routes and we need to find out the summary of them: + 192.168.25.16 + 192.168.25.20 + 192.168.25.24 + 192.168.25.28 -> The increment should bE. 28 – 16 = 12 but 12 is not an exponentiation of 2 so we must choose 16 (24). Therefore the subnet mask is /28 (=1111 1111.1111 1111.1111 1111.11110000) = 255.255.255.240 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 129
  • 130. Cisco 200-120 Exam So the best answer should be 192.168.25.16 255.255.255.240 QUESTION NO: 170 Refer to the exhibit. Assuming that the entire network topology is shown, what is the operational status of the interfaces of R2 as indicated by the command output shown? A. One interface has a problem. B. Two interfaces have problems. C. The interfaces are functioning correctly. D. The operational status of the interfaces cannot be determined from the output shown. Answer: C Explanation: The output shown shows normal operational status of the router’s interfaces. Serial0/0 is down because it has been disabled using the “shutdown” command. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 130
  • 131. QUESTION NO: 171 Which two locations can be configured as a source for the IOS image in the boot system command? (Choose two.) A. RAM B. NVRAM C. flash memory D. HTTP server E. TFTP server F. Telnet server Answer: C,E Explanation: Explanation The following locations can be configured as a source for the IOS image: 1. + Flash (the default location) 2. + TFTP server 3. + ROM (used if no other source is found) 4. (Please read the explanation of Question 4 for more information) QUESTION NO: 172 Refer to the exhibit. Given the output for this command, if the router ID has not been manually set, what router ID will OSPF use for this router? A. 10.1.1.2 B. 10.154.154.1 C. 172.16.5.1 D. 192.168.5.3 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 131
  • 132. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: C Explanation: Explanation The highest IP address of all loopback interfaces will be chosen -> Loopback 0 will be chosen as the router ID. QUESTION NO: 173 Refer to the exhibit. What commands must be configured on the 2950 switch and the router to allow communication between host 1 and host 2? (Choose two.) A. Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0 Router(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config-if)# no shut down B. Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0 Router(config-if)# no shut down Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0.1 Router(config-subif)# encapsulation dot1q 10 Router(config-subif)# ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0 Router(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0.2 Router(config-subif)# encapsulation dot1q 20 Router(config-subif)# ip address 192.168.20.1 255.255.255.0 C. Router(config)# router eigrp 100 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 132
  • 133. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.10.0 Router(config-router)# network 192.168.20.0 D. Switch1(config)# vlan database Switch1(config-vlan)# vtp domain XYZ Switch1(config-vlan)# vtp server E. Switch1(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 Switch1(config-if)# switchport mode trunk F. Switch1(config)# interface vlan 1 Switch1(config-if)# ip default-gateway 192.168.1.1 Answer: B,E Explanation: The router will need to use subinterfaces, where each subinterface is assigned a VLAN and IP address for each VLAN. On the switch, the connection to the router need to be configured as a trunk using the switchport mode trunk command and it will need a default gateway for VLAN 1. QUESTION NO: 174 Which two statements describe the process identifier that is used in the command to configure OSPF on a router? (Choose two.) Router(config)# router ospf 1 A. All OSPF routers in an area must have the same process ID. B. Only one process number can be used on the same router. C. Different process identifiers can be used to run multiple OSPF processes D. The process number can be any number from 1 to 65,535. E. Hello packets are sent to each neighbor to determine the processor identifier. Answer: C,D Explanation: Multiple OSPF processes can be configured on a router using multiple process ID’s. The valid process ID’s are shown below: Edge-B(config)#router ospf ? <1-65535> Process ID QUESTION NO: 175 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 133
  • 134. Cisco 200-120 Exam For what two reasons has the router loaded its IOS image from the location that is shown? (Choose two.) A. Router1 has specific boot system commands that instruct it to load IOS from a TFTP server. B. Router1 is acting as a TFTP server for other routers. C. Router1 cannot locate a valid IOS image in flash memory. D. Router1 defaulted to ROMMON mode and loaded the IOS image from a TFTP server. E. Cisco routers will first attempt to load an image from TFTP for management purposes. Answer: A,C Explanation: The loading sequence of CISCO IOS is as follows: Booting up the router and locating the Cisco IOS 1. POST (power on self test) 2. Bootstrap code executed 3. Check Configuration Register value (NVRAM) which can be modified using the config-register command 0 = ROM Monitor mode 1 = ROM IOS 2 - 15 = startup-config in NVRAM 4. Startup-config filE. Check for boot system commands (NVRAM) If boot system commands in startup-config a. Run boot system commands in order they appear in startup-config to locate the IOS b. [If boot system commands fail, use default fallback sequence to locate the IOS (Flash, TFTP, ROM)?] If no boot system commands in startup-config use the default fallback sequence in locating the IOS: "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 134
  • 135. Cisco 200-120 Exam a. Flash (sequential) b. TFTP server (netboot) c. ROM (partial IOS) or keep retrying TFTP depending upon router model 5. If IOS is loaded, but there is no startup-config file, the router will use the default fallback sequence for locating the IOS and then it will enter setup mode or the setup dialogue. QUESTION NO: 176 Refer to the exhibit. What can be determined about the router from the console output? A. No configuration file was found in NVRAM. B. No configuration file was found in flash. C. No configuration file was found in the PCMCIA card. D. Configuration file is normal and will load in 15 seconds. Answer: A Explanation: Explanation When no startup configuration file is found in NVRAM, the System Configuration Dialog will appear to ask if we want to enter the initial configuration dialog or not. QUESTION NO: 177 Which three elements must be used when you configure a router interface for VLAN trunking? (Choose three.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 135
  • 136. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. one physical interface for each subinterface B. one IP network or subnetwork for each subinterface C. a management domain for each subinterface D. subinterface encapsulation identifiers that match VLAN tags E. one subinterface per VLAN F. subinterface numbering that matches VLAN tags Answer: B,D,E Explanation: This scenario is commonly called a router on a stick. A short, well written article on this operation can be found here: http://www.thebryantadvantage.com/RouterOnAStickCCNACertificationExamTutorial.htm QUESTION NO: 178 Which commands are required to properly configure a router to run OSPF and to add network 192.168.16.0/24 to OSPF area 0? (Choose two.) A. Router(config)# router ospf 0 B. Router(config)# router ospf 1 C. Router(config)# router ospf area 0 D. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.16.0 0.0.0.255 0 E. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.16.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 F. Router(config-router)# network 192.168.16.0 255.255.255.0 area 0 Answer: B,E Explanation: Explanation In the router ospf command, the ranges from 1 to 65535 so o is an invalid number -> but To configure OSPF, we need a wildcard in the “network” statement, not a subnet mask. We also need to assgin an area to this process -> . QUESTION NO: 179 A router receives information about network 192.168.10.0/24 from multiple sources. What will the router consider the most reliable information about the path to that network? A. a directly connected interface with an address of 192.168.10.254/24 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 136
  • 137. B. a static route to network 192.168.10.0/24 C. a RIP update for network 192.168.10.0/24 D. an OSPF update for network 192.168.0.0/16 E. a default route with a next hop address of 192.168.10.1 F. a static route to network 192.168.10.0/24 with a local serial interface configured as the next hop Answer: A Explanation: When there is more than one way to reach a destination, it will choose the best one based on a couple of things. First, it will choose the route that has the longest match; meaning the most specific route. So, in this case the /24 routes will be chosen over the /16 routes. Next, from all the /24 routes it will choose the one with the lowest administrative distance. Directly connected routes have an AD of 1 so this will be the route chosen. QUESTION NO: 180 What is the default maximum number of equal-cost paths that can be placed into the routing table of a Cisco OSPF router? A. 2 B. 8 C. 16 D. unlimited Answer: B Explanation: maximum-paths (OSPF) To control the maximum number of parallel routes that Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) can support, use the maximum-paths command. Syntax Description maximum Maximum number of parallel routes that OSPF can install in a routing table. The range is from 1 to 16 routes. Command Default 8 paths QUESTION NO: 181 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 137
  • 138. Which command shows your active Telnet connections? A. show cdp neigbors B. show session C. show users D. show vty logins Answer: B Explanation: Explanation The “show users” shows telnet/ssh connections to your router while “show sessions” shows telnet/ssh connections from your router (to other devices). The question asks about “your active Telnet connections”, meaning connections from your router so the answer should be A. QUESTION NO: 182 Which type of EIGRP route entry describes a feasible successor? A. a backup route, stored in the routing table B. a primary route, stored in the routing table C. a backup route, stored in the topology table D. a primary route, stored in the topology table Answer: C Explanation: EIGRP uses the Neighbor Table to list adjacent routers. The Topology Table list all the learned routers to destination whilst the Routing Table contains the best route to a destination, which is known as the Successor. The Feasible Successor is a backup route to a destination which is kept in the Topology Table. QUESTION NO: 183 The network administrator cannot connect to Switch1 over a Telnet session, although the hosts attached to Switch1 can ping the interface Fa0/0 of the router. Given the information in the graphic and assuming that the router and Switch2 are configured properly, which of the following commands should be issued on Switch1 to correct this problem? A. Switch1(config)# line con0 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 138
  • 139. Cisco 200-120 Exam Switch1(config-line)# password cisco Switch1(config-line)#login B. Switch1(config)# interface fa0/1 Switch1(config-if)# ip address 192.168.24.3 255.255.255.0 C. Switch1(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.24.1 D. Switch1(config)# interface fa0/1 Switch1(config-if)# duplex full Switch1(config-if)# speed 100 E. Switch1(config)# interface fa0/1 Switch1(config-if)# switchport mode trunk Answer: C Explanation: Since we know hosts can reach the router through the switch, we know that connectivity, duplex. Speed, etc. are good. However, for the switch itself to reach networks outside the local one, the ip default-gateway command must be used. QUESTION NO: 184 Refer to the exhibit. Which of these statements correctly describes the state of the switch once the boot process has been completed? A. As FastEthernet0/12 will be the last to come up, it will be blocked by STP. B. Remote access management of this switch will not be possible without configuration change. C. More VLANs will need to be created for this switch. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 139
  • 140. Cisco 200-120 Exam D. The switch will need a different IOS code in order to support VLANs and STP. Answer: B Explanation: Notice the line, which says “Interface VLAN1, changed state to administratively down”. This shows that VLAN1 is shut down. Hence remote management of this switch is not possible unless VLAN1 is brought back up. Since VLAN1 is the only interface shown in the output, you have to assume that no other VLAN interface has been configured with an IP Address. QUESTION NO: 185 Two routers named Atlanta and Brevard are connected via their serial interfaces as illustrated, but they are unable to communicate. The Atlanta router is known to have the correct configuration. Given the partial configurations, identify the fault on the Brevard router that is causing the lack of connectivity. A. incompatible IP address B. insufficient bandwidth C. incorrect subnet mask D. incompatible encapsulation E. link reliability too low F. IPCP closed Answer: D Explanation: Because Interface Serial 0 of Atlanta Router has 192.168.10.1 And Interface Serial 1 of Router Brevard has 192.168.11.2. These are from different network. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 140
  • 141. QUESTION NO: 186 Cisco 200-120 Exam Users on the 172.17.22.0 network cannot reach the server located on the 172.31.5.0 network. The network administrator connected to router Coffee via the console port, issued the show ip route command, and was able to ping the server. Based on the output of the show ip route command and the topology shown in the graphic, what is the cause of the failure? A. The network has not fully converged. B. IP routing is not enabled. C. A static route is configured incorrectly. D. The FastEthernet interface on Coffee is disabled. E. The neighbor relationship table is not correctly updated. F. The routing table on Coffee has not updated . Answer: C Explanation: The default route or the static route was configured with incorrect next-hop ip address 172.19.22.2 The correct ip address will be 172.18.22.2 to reach server located on 172.31.5.0 network. Ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.18.22.2 QUESTION NO: 187 A network administrator is trying to add a new router into an established OSPF network. The networks attached to the new router do not appear in the routing tables of the other OSPF routers. Given the information in the partial configuration shown below, what configuration error is causing this problem? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 141
  • 142. Router(config)# router ospf 1 Cisco 200-120 Exam Router(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 area 0 A. The process id is configured improperly. B. The OSPF area is configured improperly. C. The network wildcard mask is configured improperly. D. The network number is configured improperly. E. The AS is configured improperly. F. The network subnet mask is configured improperly. Answer: C Explanation: When configuring OSPF, the mask used for the network statement is a wildcard mask similar to an access list. In this specific example, the correct syntax would have been “network 10.0.0.0 0.0.0.255 area 0.” Topic 5, IP Services QUESTION NO: 188 Which statement is correct regarding the operation of DHCP? A. A DHCP client uses a ping to detect address conflicts. B. A DHCP server uses a gratuitous ARP to detect DHCP clients. C. A DHCP client uses a gratuitous ARP to detect a DHCP server. D. If an address conflict is de0tected, the address is removed from the pool and an administrator must resolve the conflict. E. If an address conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool for an amount of time configurable by the administrator. F. If an address conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool and will not be reused until the server is rebooted. Answer: D Explanation: An address conflict occurs when two hosts use the same IP address. During address assignment, DHCP checks for conflicts using ping and gratuitous ARP. If a conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool. The address will not be assigned until the administrator resolves the conflict. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 142
  • 143. Cisco 200-120 Exam (Reference: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_1/iproute/configuration/guide/1cddhcp.html) QUESTION NO: 189 Refer to the exhibit. What statement is true of the configuration for this network? A. The configuration that is shown provides inadequate outside address space for translation of the number of inside addresses that are supported. B. Because of the addressing on interface FastEthernet0/1, the Serial0/0 interface address will not support the NAT configuration as shown. C. The number 1 referred to in the ip nat inside source command references access-list number 1. D. ExternalRouter must be configured with static routes to networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24. Answer: C Explanation: Explanation The “list 1 refers to the access-list number 1. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 143
  • 144. QUESTION NO: 190 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which statement describes the process of dynamically assigning IP addresses by the DHCP server? A. Addresses are allocated after a negotiation between the server and the host to determine the length of the agreement. B. Addresses are permanently assigned so that the hosts uses the same address at all times. C. Addresses are assigned for a fixed period of time, at the end of the period, a new request for an address must be made. D. Addresses are leased to hosts, which periodically contact the DHCP server to renew the lease. Answer: D Explanation: The DHCP lifecycle consists of the following: Release: The client may decide at any time that it no longer wishes to use the IP address it was assigned, and may terminate the lease, releasing the IP address. QUESTION NO: 191 What are two benefits of using NAT? (Choose two.) A. NAT facilitates end-to-end communication when IPsec is enabled. B. NAT eliminates the need to re-address all hosts that require external access. C. NAT conserves addresses through host MAC-level multiplexing. D. Dynamic NAT facilitates connections from the outside of the network. E. NAT accelerates the routing process because no modifications are made on the packets. F. NAT protects network security because private networks are not advertised. Answer: B,F Explanation: By not revealing the internal Ip addresses, NAT adds some security to the inside network -> F is correct. NAT has to modify the source IP addresses in the packets -> E is not correct. Connection from the outside of the network through a “NAT” network is more difficult than a more network because IP addresses of inside hosts are hidden -> C is not correct. In order for IPsec to work with NAT we need to allow additional protocols, including Internet Key Exchange (IKE), Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) and Authentication Header (AH) -> more complex -> A is not correct. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 144
  • 145. Cisco 200-120 Exam By allocating specific public IP addresses to inside hosts, NAT eliminates the need to re-address the inside hosts -> B is correct. NAT does conserve addresses but not through host MAC-level multiplexing. It conserves addresses by allowing many private IP addresses to use the same public IP address to go to the Internet -> C is not correct. QUESTION NO: 192 On which options are standard access lists based? A. destination address and wildcard mask B. destination address and subnet mask C. source address and subnet mask D. source address and wildcard mask Answer: D Explanation: Standard ACL’s only examine the source IP address/mask to determine if a match is made. Extended ACL’s examine the source and destination address, as well as port information. QUESTION NO: 193 A network engineer wants to allow a temporary entry for a remote user with a specific username and password so that the user can access the entire network over the Internet. Which ACL can be used? A. standard B. extended C. dynamic D. reflexive Answer: C Explanation: Explanation We can use a dynamic access list to authenticate a remote user with a specific username and password. The authentication process is done by the router or a central access server such as a "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 145
  • 146. Cisco 200-120 Exam TACACS+ or RADIUS server. The configuration of dynamic ACL can be read here: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk583/tk822/technologies_tech_note09186a0080094524.shtml QUESTION NO: 194 How does a DHCP server dynamically assign IP addresses to hosts? A. Addresses are permanently assigned so that the host uses the same address at all times. B. Addresses are assigned for a fixed period of time. At the end of the period, a new request for an address must be made, and another address is then assigned. C. Addresses are leased to hosts. A host will usually keep the same address by periodically contacting the DHCP server to renew the lease. D. Addresses are allocated after a negotiation between the server and the host to determine the length of the agreement. Answer: C Explanation: DHCP works in a client/server mode and operates like any other client/server relationship. When a PC connects to a DHCP server, the server assigns or leases an IP address to that PC. The PC connects to the network with that leased IP address until the lease expires. The host must contact the DHCP server periodically to extend the lease. This lease mechanism ensures that hosts that move or power off do not hold onto addresses that they do not need. The DHCP server returns these addresses to the address pool and reallocates them as necessary. QUESTION NO: 195 Refer to the exhibit. Which rule does the DHCP server use when there is an IP address conflict? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 146
  • 147. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. The address is removed from the pool until the conflict is resolved. B. The address remains in the pool until the conflict is resolved. C. Only the IP detected by Gratuitous ARP is removed from the pool. D. Only the IP detected by Ping is removed from the pool. E. The IP will be shown, even after the conflict is resolved. Answer: A Explanation: An address conflict occurs when two hosts use the same IP address. During address assignment, DHCP checks for conflicts using ping and gratuitous ARP. If a conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool. The address will not be assigned until the administrator resolves the conflict. (Reference: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_1/iproute/configuration/guide/1cddhcp.html) QUESTION NO: 196 Refer to the exhibit. The Bigtime router is unable to authenticate to the Littletime router. What is the cause of the problem? A. The usernames are incorrectly configured on the two routers. B. The passwords do not match on the two routers. C. CHAP authentication cannot be used on a serial interface. D. The routers cannot be connected from interface S0/0 to interface S0/0. E. With CHAP authentication, one router must authenticate to another router. The routers cannot be configured to authenticate to each other. Answer: B Explanation: With CHAP authentication, the configured passwords must be identical on each router. Here, it is configured as little123 on one side and big123 on the other. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 147
  • 148. QUESTION NO: 197 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which two tasks does the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol perform? (Choose two.) A. Set the IP gateway to be used by the network. B. Perform host discovery used DHCPDISCOVER message. C. Configure IP address parameters from DHCP server to a host. D. Provide an easy management of layer 3 devices. E. Monitor IP performance using the DHCP server. F. Assign and renew IP address from the default pool. Answer: C,F Explanation: The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a network protocol used to configure devices that are connected to a network (known as hosts) so they can communicate on that network using the Internet Protocol (IP). It involves clients and a server operating in a client-server model. DHCP servers assigns IP addresses from a pool of addresses and also assigns other parameters such as DNS and default gateways to hosts. QUESTION NO: 198 When a DHCP server is configured, which two IP addresses should never be assignable to hosts? (Choose two.) A. network or subnetwork IP address B. broadcast address on the network C. IP address leased to the LAN D. IP address used by the interfaces E. manually assigned address to the clients F. designated IP address to the DHCP server Answer: A,B Explanation: Explanation Network or subnetwork IP address (for example 11.0.0.0/8 or 13.1.0.0/16) and broadcast address (for example 23.2.1.255/24) should never be assignable to hosts. When try to assign these addresses to hosts, you will receive an error message saying that they can’t be assignable. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 148
  • 149. QUESTION NO: 199 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which two statements about static NAT translations are true? (Choose two.) A. They allow connections to be initiated from the outside. B. They require no inside or outside interface markings because addresses are statically defined. C. They are always present in the NAT table. D. They can be configured with access lists, to allow two or more connections to be initiated from the outside. Answer: A,C Explanation: Static NAT is to map a single outside IP address to a single inside IP address. This is typically done to allow incoming connections from the outside (Internet) to the inside. Since these are static, they are always present in the NAT table even if they are not actively in use. Topic 6, Network Device Security QUESTION NO: 200 A network administrator needs to configure port security on a switch. Which two statements are true? (Choose two.) A. The network administrator can apply port security to dynamic access ports. B. The network administrator can apply port security to EtherChannels. C. When dynamic MAC address learning is enabled on an interface, the switch can learn new addresses, up to the maximum defined. D. The sticky learning feature allows the addition of dynamically learned addresses to the running configuration. E. The network administrator can configure static secure or sticky secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN. Answer: C,D Explanation: Follow these guidelines when configuring port security: "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 149
  • 150. + Port security can only be configured on static access ports, trunk ports, or 802.1Q tunnel ports. + A secure port cannot be a dynamic access port. + A secure port cannot be a destination port for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN). + A secure port cannot belong to a Fast EtherChannel or Gigabit EtherChannel port group. + You cannot configure static secure or sticky secure MAC addresses on a voice VLAN. + When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, you must set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to at least two. + If any type of port security is enabled on the access VLAN, dynamic port security is automatically enabled on the voice VLAN. + When a voice VLAN is configured on a secure port that is also configured as a sticky secure port, all addresses seen on the voice VLAN are learned as dynamic secure addresses, and all addresses seen on the access VLAN (to which the port belongs) are learned as sticky secure addresses. + The switch does not support port security aging of sticky secure MAC addresses. + The protect and restrict options cannot be simultaneously enabled on an interface. (Reference: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst3550/software/release/12.1_19_ea1/config uration/guide/swtrafc.html) QUESTION NO: 201 DRAG DROP Answer: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 150
  • 151. Explanation: QUESTION NO: 202 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 151
  • 152. Cisco 200-120 Exam A junior network administrator was given the task of configuring port security on SwitchA to allow only PC_A to access the switched network through port fa0/1. If any other device is detected, the port is to drop frames from this device. The administrator configured the interface and tested it with successful pings from PC_A to RouterA, and then observes the output from these two show commands. Which two of these changes are necessary for SwitchA to meet the requirements? (Choose two.) A. Port security needs to be globally enabled. B. Port security needs to be enabled on the interface. C. Port security needs to be configured to shut down the interface in the event of a violation. D. Port security needs to be configured to allow only one learned MAC address. E. Port security interface counters need to be cleared before using the show command. F. The port security configuration needs to be saved to NVRAM before it can become active. Answer: B,D Explanation: From the output we can see that port security is disabled so this needs to be enabled. Also, the maximum number of devices is set to 2 so this needs to be just one if we want the single host to have access and nothing else. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 152
  • 153. QUESTION NO: 203 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which set of commands is recommended to prevent the use of a hub in the access layer? A. switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk switch(config-if)#switchport port-security maximum 1 B. switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk switch(config-if)#switchport port-security mac-address 1 C. switch(config-if)#switchport mode access switch(config-if)#switchport port-security maximum 1 D. switch(config-if)#switchport mode access switch(config-if)#switchport port-security mac-address 1 Answer: C Explanation: This question is to examine the layer 2 security configuration. In order to satisfy the requirements of this question, you should perform the following configurations in the interface mode: First, configure the interface mode as the access mode Second, enable the port security and set the maximum number of connections to 1. QUESTION NO: 204 How does using the service password-encryption command on a router provide additional security? A. by encrypting all passwords passing through the router B. by encrypting passwords in the plain text configuration file C. by requiring entry of encrypted passwords for access to the device D. by configuring an MD5 encrypted key to be used by routing protocols to validate routing exchanges E. by automatically suggesting encrypted passwords for use in configuring the router Answer: B Explanation: Explanation By using this command, all the (current and future) passwords are encrypted. This command is primarily useful for keeping unauthorized individuals from viewing your password in your configuration file "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 153
  • 154. QUESTION NO: 205 Refer to the exhibit. Statements A, B, C, and D of ACL 10 have been entered in the shown order and applied to interface E0 inbound, to prevent all hosts (except those whose addresses are the first and last IP of subnet 172.21.1.128/28) from accessing the network. But as is, the ACL does not restrict anyone from the network. How can the ACL statements be re-arranged so that the system works as intended? A. ACDB B. BADC C. DBAC D. CDBA Answer: D Explanation: Routers go line by line through an access list until a match is found and then will not look any further, even if a more specific of better match is found later on in the access list. So, it it best to begin with the most specific entries first, in this cast the two hosts in line C and D. Then, include the subnet (B) and then finally the rest of the traffic (A). QUESTION NO: 206 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 154
  • 155. An attempt to deny web access to a subnet blocks all traffic from the subnet. Which interface command immediately removes the effect of ACL 102? A. no ip access-class 102 in B. no ip access-class 102 out C. no ip access-group 102 in D. no ip access-group 102 out E. no ip access-list 102 in Answer: D Explanation: The “ip access-group” is used to apply and ACL to an interface. From the output shown, we know that the ACL is applied to outbound traffic, so “no ip access-group 102 out” will remove the effect of this ACL. QUESTION NO: 207 Which Cisco Catalyst feature automatically disables the port in an operational PortFast upon receipt of a BPDU? A. BackboneFast B. UplinkFast C. Root Guard Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 155
  • 156. D. BPDU Guard E. BPDU Filter Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: D Explanation: Explanation We only enable PortFast feature on access ports (ports connected to end stations). But if someone does not know he can accidentally plug that port to another switch and a loop may occur when BPDUs are being transmitted and received on these ports. With BPDU Guard, when a PortFast receives a BPDU, it will be shut down to prevent a loop. QUESTION NO: 208 When you are troubleshooting an ACL issue on a router, which command would you use to verify which interfaces are affected by the ACL? A. show ip access-lists B. show access-lists C. show interface D. show ip interface E. list ip interface Answer: D Explanation: Incorrect answer: show ip access-lists does not show interfaces affected by an ACL. QUESTION NO: 209 CORRECT TEXT A network associate is adding security to the configuration of the Corp1 router. The user on host C should be able to use a web browser to access financial information from the Finance Web Server. No other hosts from the LAN nor the Core should be able to use a web browser to access this server. Since there are multiple resources for the corporation at this location including other resources on the Finance Web Server, all other traffic should be allowed. The task is to create and apply an access-list with no more than three statements that will allow ONLY host C web access to the Finance Web Server. No other hosts will have web access to the Finance Web Server. All other traffic is permitted. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 156
  • 157. Cisco 200-120 Exam Access to the router CLI can be gained by clicking on the appropriate host. All passwords have been temporarily set to "cisco". The Core connection uses an IP address of 198.18.196.65 The computers in the Hosts LAN have been assigned addresses of 192.168.33.1 - 192.168.33.254 Host A 192.168.33.1 Host B 192.168.33.2 Host C 192.168.33.3 Host D 192.168.33.4 The servers in the Server LAN have been assigned addresses of 172.22.242.17 - 172.22.242.30 The Finance Web Server is assigned an IP address of 172.22.242.23. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 157
  • 158. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: Select the console on Corp1 router Configuring ACL Corp1>enable Corp1#configure terminal comment: To permit only Host C (192.168.33.3){source addr} to access finance server address (172.22.242.23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.33.3 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 comment: To deny any source to access finance server address (172.22.242.23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp any host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 comment: To permit ip protocol from any source to access any destination because of the implicit deny any any statement at the end of ACL. Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any Applying the ACL on the Interface comment: Check show ip interface brief command to identify the interface type and number by checking the IP address configured. Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 If the ip address configured already is incorrect as well as the subnet mask. this should be corrected in order ACL to work type this commands at interface mode : no ip address 192.x.x.x 255.x.x.x (removes incorrect configured ipaddress and subnet mask) Configure Correct IP Address and subnet mask : ip address 172.22.242.30 255.255.255.240 ( range of address specified going to server is given as 172.22.242.17 - 172.22.242.30 ) Comment: Place the ACL to check for packets going outside the interface towards the finance web server. Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out Corp1(config-if)#end Important: To save your running config to startup before exit. Corp1#copy running-config startup-config Verifying the Configuration: Step1: show ip interface brief command identifies the interface on which to apply access list. Step2: Click on each host A, B, C, & D. Host opens a web browser page, Select address box of the web browser and type the ip address of finance web server (172.22.242.23) to test whether it permits /deny access to the finance web Server. Step 3: Only Host C (192.168.33.3) has access to the server. If the other host can also access then maybe something went wrong in your configuration. Check whether you configured correctly and in order. Step 4: If only Host C (192.168.33.3) can access the Finance Web Server you can click on NEXT button to successfully submit the ACL SIM. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 158
  • 159. QUESTION NO: 210 Refer to exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam A network administrator cannot establish a Telnet session with the indicated router. What is the cause of this failure? A. A Level 5 password is not set. B. An ACL is blocking Telnet access. C. The vty password is missing. D. The console password is missing. Answer: C Explanation: The login keyword has been set, but not password. This will result in the “password required, but none set” message to users trying to telnet to this router. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 159
  • 160. QUESTION NO: 211 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which statement about access lists that are applied to an interface is true? A. You can place as many access lists as you want on any interface. B. You can apply only one access list on any interface. C. You can configure one access list, per direction, per Layer 3 protocol. D. You can apply multiple access lists with the same protocol or in different directions. Answer: C Explanation: We can have only 1 access list per protocol, per direction and per interface. It means: + We can not have 2 inbound access lists on an interface + We can have 1 inbound and 1 outbound access list on an interface QUESTION NO: 212 Which item represents the standard IP ACL? A. access-list 110 permit ip any any B. access-list 50 deny 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.255 C. access list 101 deny tcp any host 192.168.1.1 D. access-list 2500 deny tcp any host 192.168.1.1 eq 22 Answer: B Explanation: Explanation The standard access lists are ranged from 1 to 99 and from 1300 to 1999 so only access list 50 is a standard access list. QUESTION NO: 213 A network administrator is configuring ACLs on a Cisco router, to allow traffic from hosts on networks 192.168.146.0, 192.168.147.0, 192.168.148.0, and 192.168.149.0 only. Which two ACL statements, when combined, would you use to accomplish this task? (Choose two.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 160
  • 161. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 0.0.1.255 B. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.147.0 0.0.255.255 C. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.148.0 0.0.1.255 D. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.149.0 0.0.255.255 E. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 0.0.0.255 F. access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 255.255.255.0 Answer: A,C Explanation: “access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.146.0 0.0.1.255” would allow only the 192.168.146.0 and 192.168.147.0 networks, and “access-list 10 permit ip 192.168.148.0 0.0.1.255” would allow only the 192.168.148.0 and 192.168.149.0 networks. QUESTION NO: 214 What can be done to secure the virtual terminal interfaces on a router? (Choose two.) A. Administratively shut down the interface. B. Physically secure the interface. C. Create an access list and apply it to the virtual terminal interfaces with the access-group command. D. Configure a virtual terminal password and login process. E. Enter an access list and apply it to the virtual terminal interfaces using the access-class command. Answer: D,E Explanation: Explanation It is a waste to administratively shut down the interface. Moreover, someone can still access the virtual terminal interfaces via other interfaces -> We can not physically secure a virtual interface because it is “virtual” -> To apply an access list to a virtual terminal interface we must use the “access-class” command. The “access-group” command is only used to apply an access list to a physical interface -> C is not correct. The most simple way to secure the virtual terminal interface is to configure a username & password to prevent unauthorized login. QUESTION NO: 215 Which two commands correctly verify whether port security has been configured on port "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 161
  • 162. FastEthernet 0/12 on a switch? (Choose two.) A. SW1#show port-secure interface FastEthernet 0/12 B. SW1#show switchport port-secure interface FastEthernet 0/12 C. SW1#show running-config D. SW1#show port-security interface FastEthernet 0/12 E. SW1#show switchport port-security interface FastEthernet 0/12 Answer: C,D Explanation: Explanation We can verify whether port security has been configured by using the “show running-config” or “show port-security interface ” for more detail. An example of the output of “show port-security interface ” command is shown below: QUESTION NO: 216 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 162
  • 163. Cisco 200-120 Exam The following commands are executed on interface fa0/1 of 2950Switch. 2950Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security 2950Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 2950Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 1 The Ethernet frame that is shown arrives on interface fa0/1. What two functions will occur when this frame is received by 2950Switch? (Choose two.) A. The MAC address table will now have an additional entry of fa0/1 FFFF.FFFF.FFFF. B. Only host A will be allowed to transmit frames on fa0/1. C. This frame will be discarded when it is received by 2950Switch. D. All frames arriving on 2950Switch with a destination of 0000.00aa.aaaa will be forwarded out fa0/1. E. Hosts B and C may forward frames out fa0/1 but frames arriving from other switches will not be forwarded out fa0/1. F. Only frames from source 0000.00bb.bbbb, the first learned MAC address of 2950Switch, will be forwarded out fa0/1. Answer: B,D Explanation: The configuration shown here is an example of port security, specifically port security using sticky addresses. You can use port security with dynamically learned and static MAC addresses to restrict a port's ingress traffic by limiting the MAC addresses that are allowed to send traffic into the port. When you assign secure MAC addresses to a secure port, the port does not forward "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 163
  • 164. ingress traffic that has source addresses outside the group of defined addresses. If you limit the number of secure MAC addresses to one and assign a single secure MAC address, the device attached to that port has the full bandwidth of the port. Port security with sticky MAC addresses provides many of the same benefits as port security with static MAC addresses, but sticky MAC addresses can be learned dynamically. Port security with sticky MAC addresses retains dynamically learned MAC addresses during a link-down condition. QUESTION NO: 217 What will be the result if the following configuration commands are implemented on a Cisco switch? Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky A. A dynamically learned MAC address is saved in the startup-configuration file. B. A dynamically learned MAC address is saved in the running-configuration file. C. A dynamically learned MAC address is saved in the VLAN database. D. Statically configured MAC addresses are saved in the startup-configuration file if frames from that address are received. E. Statically configured MAC addresses are saved in the running-configuration file if frames from that address are received. Answer: B Explanation: In the interface configuration mode, the command switchport port-security mac-address sticky enables sticky learning. When entering this command, the interface converts all the dynamic secure MAC addresses to sticky secure MAC addresses. Topic 7, Troubleshooting QUESTION NO: 218 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 164
  • 165. Answer: Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam A simple way to find out which layer is having problem is to remember this rule: “the first statement is for Layer 1, the last statement is for Layer 2 and if Layer 1 is down then surely Layer 2 will be down too”, so you have to check Layer 1 before checking Layer 2. For example, from the output “Serial0/1 is up, line protocol is down” we know that it is a layer 2 problem because the first statement (Serial0/1 is up) is good while the last statement (line protocol is down) is bad. For the statement “Serial0/1 is down, line protocol is down”, both layers are down so the problem belongs to Layer 1. There is only one special case with the statement “…. is administrator down, line protocol is down”. In this case, we know that the port is currently disabled and shut down by the administrators. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 165
  • 166. QUESTION NO: 219 DRAG DROP Answer: Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam The question asks us to “begin with the lowest layer” so we have to begin with Layer 1: verify physical connection; in this case an Ethernet cable connection. For your information, “verify Ethernet cable connection” means that we check if the type of connection (crossover, straight-through, rollover…) is correct, the RJ45 headers are plugged in, the signal on the cable is acceptable… Next we “verify NIC operation”. We do this by simply making a ping to the loopback interface 127.0.0.1. If it works then the NIC card (layer 1, 2) and TCP/IP stack (layer 3) are working properly. Verify IP configuration belongs to layer 3. For example, checking if the IP can be assignable for host, the PC’s IP is in the same network with the gateway… "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 166
  • 167. Cisco 200-120 Exam Verifying the URL by typing in your browser some popular websites like google.com, microsoft.com to assure that the far end server is not down (it sometimes make we think we can’t access to the Internet). We are using a URL so this step belongs to layer 7 of the OSI model. QUESTION NO: 220 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator attempts to ping Host2 from Host1 and receives the results that are shown. What is the problem? A. The link between Host1 and Switch1 is down. B. TCP/IP is not functioning on Host1 C. The link between Router1 and Router2 is down. D. The default gateway on Host1 is incorrect. E. Interface Fa0/0 on Router1 is shutdown. F. The link between Switch1 and Router1 is down. Answer: C Explanation: Host1 tries to communicate with Host2. The message destination host unreachable from Router1 indicates that the problem occurs when the data is forwarded from Host1 to Host2. According to the topology, we can infer that the link between Router1 and Router2 is down. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 167
  • 168. QUESTION NO: 221 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts in network 192.168.2.0 are unable to reach hosts in network 192.168.3.0. Based on the output from RouterA, what are two possible reasons for the failure? (Choose two.) A. The cable that is connected to S0/0 on RouterA is faulty. B. Interface S0/0 on RouterB is administratively down. C. Interface S0/0 on RouterA is configured with an incorrect subnet mask. D. The IP address that is configured on S0/0 of RouterB is not in the correct subnet. E. Interface S0/0 on RouterA is not receiving a clock signal from the CSU/DSU. F. The encapsulation that is configured on S0/0 of RouterB does not match the encapsulation that is configured on S0/0 of RouterA. Answer: E,F Explanation: From the output we can see that there is a problem with the Serial 0/0 interface. It is enabled, but the line protocol is down. The could be a result of mismatched encapsulation or the interface not receiving a clock signal from the CSU/DSU. QUESTION NO: 222 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 168
  • 169. An administrator pings the default gateway at 10.10.10.1 and sees the output as shown. At which OSI layer is the problem? A. data link layer B. application layer C. access layer D. session layer E. network layer Answer: E Explanation: The command ping uses ICMP protocol, which is a network layer protocol used to propagate control message between host and router. The command ping is often used to verify the network connectivity, so it works at the network layer. QUESTION NO: 223 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 169
  • 170. The two connected ports on the switch are not turning orange or green. What would be the most effective steps to troubleshoot this physical layer problem? (Choose three.) A. Ensure that the Ethernet encapsulations match on the interconnected router and switch ports. B. Ensure that cables A and B are straight-through cables. C. Ensure cable A is plugged into a trunk port. D. Ensure the switch has power. E. Reboot all of the devices. F. Reseat all cables. Answer: B,D,F Explanation: Explanation The ports on the switch are not up indicating it is a layer 1 (physical) problem so we should check cable type, power and how they are plugged in. QUESTION NO: 224 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 170
  • 171. Cisco 200-120 Exam The network shown in the diagram is experiencing connectivity problems. Which of the following will correct the problems? (Choose two.) A. Configure the gateway on Host A as 10.1.1.1. B. Configure the gateway on Host B as 10.1.2.254. C. Configure the IP address of Host A as 10.1.2.2. D. Configure the IP address of Host B as 10.1.2.2. E. Configure the masks on both hosts to be 255.255.255.224. F. Configure the masks on both hosts to be 255.255.255.240. Answer: B,D Explanation: The switch 1 is configured with two VLANs: VLAN1 and VLAN2. The IP information of member Host A in VLAN1 is as follows: Address : 10.1.1.126 Mask : 255.255.255.0 Gateway : 10.1.1.254 The IP information of member Host B in VLAN2 is as follows: Address : 10.1.1.12 Mask : 255.255.255.0 Gateway : 10.1.1.254 The configuration of sub-interface on router 2 is as follows: Fa0/0.1 -- 10.1.1.254/24 VLAN1 Fa0/0.2 -- 10.1.2.254/24 VLAN2 It is obvious that the configurations of the gateways of members in VLAN2 and the associated network segments are wrong. The layer3 addressing information of Host B should be modified as follows: Address : 10.1.2.X Mask : 255.255.255.0 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 171
  • 172. QUESTION NO: 225 Refer to the exhibit. A problem with network connectivity has been observed. It is suspected that the cable connected to switch port Fa0/9 on Switch1 is disconnected. What would be an effect of this cable being disconnected? A. Host B would not be able to access the server in VLAN9 until the cable is reconnected. B. Communication between VLAN3 and the other VLANs would be disabled. C. The transfer of files from Host B to the server in VLAN9 would be significantly slower. D. For less than a minute, Host B would not be able to access the server in VLAN9. Then normal network function would resume. Answer: D Explanation: Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) is a Layer 2 protocol that utilizes a special-purpose algorithm to discover physical loops in a network and effect a logical loop-free topology. STP creates a loop-free tree structure consisting of leaves and branches that span the entire Layer 2 network. The actual mechanics of how bridges communicate and how the STP algorithm works will be discussed at length in the following topics. Note that the terms bridge and switch are used interchangeably when discussing STP. In addition, unless otherwise indicated, connections between switches are assumed to be trunks. QUESTION NO: 226 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 172
  • 173. Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam HostA cannot ping HostB. Assuming routing is properly configured, what is the cause of this problem? A. HostA is not on the same subnet as its default gateway. B. The address of SwitchA is a subnet address. C. The Fa0/0 interface on RouterA is on a subnet that can't be used. D. The serial interfaces of the routers are not on the same subnet. E. The Fa0/0 interface on RouterB is using a broadcast address. Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Now let’s find out the range of the networks on serial link: For the network 192.168.1.62/27: Increment: 32 Network address: 192.168.1.32 Broadcast address: 192.168.1.63 For the network 192.168.1.65/27: Increment: 32 Network address: 192.168.1.64 Broadcast address: 192.168.1.95 -> These two IP addresses don’t belong to the same network and they can’t see each other "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 173
  • 174. QUESTION NO: 227 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which router IOS commands can be used to troubleshoot LAN connectivity problems? (Choose three.) A. ping B. tracert C. ipconfig D. show ip route E. winipcfg F. show interfaces Answer: A,D,F Explanation: Ping, show ip route, and show interfaces are all valid troubleshooting IOS commands. Tracert, ipconfig, and winipcfg are PC commands, not IOS. QUESTION NO: 228 A network administrator is troubleshooting the OSPF configuration of routers R1 and R2. The routers cannot establish an adjacency relationship on their common Ethernet link. The graphic shows the output of the show ip ospf interface e0 command for routers R1 and R2. Based on the information in the graphic, what is the cause of this problem? A. The OSPF area is not configured properly. B. The priority on R1 should be set higher. C. The cost on R1 should be set higher. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 174
  • 175. D. The hello and dead timers are not configured properly. E. A backup designated router needs to be added to the network. F. The OSPF process ID numbers must match. Answer: D Explanation: In OSPF, the hello and dead intervals must match and here we can see the hello interval is set to 5 on R1 and 10 on R2. The dead interval is also set to 20 on R1 but it is 40 on R2. QUESTION NO: 229 In which circumstance are multiple copies of the same unicast frame likely to be transmitted in a switched LAN? A. during high traffic periods B. after broken links are re-established C. when upper-layer protocols require high reliability D. in an improperly implemented redundant topology E. when a dual ring topology is in use Answer: D Explanation: Explanation If we connect two switches via 2 or more links and do not enable STP on these switches then a loop (which creates multiple copies of the same unicast frame) will occur. It is an example of an improperly implemented redundant topology. QUESTION NO: 230 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 175
  • 176. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 176
  • 177. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 177
  • 178. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 178
  • 179. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 179
  • 180. Cisco 200-120 Exam Which will fix the issue and allow ONLY ping to work while keeping telnet disabled? A. Correctly assign an IP address to interface fa0/1. B. Change the ip access-group command on fa0/0 from "in* to "out. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 180
  • 181. C. Remove access-group 106 in from interface fa0/0 and add access-group 115 in. D. Remove access-group 102 out from interface s0/0/0 and add access-group 114 in E. Remove access-group 106 in from interface fa0/0 and add access-group 104 in. Answer: E Explanation: Let’s have a look at the access list 104: The question does not ask about ftp traffic so we don’t care about the two first lines. The 3rd line denies all telnet traffic and the 4th line allows icmp traffic to be sent (ping). Remember that the access list 104 is applied on the inbound direction so the 5th line “access-list 104 deny icmp any any echo-reply” will not affect our icmp traffic because the “echo-reply” message will be sent over the outbound direction. QUESTION NO: 231 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 181
  • 182. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 182
  • 183. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 183
  • 184. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 184
  • 185. Cisco 200-120 Exam What would be the effect of issuing the command ip access-group 114 in to the fa0/0 interface? A. Attempts to telnet to the router would fail. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 185
  • 186. B. It would allow all traffic from the 10.4.4.0 network. C. IP traffic would be passed through the interface but TCP and UDP traffic would not. D. Routing protocol updates for the 10.4.4.0 network would not be accepted from the fa0/0 interface. Answer: B Explanation: From the output of access-list 114: access-list 114 permit ip 10.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 any we can easily understand that this access list allows all traffic (ip) from 10.4.4.0/24 network QUESTION NO: 232 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 186
  • 187. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 187
  • 188. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 188
  • 189. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 189
  • 190. Cisco 200-120 Exam What would be the effect of Issuing the command ip access-group 115 in on the s0/0/1 interface? - No host could connect to RouterC through s0/0/1. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 190
  • 191. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. Telnet and ping would work but routing updates would fail. B. FTP, FTP-DATA, echo, and www would work but telnet would fail. C. Only traffic from the 10.4.4.0 network would pass through the interface. Answer: A Explanation: First let’s see what was configured on interface S0/0/1: QUESTION NO: 233 CORRECT TEXT "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 191
  • 192. Answer: On the MGT Router: Config t Router eigrp 12 Network 192.168.77.0 Cisco 200-120 Exam QUESTION NO: 234 CORRECT TEXT "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 192
  • 193. Cisco 200-120 Exam A network associate is configuring a router for the weaver company to provide internet access. The ISP has provided the company six public IP addresses of 198.18.184.105 198.18.184.110. The company has 14 hosts that need to access the internet simultaneously. The hosts in the company LAN have been assigned private space addresses in the range of 192.168.100.17 – 192.168.100.30. Answer: The company has 14 hosts that need to access the internet simultaneously but we just have 6 public IP addresses from 198.18.184.105 to 198.18.184.110/29. Therefore we have to use NAT overload (or PAT) Double click on the Weaver router to open it Router>enable Router#configure terminal First you should change the router's name to Weaver Router(config)#hostname Weaver Create a NAT pool of global addresses to be allocated with their netmask. Weaver(config)#ip nat pool mypool 198.18.184.105 198.18.184.110 netmask 255.255.255.248 Create a standard access control list that permits the addresses that are to be translated "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 193
  • 194. Cisco 200-120 Exam Weaver(config)#access-list 1 permit 192.168.100.16 0.0.0.15 Establish dynamic source translation, specifying the access list that was defined in the prior step Weaver(config)#ip nat inside source list 1 pool mypool overload This command translates all source addresses that pass access list 1, which means a source address from 192.168.100.17 to 192.168.100.30, into an address from the pool named mypool (the pool contains addresses from 198.18.184.105 to 198.18.184.110) Overload keyword allows to map multiple IP addresses to a single registered IP address (many-to-one) by using different ports The question said that appropriate interfaces have been configured for NAT inside and NAT outside statements. This is how to configure the NAT inside and NAT outside, just for your understanding: Weaver(config)#interface fa0/0 Weaver(config-if)#ip nat inside Weaver(config-if)#exit Weaver(config)#interface s0/0 Weaver(config-if)#ip nat outside Weaver(config-if)#end Finally, we should save all your work with the following command: Weaver#copy running-config startup-config Check your configuration by going to "Host for testing" and type: C :>ping 192.0.2.114 The ping should work well and you will be replied from 192.0.2.114 QUESTION NO: 235 CORRECT TEXT Central Florida Widgets recently installed a new router in their office. Complete the network installation by performing the initial router configurations and configuring R1PV2 routing using the router command line interface (CLI) on the RC. Configure the router per the following requirements: Name of the router is R2 Enable. secret password is cisco The password to access user EXEC mode using the console is cisco2 The password to allow telnet access to the router is cisco3 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 194
  • 195. Cisco 200-120 Exam IPV4 addresses mast be configured as follows: Ethernet network 209.165.201.0/27 - router has fourth assignable host address in subnet Serial network is 192.0.2.176/28 - router has last assignable host address in the subnet. Interfaces should be enabled. Router protocol is RIPV2 Attention: In practical examinations, please note the following, the actual information will prevail. 1. Name or the router is xxx 2. EnablE. secret password is xxx 3. Password In access user EXEC mode using the console is xxx 4. The password to allow telnet access to the router is xxx 5. IP information Answer: Router>enable Router#config terminal Router(config)#hostname R2 R2(config)#enable secret Cisco 1 R2(config)#line console 0 R2(config-line)#password Cisco 2 R2(config-line)#exit R2(config)#line vty 0 4 R2(config-line)#password Cisco 3 R2(config-line)#login R2(config-line)#exit R2(config)#interface faO/0 R2(config-if)#ip address 209.165.201.1 255.255.255.224 R2(config)#interface s0/0/0 R2(config-if)#ip address 192.0.2.176 255.255.255.240 "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 195
  • 196. Cisco 200-120 Exam R2(config-if)#no shutdown R2(config-if)#exit R2(config)#router rip R2(config-router)#version 2 R2(config-router)#network 209.165.201.0 R2(config-router)#network 192.0.2.176 R2(config-router)#end R2#copy run start QUESTION NO: 236 CORRECT TEXT Answer: Select the console on Corp1 router Configuring ACL Corp1>enable "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 196
  • 197. Cisco 200-120 Exam Corp1#configure terminal comment: To permit only Host C (192.168.33.3){source addr} to access finance server address (172.22.242.23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.33.3 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 comment: To deny any source to access finance server address (172.22.242.23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp any host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 comment: To permit ip protocol from any source to access any destination because of the implicit deny any any statement at the end of ACL. Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any Applying the ACL on the Interface comment: Check show ip interface brief command to identify the interface type and number by checking the IP address configured. Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 If the ip address configured already is incorrect as well as the subnet mask. this should be corrected in order ACL to work type this commands at interface mode : no ip address 192.x.x.x 255.x.x.x (removes incorrect configured ipaddress and subnet mask) Configure Correct IP Address and subnet mask : ip address 172.22.242.30 255.255.255.240 ( range of address specified going to server is given as 172.22.242.17 - 172.22.242.30 ) comment: Place the ACL to check for packets going outside the interface towards the finance web server. Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out Corp1(config-if)#end Important: To save your running config to startup before exit. Corp1#copy running-config startup-config Verifying the Configuration : Step1: show ip interface brief command identifies the interface on which to apply access list. Step2: Click on each host A,B,C & D . Host opens a web browser page , Select address box of the web browser and type the ip address of finance web server(172.22.242.23) to test whether it permits /deny access to the finance web Server . Step 3: Only Host C (192.168.33.3) has access to the server . If the other host can also access then maybe something went wrong in your configuration . check whether you configured correctly and in order. Step 4: If only Host C (192.168.33.3) can access the Finance Web Server you can click on NEXT button to successfully submit the ACL SIM. QUESTION NO: 237 CORRECT TEXT "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 197
  • 198. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: Corp1#conf t Corp1(config)# access-list 128 permit tcp host 192.168.240.1 host 172.22.141.26 eq www Corp1(config)# access-list 128 deny tcp any host 172.22.141.26 eq www Corp1(config)# access-list 128 permit ip any any Corp1(config)#int fa0/1 Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 128 out Corp1(config-if)#end Corp1#copy run startup-config QUESTION NO: 238 CORRECT TEXT "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 198
  • 199. Cisco 200-120 Exam Answer: Corp1>enable Corp1#configure terminal Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.33.3 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp 192.168.33.0 0.0.0.255 host 172.22.242.23 eq 80 Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 sh ip int brief Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out Corp1(config-if)#end Corp1#copy running-config startup-config Explanation: Select the console on Corp1 router Configuring ACL Corp1 >enable Corp1#configure terminal "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 199
  • 200. Cisco 200-120 Exam comment: To permit only Host C (192.168. 33. 3){source addr} to access finance server address (172. 22. 242. 23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit tcp host 192. 168. 33. 3 host 172. 22. 242. 23 eq 80 comment: To deny any source to access finance server address (172. 22. 242. 23) {destination addr} on port number 80 (web) Corp1(config)#access-list 100 deny tcp any host 172. 22. 242. 23 eq 80 comment: To permit ip protocol from any source to access any destination because of the implicit deny any any statement at the end of ACL. Corp1(config)#access-list 100 permit ip any any Applying the ACL on the Interface comment: Check show ip interface brief command to identify the interface type and number by checking the IP address configured. Corp1(config)#interface fa 0/1 If the ip address configured already is incorrect as well as the subnet mask, this should be corrected in order ACL to work type this commands at interface mode : no ip address 192. x. x. x 255. x. x. x (removes incorrect configured ip address and subnet mask) Configure Correct IP Address and subnet mask: ip address 172. 22. 242. 30 255. 255. 255. 240 (range of address specified going to server is given as 172. 22. 242. 17-172. 22. 242. 30 ) comment: Place the ACL to check for packets going outside the interface towards the finance web server. Corp1(config-if)#ip access-group 100 out Corp1(config-if)#end Important: To save your running config to startup before exit. Corp1#copy running-config startup-config Verifying the Configuration : Step1: show ip interface brief command identifies the interface on which to apply access list. Step2: Click on each host A,B,C & D. Host opens a web browser page, Select address box of the web browser and type the ip address of finance web server(172. 22. 242. 23) to test whether it permits /deny access to the finance web Server. Step 3: Only Host C (192.168. 33. 3) has access to the server. If the other host can also access then maybe something went wrong in your configuration check whether you configured correctly and in order. Step 4: If only Host C (192.168. 33. 3) can access the Finance Web Server you can click on NEXT button to successfully submit the ACL SIM. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 200
  • 201. Topic 8, WAN Technologies QUESTION NO: 239 The output of the show frame-relay pvc command shows "PVC STATUS = INACTIVE". What does this mean? A. The PVC is configured correctly and is operating normally, but no data packets have been detected for more than five minutes. B. The PVC is configured correctly, is operating normally, and is no longer actively seeking the address of the remote router. C. The PVC is configured correctly, is operating normally, and is waiting for interesting traffic to trigger a call to the remote router. D. The PVC is configured correctly on the local switch, but there is a problem on the remote end of the PVC. E. The PVC is not configured on the local switch. Answer: D Explanation: Explanation The PVC STATUS displays the status of the PVC. The DCE device creates and sends the report to the DTE devices. There are 4 statuses: + ACTIVE: the PVC is operational and can transmit data + INACTIVE: the connection from the local router to the switch is working, but the connection to the remote router is not available + DELETED: the PVC is not present and no LMI information is being received from the Frame Relay switch + STATIC: the Local Management Interface (LMI) mechanism on the interface is disabled (by using the “no keepalive” command). This status is rarely seen so it is ignored in some books. QUESTION NO: 240 DRAG DROP Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 201
  • 202. Answer: Explanation: QUESTION NO: 241 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 202
  • 203. In the Frame Relay network, which IP addresses would be assigned to the interfaces with point-to-point PVCs? A. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 DLCI 17: 192.168.10.1 /24 DLCI 99: 192.168.10.2 /24 DLCI 28: 192.168.10.3 /24 B. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 DLCI 17: 192.168.11.1 /24 DLCI 99: 192.168.12.1 /24 DLCI 28: 192.168.13.1 /24 C. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 DLCI 17: 192.168.11.1 /24 DLCI 99: 192.168.10.2 /24 DLCI 28: 192.168.11.2 /24 D. DLCI 16: 192.168.10.1 /24 DLCI 17: 192.168.10.2 /24 DLCI 99: 192.168.10.3 /24 DLCI 28: 192.168.10.4 /24 Answer: C Explanation: With point to point PVC, each connection needs to be in a separate subnet. The R2-R1 connection (DLCI 16 to 99) would have each router within the same subnet. Similarly, the R3-R1 connection would also be in the same subnet, but it must be in a different one than the R2-R1 connection. QUESTION NO: 242 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 203
  • 204. Which command is used to enable CHAP authentication, with PAP as the fallback method, on a serial interface? A. Router(config-if)# ppp authentication chap fallback ppp B. Router(config-if)# ppp authentication chap pap C. Router(config-if)# authentication ppp chap fallback ppp D. Router(config-if)# authentication ppp chap pap Answer: B Explanation: This command tells the router to first use CHAP and then go to PAP if CHAP isn't available. QUESTION NO: 243 Which protocol is an open standard protocol framework that is commonly used in VPNs, to provide secure end-to-end communications? A. RSA B. L2TP C. IPsec D. PPTP Answer: C Explanation: IPSec is a framework of open standards that provides data confidentiality, data integrity, and data authentication between participating peers at the IP layer. IPSec can be used to protect one or more data flows between IPSec peers. QUESTION NO: 244 At which layer of the OSI model does PPP perform? A. Layer 2 B. Layer 3 C. Layer 4 D. Layer 5 Answer: A Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 204
  • 205. Cisco 200-120 Exam Explanation: The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) provides a standard method for transporting multi-protocol datagrams over point-to-point links. PPP was originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for transporting IP traffic between two peers. It is a data link layer protocol (layer 2 in the OSI model ) QUESTION NO: 245 The command frame-relay map ip 10.121.16.8 102 broadcast was entered on the router. Which of the following statements is true concerning this command? A. This command should be executed from the global configuration mode. B. The IP address 10.121.16.8 is the local router port used to forward data. C. 102 is the remote DLCI that will receive the information. D. This command is required for all Frame Relay configurations. E. The broadcast option allows packets, such as RIP updates, to be forwarded across the PVC. Answer: E Explanation: Broadcast is added to the configurations of the frame relay, so the PVC supports broadcast, allowing the routing protocol updates that use the broadcast update mechanism to be forwarded across itself. QUESTION NO: 246 Which two options are valid WAN connectivity methods? (Choose two.) A. PPP B. WAP C. DSL D. L2TPv3 E. Ethernet Answer: A,C Explanation: The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) provides a standard method for transporting multi-protocol datagrams over point-to-point links. PPP was originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for transporting IP traffic between two peers. It is a data link layer protocol used for WAN connections. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 205
  • 206. Cisco 200-120 Exam DSL is also considered a WAN connection, as it can be used to connect networks, typically when used with VPN technology. QUESTION NO: 247 Which Layer 2 protocol encapsulation type supports synchronous and asynchronous circuits and has built-in security mechanisms? A. HDLC B. PPP C. X.25 D. Frame Relay Answer: B Explanation: PPP: Provides router-to-router and host-to-network connections over synchronous and asynchronous circuits. PPP was designed to work with several network layer protocols, including IP. PPP also has built-in security mechanisms, such as Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). QUESTION NO: 248 Which encapsulation type is a Frame Relay encapsulation type that is supported by Cisco routers? A. IETF B. ANSI Annex D C. Q9333-A Annex A D. HDLC Answer: A Explanation: Explanation Cisco supports two Frame Relay encapsulation types: the Cisco encapsulation and the IETF Frame Relay encapsulation, which is in conformance with RFC 1490 and RFC 2427. The former is often used to connect two Cisco routers while the latter is used to connect a Cisco router to a non-Cisco router. You can test with your Cisco router when typing the command Router(config-if)# encapsulation frame-relay ? on a WAN link. Below is the output of this command (notice Cisco is "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 206
  • 207. Cisco 200-120 Exam the default encapsulation so it is not listed here, just press Enter to use it). Note: Three LMI options are supported by Cisco routers are ansi, Cisco, and Q933a. They represent the ANSI Annex D, Cisco, and ITU Q933-A (Annex A) LMI types, respectively. HDLC is a WAN protocol same as Frame-Relay and PPP so it is not a Frame Relay encapsulation type. QUESTION NO: 249 RouterA is unable to reach RouterB. Both routers are running IOS version 12.0. After reviewing the command output and graphic, what is the most likely cause of the problem? A. incorrect bandwidth configuration B. incorrect LMI configuration C. incorrect map statement D. incorrect IP address Answer: C Explanation: Explanation With this topology and the DLCI, we can only think of “incorrect map statement”. From the topology we can deduce traffic with a DLCI of 75 will be sent to 192.168.2.1 but the text below wrongly shows “DLCI 50 for the next router 192.168.2.1 -> . "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 207
  • 208. QUESTION NO: 250 Refer to the exhibit. Cisco 200-120 Exam What is the meaning of the term dynamic as displayed in the output of the show frame-relay map command shown? A. The Serial0/0 interface is passing traffic. B. The DLCI 100 was dynamically allocated by the router. C. The Serial0/0 interface acquired the IP address of 172.16.3.1 from a DHCP server. D. The DLCI 100 will be dynamically changed as required to adapt to changes in the Frame Relay cloud. E. The mapping between DLCI 100 and the end station IP address 172.16.3.1 was learned through Inverse ARP. Answer: E Explanation: Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (Inverse ARP) was developed to provide a mechanism for dynamic DLCI to Layer 3 address maps. Inverse ARP works much the same way Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) works on a LAN. However, with ARP, the device knows the Layer 3 IP address and needs to know the remote data link MAC address. With Inverse ARP, the router knows the Layer 2 address which is the DLCI, but needs to know the remote Layer 3 IP address. When using dynamic address mapping, Inverse ARP requests a next-hop protocol address for each active PVC. Once the requesting router receives an Inverse ARP response, it updates its DLCI-to-Layer 3 address mapping table. Dynamic address mapping is enabled by default for all protocols enabled on a physical interface. If the Frame Relay environment supports LMI autosensing and Inverse ARP, dynamic address mapping takes place automatically. Therefore, no static address mapping is required. QUESTION NO: 251 A network administrator needs to configure a serial link between the main office and a remote location. The router at the remote office is a non-Cisco router. How should the network administrator configure the serial interface of the main office router to make the connection? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 208
  • 209. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 Main(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 Main(config-if)# no shut B. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 Main(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 Main(config-if)# encapsulation ppp Main(config-if)# no shut C. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 Main(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 Main(config-if)# encapsulation frame-relay Main(config-if)# authentication chap Main(config-if)# no shut D. Main(config)# interface serial 0/0 Main(config-if)#ip address 172.16.1.1 255.255.255.252 Main(config-if)#encapsulation ietf Main(config-if)# no shut Answer: B Explanation: With serial point to point links there are two options for the encapsulation. The default, HDLC, is Cisco proprietary and works only with other Cisco routers. The other option is PPP which is standards based and supported by all vendors. QUESTION NO: 252 What are three reasons that an organization with multiple branch offices and roaming users might implement a Cisco VPN solution instead of point-to-point WAN links? (Choose three.) A. reduced cost B. better throughput C. broadband incompatibility D. increased security E. scalability F. reduced latency Answer: A,D,E Explanation: IPsec offer a number of advantages over point to point WAN links, particularly when multiple locations are involved. These include reduced cost, increased security since all traffic is encrypted, and increased scalability as s single WAN link can be used to connect to all locations in a VPN, where as a point to point link would need to be provisioned to each location. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 209
  • 210. QUESTION NO: 253 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which two statistics appear in show frame-relay map output? (Choose two.) A. the number of BECN packets that are received by the router B. the value of the local DLCI C. the number of FECN packets that are received by the router D. the status of the PVC that is configured on the router E. the IP address of the local router Answer: B,D Explanation: Sample “show frame-relay map” output: R1#sh frame mapSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.1 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), dynamic,broadcast,, status defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.3 dlci 403(0x193,0x6430), dynamic,broadcast,, status defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.4 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), static,CISCO, status defined, active QUESTION NO: 254 Users have been complaining that their Frame Relay connection to the corporate site is very slow. The network administrator suspects that the link is overloaded. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 210
  • 211. Cisco 200-120 Exam Based on the partial output of the Router# show frame relay pvc command shown in the graphic, which output value indicates to the local router that traffic sent to the corporate site is experiencing congestion? A. DLCI = 100 B. last time PVC status changed 00:25:40 C. in BECN packets 192 D. in FECN packets 147 E. in DE packets 0 Answer: C Explanation: If device A is sending data to device B across a Frame Relay infrastructure and one of the intermediate Frame Relay switches encounters congestion, congestion being full buffers, over-subscribed port, overloaded resources, etc, it will set the BECN bit on packets being returned to the sending device and the FECN bit on the packets being sent to the receiving device. QUESTION NO: 255 Which command allows you to verify the encapsulation type (CISCO or IETF) for a Frame Relay link? A. show frame-relay lmi B. show frame-relay map C. show frame-relay pvc D. show interfaces serial Answer: B Explanation: When connecting Cisco devices with non-Cisco devices, you must use IETF4 encapsulation on both devices. Check the encapsulation type on the Cisco device with the show frame-relay map exec command. QUESTION NO: 256 It has become necessary to configure an existing serial interface to accept a second Frame Relay virtual circuit. Which of the following procedures are required to accomplish this task? (Choose three.) "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 211
  • 212. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. Remove the IP address from the physical interface. B. Encapsulate the physical interface with multipoint PPP. C. Create the virtual interfaces with the interface command. D. Configure each subinterface with its own IP address. E. Disable split horizon to prevent routing loops between the subinterface networks. F. Configure static Frame Relay map entries for each subinterface network. Answer: A,C,D Explanation: For multiple PVC’s on a single interface, you must use subinterfaces, with each subinterface configured for each PVC. Each subinterface will then have its own IP address, and no IP address will be assigned to the main interface. QUESTION NO: 257 What occurs on a Frame Relay network when the CIR is exceeded? A. All TCP traffic is marked discard eligible. B. All UDP traffic is marked discard eligible and a BECN is sent. C. All TCP traffic is marked discard eligible and a BECN is sent. D. All traffic exceeding the CIR is marked discard eligible. Answer: D Explanation: Explanation Committed information rate (CIR): The minimum guaranteed data transfer rate agreed to by the Frame Relay switch. Frames that are sent in excess of the CIR are marked as discard eligible (DE) which means they can be dropped if the congestion occurs within the Frame Relay network. Note: In the Frame Relay frame format, there is a bit called Discard eligible (DE) bit that is used to identify frames that are first to be dropped when the CIR is exceeded. QUESTION NO: 258 Which two statements about using the CHAP authentication mechanism in a PPP link are true? (Choose two.) A. CHAP uses a two-way handshake. B. CHAP uses a three-way handshake. C. CHAP authentication periodically occurs after link establishment. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 212
  • 213. Cisco 200-120 Exam D. CHAP authentication passwords are sent in plaintext. E. CHAP authentication is performed only upon link establishment. F. CHAP has no protection from playback attacks. Answer: B,C Explanation: CHAP is an authentication scheme used by Point to Point Protocol (PPP) servers to validate the identity of remote clients. CHAP periodically verifies the identity of the client by using a three-way handshake. This happens at the time of establishing the initial link (LCP), and may happen again at any time afterwards. The verification is based on a shared secret (such as the client user's password). QUESTION NO: 259 Refer to the exhibit. Which statement describes DLCI 17? A. DLCI 17 describes the ISDN circuit between R2 and R3. B. DLCI 17 describes a PVC on R2. It cannot be used on R3 or R1. C. DLCI 17 is the Layer 2 address used by R2 to describe a PVC to R3. D. DLCI 17 describes the dial-up circuit from R2 and R3 to the service provider. Answer: C Explanation: DLCI-Data Link Connection Identifier Bits: The DLCI serves to identify the virtual connection so that the receiving end knows which information connection a frame belongs to. Note that this DLCI "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 213
  • 214. has only local significance. Frame Relay is strictly a Layer 2 protocol suite. QUESTION NO: 260 What is the result of issuing the frame-relay map ip 192.168.1.2 202 broadcast command? A. defines the destination IP address that is used in all broadcast packets on DCLI 202 B. defines the source IP address that is used in all broadcast packets on DCLI 202 C. defines the DLCI on which packets from the 192.168.1.2 IP address are received D. defines the DLCI that is used for all packets that are sent to the 192.168.1.2 IP address Answer: D Explanation: This command identifies the DLCI that should be used for all packets destined to the 192.168.1.2 address. In this case, DLCI 202 should be used. QUESTION NO: 261 Which PPP subprotocol negotiates authentication options? A. NCP B. ISDN C. SLIP D. LCP E. DLCI Answer: D Explanation: The PPP Link Control Protocol (LCP) is documented in RFC 1661. LPC negotiates link and PPP parameters to dynamically configure the data link layer of a PPP connection. Common LCP options include the PPP MRU, the authentication protocol, compression of PPP header fields, callback, and multilink options. QUESTION NO: 262 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 214
  • 215. Cisco 200-120 Exam What are two characteristics of Frame Relay point-to-point subinterfaces? (Choose two.) A. They create split-horizon issues. B. They require a unique subnet within a routing domain. C. They emulate leased lines. D. They are ideal for full-mesh topologies. E. They require the use of NBMA options when using OSPF. Answer: B,C Explanation: Subinterfaces are used for point to point frame relay connections, emulating virtual point to point leased lines. Each subinterface requires a unique IP address/subnet. Remember, you can not assign multiple interfaces in a router that belong to the same IP subnet. QUESTION NO: 263 What command is used to verify the DLCI destination address in a Frame Relay static configuration? A. show frame-relay pvc B. show frame-relay lmi C. show frame-relay map D. show frame relay end-to-end Answer: C Explanation: Sample “show frame-relay map” output: R1#sh frame mapSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.1 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), dynamic,broadcast,, status defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.3 dlci 403(0x193,0x6430), dynamic,broadcast,, status defined, activeSerial0/0 (up): ip 10.4.4.4 dlci 401(0x191,0x6410), static,CISCO, status defined, active QUESTION NO: 264 What is the purpose of Inverse ARP? A. to map a known IP address to a MAC address "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 215
  • 216. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. to map a known DLCI to a MAC address C. to map a known MAC address to an IP address D. to map a known DLCI to an IP address E. to map a known IP address to a SPID F. to map a known SPID to a MAC address Answer: D Explanation: Dynamic address mapping relies on the Frame Relay Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (Inverse ARP), defined by RFC 1293, to resolve a next hop network protocol (IP) address to a local DLCI value. The Frame Relay router sends out Inverse ARP requests on its Frame Relay PVC to discover the protocol address of the remote device connected to the Frame Relay network. The responses to the Inverse ARP requests are used to populate an address-to-DLCI mapping table on the Frame Relay router or access server. The router builds and maintains this address-to- DLCI mapping table, which contains all resolved Inverse ARP requests, including both dynamic and static mapping entries. Topic 9, Mix Questions Set QUESTION NO: 265 What is a valid HSRP virtual MAC address? A. 0000.5E00.01A3 B. 0007.B400.AE01 C. 0000.0C07.AC15 D. 0007.5E00.B301 Answer: C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 266 In GLBP, which router will respond to client ARP requests? A. The active virtual gateway will reply with one of four possible virtual MAC addresses. B. All GLBP member routers will reply in round-robin fashion. C. The active virtual gateway will reply with its own hardware MAC address. D. The GLBP member routers will reply with one of four possible burned in hardware addresses. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 216
  • 217. Answer: A Explanation: QUESTION NO: 267 Cisco 200-120 Exam Which statement describes VRRP object tracking? A. It monitors traffic flow and link utilization. B. It ensures the best VRRP router is the virtual router master for the group. C. It causes traffic to dynamically move to higher bandwidth links. D. It thwarts man-in-the-middle attacks. Answer: B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 268 What are three benefits of GLBP? (Choose three.) A. GLBP supports up to eight virtual forwarders per GLBP group. B. GLBP supports clear text and MD5 password authentication between GLBP group members. C. GLBP is an open source standardized protocol that can be used with multiple vendors. D. GLBP supports up to 1024 virtual routers. E. GLBP can load share traffic across a maximum of four routers. F. GLBP elects two AVGs and two standby AVGs for redundancy. Answer: B,D,E Explanation: QUESTION NO: 269 Which three statements about HSRP operation are true? (Choose three.) A. The virtual IP address and virtual MA+K44C address are active on the HSRP Master router. B. The HSRP default timers are a 3 second hello interval and a 10 second dead interval. C. HSRP supports only clear-text authentication. D. The HSRP virtual IP address must be on a different subnet than the routers' interfaces on the same LAN. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 217
  • 218. E. The HSRP virtual IP address must be the same as one of the router's interface addresses on the LAN. F. HSRP supports up to 255 groups per interface, enabling an administrative form of load balancing. Answer: A,B,F Explanation: QUESTION NO: 270 Which three statements about Syslog utilization are true? (Choose three.) A. Utilizing Syslog improves network performance. B. The Syslog server automatically notifies the network administrator of network problems. C. A Syslog server provides the storage space necessary to store log files without using router disk space. D. There are more Syslog messages available within Cisco IOS than there are comparable SNMP trap messages. E. Enabling Syslog on a router automatically enables NTP for accurate time stamping. F. A Syslog server helps in aggregation of logs and alerts. Answer: C,D,F Explanation: QUESTION NO: 271 A network administrator enters the following command on a router: logging trap 3. What are three message types that will be sent to the Syslog server? (Choose three.) A. informational B. emergency C. warning D. critical E. debug F. error Answer: B,D,F Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 218
  • 219. QUESTION NO: 272 Cisco 200-120 Exam What is the default Syslog facility level? A. local4 B. local5 C. local6 D. local7 Answer: D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 273 What command instructs the device to timestamp Syslog debug messages in milliseconds? A. service timestamps log datetime localtime B. service timestamps debug datetime msec C. service timestamps debug datetime localtime D. service timestamps log datetime msec Answer: B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 274 Refer to the exhibit. What is the cause of the Syslog output messages? A. The EIGRP neighbor on Fa0/1 went down due to a failed link. B. The EIGRP neighbor connected to Fa0/1 is participating in a different EIGRP process, causing the adjacency to go down. C. A shut command was executed on interface Fa0/1, causing the EIGRP adjacency to go down. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 219
  • 220. D. Interface Fa0/1 has become error disabled, causing the EIGRP adjacency to go down. Answer: C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 275 What are three components that comprise the SNMP framework? (Choose three.) A. MIB B. agent C. set D. AES E. supervisor F. manager Answer: A,B,F Explanation: QUESTION NO: 276 What are three components that comprise the SNMP framework? (Choose three.) A. MIB B. agent C. set D. AES E. supervisor F. manager Answer: A,B,F Explanation: QUESTION NO: 277 What SNMP message alerts the manager to a condition on the network? A. response Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 220
  • 221. B. get C. trap D. capture Answer: C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 278 Cisco 200-120 Exam What authentication type is used by SNMPv2? A. HMAC-MD5 B. HMAC-SHA C. CBC-DES D. community strings Answer: D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 279 Which three statements about the features of SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 are true? (Choose three.) A. SNMPv3 enhanced SNMPv2 security features. B. SNMPv3 added the Inform protocol message to SNMP. C. SNMPv2 added the Inform protocol message to SNMP. D. SNMPv3 added the GetBulk protocol messages to SNMP. E. SNMPv2 added the GetBulk protocol message to SNMP. F. SNMPv2 added the GetNext protocol message to SNMP. Answer: A,C,E Explanation: QUESTION NO: 280 What are three reasons to collect Netflow data on a company network? (Choose three.) A. To identify applications causing congestion. "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 221
  • 222. Cisco 200-120 Exam B. To authorize user network access. C. To report and alert link up / down instances. D. To diagnose slow network performance, bandwidth hogs, and bandwidth utilization. E. To detect suboptimal routing in the network. F. To confirm the appropriate amount of bandwidth that has been allocated to each Class of Service. Answer: A,D,F Explanation: QUESTION NO: 281 What Netflow component can be applied to an interface to track IPv4 traffic? A. flow monitor B. flow record C. flow sampler D. flow exporter Answer: A Explanation: QUESTION NO: 282 What Cisco IOS feature can be enabled to pinpoint an application that is causing slow network performance? A. SNMP B. Netflow C. WCCP D. IP SLA Answer: B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 283 What command visualizes the general NetFlow data on the command line? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 222
  • 223. A. show ip flow export B. show ip flow top-talkers C. show ip cache flow D. show mls sampling E. show mls netflow ip Answer: C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 284 What are three values that must be the same within a sequence of packets for Netflow to consider them a network flow? (Choose three.) A. source IP address B. source MAC address C. egress interface D. ingress interface E. destination IP address F. IP next-hop Answer: A,D,E Explanation: QUESTION NO: 285 What are three factors a network administrator must consider before implementing Netflow in the network? (Choose three.) A. CPU utilization B. where Netflow data will be sent C. number of devices exporting Netflow data D. port availability E. SNMP version F. WAN encapsulation Answer: A,B,C Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 223
  • 224. QUESTION NO: 286 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator is configuring an EtherChannel between SW1 and SW2. The SW1 configuration is shown. What is the correct configuration for SW2? A. interface FastEthernet 0/1 channel-group 1 mode active switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk interface FastEthernet 0/2 channel-group 1 mode active switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk B. interface FastEthernet 0/1 channel-group 2 mode auto switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk interface FastEthernet 0/2 channel-group 2 mode auto switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk C. interface FastEthernet 0/1 channel-group 1 mode desirable switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 224
  • 225. interface FastEthernet 0/2 channel-group 1 mode desirable switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk D. interface FastEthernet 0/1 channel-group 1 mode passive switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk interface FastEthernet 0/2 channel-group 1 mode passive switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk Answer: C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 287 Which two statements about the OSPF Router ID are true? (Choose two.) A. It identifies the source of a Type 1 LSA. B. It should be the same on all routers in an OSPF routing instance. C. By default, the lowest IP address on the router becomes the OSPF Router ID. D. The router automatically chooses the IP address of a loopback as the OSPF Router ID. E. It is created using the MAC Address of the loopback interface. Answer: A,D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 288 What parameter can be different on ports within an EtherChannel? A. speed B. DTP negotiation settings C. trunk encapsulation D. duplex Answer: B Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 225
  • 226. QUESTION NO: 289 What are two benefits of using a single OSPF area network design? (Choose two.) A. It is less CPU intensive for routers in the single area. B. It reduces the types of LSAs that are generated. C. It removes the need for virtual links. D. It increases LSA response times. E. It reduces the number of required OSPF neighbor adjacencies. Answer: B,C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 290 Refer to the exhibit. What set of commands was configured on interface Fa0/3 to produce the given output? A. interface FastEthernet 0/3 channel-group 1 mode desirable switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk B. interface FastEthernet 0/3 channel-group 2 mode passive switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk C. interface FastEthernet 0/3 channel-group 2 mode active switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport mode trunk D. interface FastEthernet 0/3 channel-group 2 mode on switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 226
  • 227. switchport mode trunk Answer: B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 291 Cisco 200-120 Exam What are two enhancements that OSPFv3 supports over OSPFv2? (Choose two.) A. It requires the use of ARP. B. It can support multiple IPv6 subnets on a single link. C. It supports up to 2 instances of OSPFv3 over a common link. D. It routes over links rather than over networks. Answer: B,D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 292 Refer to the exhibit. If the devices produced the given output, what is the cause of the EtherChannel problem? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 227
  • 228. Cisco 200-120 Exam A. SW1's Fa0/1 interface is administratively shut down. B. There is an encapsulation mismatch between SW1's Fa0/1 and SW2's Fa0/1 interfaces. C. There is an MTU mismatch between SW1's Fa0/1 and SW2's Fa0/1 interfaces. D. There is a speed mismatch between SW1's Fa0/1 and SW2's Fa0/1 interfaces. Answer: D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 293 When a router undergoes the exchange protocol within OSPF, in what order does it pass through each state? A. exstart state > loading state > exchange state > full state B. exstart state > exchange state > loading state > full state C. exstart state > full state > loading state > exchange state D. loading state > exchange state > full state > exstart state Answer: B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 294 A network administrator creates a layer 3 EtherChannel, bundling four interfaces into channel group 1. On what interface is the IP address configured? A. the port-channel 1 interface B. the highest number member interface C. all member interfaces D. the lowest number member interface Answer: A Explanation: QUESTION NO: 295 What command sequence will configure a router to run OSPF and add network 10.1.1.0 /24 to area 0? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 228
  • 229. A. router ospf area 0 network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 area 0 B. router ospf network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 C. router ospf 1 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 D. router ospf area 0 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 E. router ospf network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 area 0 F. router ospf 1 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 Answer: C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 296 Refer to the exhibit. If the router Cisco returns the given output and has not had its router ID set manually, what value will OSPF use as its router ID? A. 192.168.1.1 B. 172.16.1.1 C. 1.1.1.1 D. 2.2.2.2 Answer: D Explanation: Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 229
  • 230. QUESTION NO: 297 What OSPF command, when configured, will include all interfaces into area 0? A. network 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 area 0 B. network 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 area 0 C. network 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 area 0 D. network all-interfaces area 0 Answer: A Explanation: QUESTION NO: 298 Which statement describes the process ID that is used to run OSPF on a router? A. It is globally significant and is used to represent the AS number. B. It is locally significant and is used to identify an instance of the OSPF database. C. It is globally significant and is used to identify OSPF stub areas. D. It is locally significant and must be the same throughout an area. Answer: B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 299 Which three are the components of SNMP? (Choose three) A. MIB B. SNMP Manager C. SysLog Server D. SNMP Agent E. Set Answer: A,B,D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 300 Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 230
  • 231. Cisco 200-120 Exam What are the Popular destinations for syslog messages to be saved? A. Flash B. The logging buffer .RAM C. The console terminal D. Other terminals E. Syslog server Answer: B,C,E Explanation: QUESTION NO: 301 Syslog was configured with a level 3 trap. Which 3 types of logs would be generated (choose three) A. Emergencies B. Alerts C. Critical D. Errors E. Warnings Answer: A,B,C Explanation: QUESTION NO: 302 What are the benefit of using Netflow? (Choose three.) A. Network, Application & User Monitoring B. Network Planning C. Security Analysis D. Accounting/Billing Answer: A,C,D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 303 Which protocol can cause overload on a CPU of a managed device? "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 231
  • 232. A. Netflow B. WCCP C. IP SLA D. SNMP Answer: D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 304 What are the three things that the Netflow uses to consider the traffic to be in a same flow? A. IP address B. Interface name C. Port numbers D. L3 protocol type E. MAC address Answer: A,C,D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 305 What is the alert message generated by SNMP agents called ? A. TRAP B. INFORM C. GET D. SET Answer: A,B Explanation: QUESTION NO: 306 Which three features are added in SNMPv3 over SNMPv2? A. Message Integrity B. Compression C. Authentication Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 232
  • 233. D. Encryption E. Error Detection Answer: A,C,D Explanation: QUESTION NO: 307 In a GLBP network, who is responsible for the arp request? A. AVF B. AVG C. Active Router D. Standby Router Answer: B Cisco 200-120 Exam "Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 233